diff options
author | Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org> | 2024-02-20 18:47:55 +0000 |
---|---|---|
committer | Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org> | 2024-02-20 18:47:55 +0000 |
commit | 58b138a0142f997a2d497a17de915ea5bba2c7e9 (patch) | |
tree | 86fb73bb7baac2251a1245b3888ee6ff5d2cff95 /Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual | |
parent | 12a220e80344b5c02b56a57d4a994ccb854bc22c (diff) |
2024 update for pdftex manual and tests
git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@70016 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751
Diffstat (limited to 'Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual')
22 files changed, 6236 insertions, 6933 deletions
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual/ChangeLog b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual/ChangeLog index af506f2082a..9f447430029 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual/ChangeLog +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual/ChangeLog @@ -1,3 +1,69 @@ +2024-02-01 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org> + + * pdftex.tex (\pdfglyphtounicode): mention that a dot and anything + after is stripped from glyph names before looking for mappings. + (\pdfpxdimen): note that the pdftex default is a few sp different + from luatex, and both luatex and pdftex are a few sp different + from 72dpi. From jfbu, + https://tug.org/pipermail/pdftex/2023-March/009325.html. + +2024-01-16 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org> + + * pdftex.tex: simplify PDF inclusion for tagging, + mention alternatives for small verbatim, + use table option instead of firstaid. + (Still does not actually pass ) + https://tug.org/pipermail/pdftex/2024-January/009377.html + +2024-01-08 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org> + + * pdftex.tex: add alt text for graphic and extra \par + for inline verbatim block. Suggestion from Ulrike: + https://tug.org/pipermail/pdftex/2024-January/009375.html + + * Makefile ($(tinydoc)-fmt.pdf): forgot a `basename`. + +2024-01-07 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org> + + * pdftex.tex: new version of manual in LaTeX; substantially + the same content as the ConTeXt pdftex-t.tex (which is now removed). + * pdftexmanual.cls: LaTeX document class for manual. + * syntaxform.pl: adapt for new source. + * .dict.pws: aspell exceptions. + * Makefile: rewrite for LaTeX. + * README: update. + + * incl: new subdirectory. + * incl/fdl-1.2.tex: adapted from + https://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/fdl-1.2.tex. + * incl/ini-etex.txt, + * incl/ini-pdfetex.txt, + * incl/pdftexconfig.txt: renamed from previous example files. + * incl/pdfmin-fmt.tex: ConTeXt source to format the tiny PDF example, + pulled out from pdftex-t.tex. + * incl/pdfmin-src.tex: source for the tiny PDF example, + renamed from pdftex-w.tex. + * incl/pdftex-help.txt: generated. + + * pdftex-t.tex: remove, old ConTeXt source. + * pdftex-i.tex: remove, old ConTeXt screen version, not built + for many years. + * syntaxform.awk: remove, not worth the trouble to update. + * makefiles.cmd: remove, old Windows routine. + +2024-01-06 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org> + + * pdftex-t.tex (\pdfximage): mention the "named" keyword + for named destination. This is the last change to the ConTeXt + source before removal and replacement by the LaTeX version. + +2023-04-30 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org> + and Han The Thanh <hanthethanh@gmail.com> + + * pdftex-t.tex (\pdfglyphtounicode): describe the + \pdfglyphtounicode{tfm:foo/abc}{5678} + feature to define abc=U+5678 for only the font foo.tfm. + 2023-02-26 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org> * pdftex-t.tex (\introducedplural): new macro. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual/Makefile b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual/Makefile index 2c8006c1922..c92a5de879b 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual/Makefile +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual/Makefile @@ -1,151 +1,106 @@ -# $Id: Makefile 905 2023-02-28 01:23:10Z karl $ -# Makefile for pdfTeX documentation. Public domain. - -# Get version we're documenting from the \def in the manual. -pdftexversion=`sed -n 's,^.def.currentpdftex{\(.*\)},\1,p' manual/pdftex-t.tex` - -context = env PATH=/usr/local/texlive/dev/bin/x86_64-linux:$$PATH texexec --batchmode -# context does not have \setupoutput. -# texmfstart exits immediately. - -# what we distribute in TeX Live. -default: pdftex-a.pdf pdftex-syntax.txt - -# the other formats (everything that can be built). -all: pdftex-l.pdf pdftex-s.pdf booklet - -common_deps = pdftex-t.tex pdftex-w.txt pdftex-syntax.tex # pdftex-help.txt -pdftex-a.pdf a: $(common_deps) - $(context) --mode=a4 --result=$@ $< - -pdftex-l.pdf l: $(common_deps) - $(context) --mode=letter --result=$@ $< - -pdftex-s.pdf s: $(common_deps) pdftex-i.tex - $(context) --mode=screen --result=$@ $< - - -# booklet version is not made by default. -booklet: pdftex-b.pdf pdftex-b-e.pdf pdftex-b-o.pdf - -pdftex-b.pdf b: pdftex-a.pdf - $(context) --pdfarrange --paper=a5a4 --print=up --addempty=1,2 \ - --result=$@ $< - -pdftex-b-e.pdf: pdftex-a.pdf - $(context) --pdfarrange --paper=a5a4 --print=up --addempty=1,2 \ - --pages=even --result=$@ $< - -pdftex-b-o.pdf: pdftex-a.pdf - $(context) --pdfarrange --paper=a5a4 --print=up --addempty=1,2 \ - --pages=odd --result=$@ $< - - -# Creating the subsidiary/dependent files. - -# TeXable text for the title page. -pdftex-w.txt: pdftex-w.pdf +# $Id: Makefile 917 2024-01-08 23:22:17Z karl $ +# GNU makefile for pdfTeX documentation. Public domain. + +texfot = texfot +pdflatex = $(texfot) pdflatex --file-line-error + +tinydoc = incl/pdfmin +help_msg = incl/pdftex-help.txt +syntax_summary = incl/pdftex-syntax.tex + +# dependencies for building the manual. +deps = pdftex.tex pdftexmanual.cls \ + $(syntax_summary) $(help_msg) $(tinydoc)-crop.pdf + +a4run = $(pdflatex) '\PassOptionsToClass{a4paper}{report} \input $<' +ltrun = $(pdflatex) '\PassOptionsToClass{letterpaper}{report} \input $<' + +all: pdftex-a.pdf pdftex-l.pdf + +pdftex-a.pdf: $(deps) + rm -f $@ + $(a4run) + while grep 'Rerun to get' pdftex.log >/dev/null; do $(a4run); done + mv pdftex.pdf $@ + +pdftex-l.pdf: $(deps) + rm -f $@ + $(ltrun) + while grep 'Rerun to get' pdftex.log >/dev/null; do $(ltrun); done + mv pdftex.pdf $@ + +# Run when making new manual for release; by hand, since it's too +# irritating to depend on the binary. +pdftex-help $(help_msg): + $(pdftex_binary) --help >$(help_msg) + (echo; echo; echo) >>$(help_msg) + $(pdftex_binary) --version >>$(help_msg) + +# Primitives and syntax, in TeX for the printed manual. +$(syntax_summary): pdftex.tex syntaxform.pl + perl syntaxform.pl pdftex.tex >$(syntax_summary) || rm -f $@ + +# We want to typeset the PDF for a tiny input file. This should be +# updated every year: +# - update version numbers. +# - make new binary in source tree. +# - run make frontispiece.pdf. +# (Also run make pdftex-help.) +# +pdftex_binary = ../../source/build-pdftex/texk/web2c/pdftex +texdist_fonts = /usr/local/texlive/dev/texmf-dist/fonts +# +$(tinydoc)-src.pdf: $(tinydoc)-src.tex + env KPATHSEA_WARNING=0 TEXFONTS=$(texdist_fonts)// \ + $(pdftex_binary) -ini -output-directory=incl '$<' + +# The title page PDF as TeXable text. +$(tinydoc)-src.txt: $(tinydoc)-src.pdf #GNUmakefile + test -s $< cat $< \ | expand \ - | fmt -s -w36 \ - | grep --text . \ + | grep -v '^$$' \ + | fmt -s -w45 \ | expand >$@ || rm -f $@ - wc -l pdftex-w.txt # set titlepagelines=half of this + wc -l $@ # set titlepagelines=half this plus one: -# PDF for the title page. This should be updated every year; -# - update version numbers -# - make new binary -# - run this target -# Also check pdftex-help.txt for updates. -pdftex_binary = ../../source/build-pdftex/texk/web2c/pdftex -pdftex-w.pdf: pdftex-w.tex Makefile - TEXFONTS=/usr/local/texlive/dev/texmf-dist/fonts// \ - KPATHSEA_WARNING=0 \ - $(pdftex_binary) -ini '$<' - - -# Too annoying to remake help text every time; check by hand when needed. -pdftex-help.txt: force - $(pdftex_binary) --help >$@ || rm -f $@ -force: - -# if we don't have a build tree around, try from PATH. -build_binary := ../../source/build-pdftex/texk/web2c/pdftex -ifneq "$(realpath $(build_binary))" "" -pdftex_binary := $(build_binary) -else -pdftex_binary := pdftex -endif - -# Primitives and syntax, in TeX for the printed manual, and then in -# plain text for human convenience. -pdftex-syntax.tex: pdftex-t.tex syntaxform.pl - perl syntaxform.pl pdftex-t.tex >pdftex-syntax.tex || rm -f $@ - -pdftex-syntax.txt: pdftex-t.tex pdftex-syntax.tex syntaxform.awk - gawk -f syntaxform.awk pdftex-syntax.tex $< >$@ || rm -f $@ +# Convert that TeXt to PDF. +$(tinydoc)-fmt.pdf: $(tinydoc)-fmt.tex $(tinydoc)-src.txt + context $< >$(tinydoc)-fmt.fot 2>&1 + test -s `basename $@` + mv `basename $(tinydoc)`-fmt.* incl/ +$(tinydoc)-crop.pdf: $(tinydoc)-fmt.pdf + pdfcrop $< $@ # Install from this source directory to TL. # svn co svn://u:pw@tug.org/texlive/trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex tltree = /home/texlive/karl/Master/texmf-dist -dest = $(tltree)/doc/pdftex/manual +dest = $(tltree)/doc/pdftex/manual/ INSTALL_DATA = cp -p -install: default - $(INSTALL_DATA) ChangeLog Makefile README makefiles.cmd $(dest) - $(INSTALL_DATA) pdftex-a.pdf pdftex-syntax.txt $(dest) - $(INSTALL_DATA) pdftex-t.tex pdftex-w.tex pdftex-i.tex $(dest) - $(INSTALL_DATA) syntaxform.awk syntaxform.pl $(dest) - - -# Dist and clean. -# tar/zip including pdftex-a.pdf, pdftex-l.pdf, pdftex-s.pdf, -# although we don't ever make such distributions any more. - -distall=$(distnopdf) pdftex-a.pdf pdftex-l.pdf pdftex-s.pdf - -mandir=manual -distdate=`date +%y%m%d` -distrev=`awk '/Id:/{print $$4; exit}' $(mandir)/pdftex-t.tex` - -distnopdf=pdftex-w.tex pdftex-w.txt pdftex-t.tex \ - pdftex-i.tex syntaxform.awk Makefile makefiles.cmd \ - pdftex-syntax.txt pdftex-help.txt README ChangeLog - -alltar: $(distall) - cd .. && tar cvjf $(mandir)/pdftex-$(pdftexversion)-userman-$(distrev).tar.bz2 \ - $(patsubst %, $(mandir)/%, $(distall)) - -allzip: $(distall) - cd .. && zip $(mandir)/pdftex-$(pdftexversion)-userman-$(distrev).zip \ - $(patsubst %, $(mandir)/%, $(distall)) - - -# tar/zip without PDF files: - -tar: $(distnopdf) - cd .. && tar cvjf $(mandir)/pdftex-$(pdftexversion)-userman-$(distrev)-src.tar.bz2 \ - $(patsubst %, $(mandir)/%, $(distnopdf)) - ls -l *.tar.bz2 - -zip: $(distnopdf) - cd .. && zip $(mandir)/pdftex-$(pdftexversion)-userman-$(distrev)-src.zip \ - $(patsubst %, $(mandir)/%, $(distnopdf)) +install: + $(INSTALL_DATA) ChangeLog Makefile README $(dest) + $(INSTALL_DATA) pdftex-a.pdf $(dest) + $(INSTALL_DATA) pdftex.tex pdftexmanual.cls $(dest) + $(INSTALL_DATA) incl/*.txt incl/*.tex incl/pdfmin-crop.pdf $(dest)/incl + $(INSTALL_DATA) syntaxform.pl $(dest) +# clean. clean: - rm -f *.log *.tuo *.tui *.top *.tmp *-mpgraph.mp + rm -f *.aux *.log *.out *.toc + rm -f incl/*.fot incl/*.log incl/*.tuc + rm -f incl/pdftex-syntax.tex maintainer-clean: clean - rm -f pdftex-a.pdf pdftex-l.pdf pdftex-s.pdf - rm -f pdftex-b.pdf pdftex-b-e.pdf pdftex-b-o.pdf - rm -f pdftex-help.txt pdftex-syntax.txt pdftex-syntax.tex - rm -f pdftex-w.pdf pdftex-w.txt + rm -f pdftex-a.pdf pdftex-l.pdf + rm -f incl/pdftex-help.txt incl/*.pdf clobber allclean realclean distclean: maintainer-clean spell: - myspell pdftex-t.tex + dw <pdftex.tex | grep -v cmr10; true + myspell pdftex.tex diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual/README b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual/README index be29ce125f9..ec15f7771f4 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual/README +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual/README @@ -1,29 +1,32 @@ -$Id: README 742 2016-04-25 17:30:55Z karl $ - +$Id: README 914 2024-01-07 21:48:39Z karl $ (This README file public domain.) Documentation files for pdfTeX: -pdftex-a.pdf A4 paper size -pdftex-l.pdf letter paper size -pdftex-s.pdf screen format -pdftex-b.pdf A5 booklet made from pdftex-a.pdf -pdftex-b-e.pdf A5 booklet, even pages -pdftex-b-o.pdf A5 booklet, odd pages +Final output: +pdftex-a.pdf PDF at A4 paper size +pdftex-l.pdf PDF at letter paper size + +Sources: +pdftex.tex source for manual (LaTeX) +pdftexmanual.cls document class for manual (LaTeX) +incl/pdfmin-src.tex source for tiny pdf example (plain) +incl/pdfmin-fmt.tex source for formatting it (ConTeXt) -pdftex-t.tex source for manual (ConTeXt) -pdftex-w.tex source for title page (plain) -pdftex-i.tex settings for screen output (ConTeXt) +Files to be kept in sync (more or less) with outside sources: +incl/fdl-1.2.tex license text, static +incl/ini-etex.txt .ini example, static +incl/ini-pdfetex.txt another .ini example, static +incl/pdftexconfig.txt example pdftex config file -pdftex-help.txt output of --help -pdftex-syntax.tex primitives and syntax rules, autogenerated from manual -pdftex-syntax.txt autogenerated from .tex +Generated files: +incl/pdftex-help.txt output of --help, must be updated by hand +incl/pdftex-syntax.tex primitives and syntax rules, autogenerated from manual -syntaxform.pl script for making pdftex-syntax.tex -syntaxform.awk script for making pdftex-syntax.txt +Helper script: +syntaxform.pl script for making incl/pdftex-syntax.tex The Makefile has the rules for building everything. -For Windows, see makefiles.cmd, though it has not been updated in years. If working on the manual, make clean removes all the temporary files. make maintainer-clean removes everything that can be generated. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual/incl/fdl-1.2.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual/incl/fdl-1.2.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..44f3013df15 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual/incl/fdl-1.2.tex @@ -0,0 +1,506 @@ +%\chapter*{\rlap{GNU Free Documentation License}} +%\phantomsection % so hyperref creates bookmarks +%\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{GNU Free Documentation License} +%\label{label_fdl} + +\chapter{GNU Free Documentation License (v1.2)} + + \begin{center} + + Version 1.2, November 2002 + + + Copyright \copyright{} 2000,2001,2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + + \bigskip + + 51 Franklin St, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA + + \bigskip + + Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies + of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. +\end{center} + + +\begin{center} +{\bf\large Preamble} +\end{center} + +The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other +functional and useful document ``free'' in the sense of freedom: to +assure everyone the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it, +with or without modifying it, either commercially or noncommercially. +Secondarily, this License preserves for the author and publisher a way +to get credit for their work, while not being considered responsible +for modifications made by others. + +This License is a kind of ``copyleft'', which means that derivative +works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense. It +complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft +license designed for free software. + +We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for free +software, because free software needs free documentation: a free +program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms that the +software does. But this License is not limited to software manuals; +it can be used for any textual work, regardless of subject matter or +whether it is published as a printed book. We recommend this License +principally for works whose purpose is instruction or reference. + + +\begin{center} +{\Large\bf 1. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS\par} +\phantomsection +\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{1. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS} +\end{center} + +This License applies to any manual or other work, in any medium, that +contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can be +distributed under the terms of this License. Such a notice grants a +world-wide, royalty-free license, unlimited in duration, to use that +work under the conditions stated herein. The ``\textbf{Document}'', below, +refers to any such manual or work. Any member of the public is a +licensee, and is addressed as ``\textbf{you}''. You accept the license if you +copy, modify or distribute the work in a way requiring permission +under copyright law. + +A ``\textbf{Modified Version}'' of the Document means any work containing the +Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with +modifications and/or translated into another language. + +A ``\textbf{Secondary Section}'' is a named appendix or a front-matter section of +the Document that deals exclusively with the relationship of the +publishers or authors of the Document to the Document's overall subject +(or to related matters) and contains nothing that could fall directly +within that overall subject. (Thus, if the Document is in part a +textbook of mathematics, a Secondary Section may not explain any +mathematics.) The relationship could be a matter of historical +connection with the subject or with related matters, or of legal, +commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position regarding +them. + +The ``\textbf{Invariant Sections}'' are certain Secondary Sections whose titles +are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in the notice +that says that the Document is released under this License. If a +section does not fit the above definition of Secondary then it is not +allowed to be designated as Invariant. The Document may contain zero +Invariant Sections. If the Document does not identify any Invariant +Sections then there are none. + +The ``\textbf{Cover Texts}'' are certain short passages of text that are listed, +as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that says that +the Document is released under this License. A Front-Cover Text may +be at most 5 words, and a Back-Cover Text may be at most 25 words. + +A ``\textbf{Transparent}'' copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy, +represented in a format whose specification is available to the +general public, that is suitable for revising the document +straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images composed of +pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some widely available +drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text formatters or +for automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for input +to text formatters. A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file +format whose markup, or absence of markup, has been arranged to thwart +or discourage subsequent modification by readers is not Transparent. +An image format is not Transparent if used for any substantial amount +of text. A copy that is not ``Transparent'' is called ``\textbf{Opaque}''. + +Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain +ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format, SGML +or XML using a publicly available DTD, and standard-conforming simple +HTML, PostScript or PDF designed for human modification. Examples of +transparent image formats include PNG, XCF and JPG. Opaque formats +include proprietary formats that can be read and edited only by +proprietary word processors, SGML or XML for which the DTD and/or +processing tools are not generally available, and the +machine-generated HTML, PostScript or PDF produced by some word +processors for output purposes only. + +The ``\textbf{Title Page}'' means, for a printed book, the title page itself, +plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the material +this License requires to appear in the title page. For works in +formats which do not have any title page as such, ``Title Page'' means +the text near the most prominent appearance of the work's title, +preceding the beginning of the body of the text. + +A section ``\textbf{Entitled XYZ}'' means a named subunit of the Document whose +title either is precisely XYZ or contains XYZ in parentheses following +text that translates XYZ in another language. (Here XYZ stands for a +specific section name mentioned below, such as ``\textbf{Acknowledgements}'', +``\textbf{Dedications}'', ``\textbf{Endorsements}'', or ``\textbf{History}''.) +To ``\textbf{Preserve the Title}'' +of such a section when you modify the Document means that it remains a +section ``Entitled XYZ'' according to this definition. + +The Document may include Warranty Disclaimers next to the notice which +states that this License applies to the Document. These Warranty +Disclaimers are considered to be included by reference in this +License, but only as regards disclaiming warranties: any other +implication that these Warranty Disclaimers may have is void and has +no effect on the meaning of this License. + + +\begin{center} +{\Large\bf 2. VERBATIM COPYING\par} +\phantomsection +\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{2. VERBATIM COPYING} +\end{center} + +You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either +commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the +copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License applies +to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you add no other +conditions whatsoever to those of this License. You may not use +technical measures to obstruct or control the reading or further +copying of the copies you make or distribute. However, you may accept +compensation in exchange for copies. If you distribute a large enough +number of copies you must also follow the conditions in section~3. + +You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above, and +you may publicly display copies. + + +\begin{center} +{\Large\bf 3. COPYING IN QUANTITY\par} +\phantomsection +\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{3. COPYING IN QUANTITY} +\end{center} + + +If you publish printed copies (or copies in media that commonly have +printed covers) of the Document, numbering more than 100, and the +Document's license notice requires Cover Texts, you must enclose the +copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these Cover +Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts on +the back cover. Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify +you as the publisher of these copies. The front cover must present +the full title with all words of the title equally prominent and +visible. You may add other material on the covers in addition. +Copying with changes limited to the covers, as long as they preserve +the title of the Document and satisfy these conditions, can be treated +as verbatim copying in other respects. + +If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit +legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit +reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto adjacent +pages. + +If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document numbering +more than 100, you must either include a machine-readable Transparent +copy along with each Opaque copy, or state in or with each Opaque copy +a computer-network location from which the general network-using +public has access to download using public-standard network protocols +a complete Transparent copy of the Document, free of added material. +If you use the latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps, +when you begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure +that this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated +location until at least one year after the last time you distribute an +Opaque copy (directly or through your agents or retailers) of that +edition to the public. + +It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of the +Document well before redistributing any large number of copies, to give +them a chance to provide you with an updated version of the Document. + + +\begin{center} +{\Large\bf 4. MODIFICATIONS\par} +\phantomsection +\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{4. MODIFICATIONS} +\end{center} + +You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document under +the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above, provided that you release +the Modified Version under precisely this License, with the Modified +Version filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution +and modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy +of it. In addition, you must do these things in the Modified Version: + +\begin{itemize} +\item[A.] + Use in the Title Page (and on the covers, if any) a title distinct + from that of the Document, and from those of previous versions + (which should, if there were any, be listed in the History section + of the Document). You may use the same title as a previous version + if the original publisher of that version gives permission. + +\item[B.] + List on the Title Page, as authors, one or more persons or entities + responsible for authorship of the modifications in the Modified + Version, together with at least five of the principal authors of the + Document (all of its principal authors, if it has fewer than five), + unless they release you from this requirement. + +\item[C.] + State on the Title page the name of the publisher of the + Modified Version, as the publisher. + +\item[D.] + Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document. + +\item[E.] + Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications + adjacent to the other copyright notices. + +\item[F.] + Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license notice + giving the public permission to use the Modified Version under the + terms of this License, in the form shown in the Addendum below. + +\item[G.] + Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant Sections + and required Cover Texts given in the Document's license notice. + +\item[H.] + Include an unaltered copy of this License. + +\item[I.] + Preserve the section Entitled ``History'', Preserve its Title, and add + to it an item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and + publisher of the Modified Version as given on the Title Page. If + there is no section Entitled ``History'' in the Document, create one + stating the title, year, authors, and publisher of the Document as + given on its Title Page, then add an item describing the Modified + Version as stated in the previous sentence. + +\item[J.] + Preserve the network location, if any, given in the Document for + public access to a Transparent copy of the Document, and likewise + the network locations given in the Document for previous versions + it was based on. These may be placed in the ``History'' section. + You may omit a network location for a work that was published at + least four years before the Document itself, or if the original + publisher of the version it refers to gives permission. + +\item[K.] + For any section Entitled ``Acknowledgements'' or ``Dedications'', + Preserve the Title of the section, and preserve in the section all + the substance and tone of each of the contributor acknowledgements + and/or dedications given therein. + +\item[L.] + Preserve all the Invariant Sections of the Document, + unaltered in their text and in their titles. Section numbers + or the equivalent are not considered part of the section titles. + +\item[M.] + Delete any section Entitled ``Endorsements''. Such a section + may not be included in the Modified Version. + +\item[N.] + Do not retitle any existing section to be Entitled ``Endorsements'' + or to conflict in title with any Invariant Section. + +\item[O.] + Preserve any Warranty Disclaimers. +\end{itemize} + +If the Modified Version includes new front-matter sections or +appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no material +copied from the Document, you may at your option designate some or all +of these sections as invariant. To do this, add their titles to the +list of Invariant Sections in the Modified Version's license notice. +These titles must be distinct from any other section titles. + +You may add a section Entitled ``Endorsements'', provided it contains +nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various +parties--for example, statements of peer review or that the text has +been approved by an organization as the authoritative definition of a +standard. + +You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text, and a +passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end of the list +of Cover Texts in the Modified Version. Only one passage of +Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be added by (or +through arrangements made by) any one entity. If the Document already +includes a cover text for the same cover, previously added by you or +by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on behalf of, +you may not add another; but you may replace the old one, on explicit +permission from the previous publisher that added the old one. + +The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this License +give permission to use their names for publicity for or to assert or +imply endorsement of any Modified Version. + + +\begin{center} +{\Large\bf 5. COMBINING DOCUMENTS\par} +\phantomsection +\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{5. COMBINING DOCUMENTS} +\end{center} + + +You may combine the Document with other documents released under this +License, under the terms defined in section~4 above for modified +versions, provided that you include in the combination all of the +Invariant Sections of all of the original documents, unmodified, and +list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined work in its +license notice, and that you preserve all their Warranty Disclaimers. + +The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and +multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single +copy. If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name but +different contents, make the title of each such section unique by +adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the original +author or publisher of that section if known, or else a unique number. +Make the same adjustment to the section titles in the list of +Invariant Sections in the license notice of the combined work. + +In the combination, you must combine any sections Entitled ``History'' +in the various original documents, forming one section Entitled +``History''; likewise combine any sections Entitled ``Acknowledgements'', +and any sections Entitled ``Dedications''. You must delete all sections +Entitled ``Endorsements''. + +\begin{center} +{\Large\bf 6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS\par} +\phantomsection +\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS} +\end{center} + +You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other documents +released under this License, and replace the individual copies of this +License in the various documents with a single copy that is included in +the collection, provided that you follow the rules of this License for +verbatim copying of each of the documents in all other respects. + +You may extract a single document from such a collection, and distribute +it individually under this License, provided you insert a copy of this +License into the extracted document, and follow this License in all +other respects regarding verbatim copying of that document. + + +\begin{center} +{\Large\bf 7. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS\par} +\phantomsection +\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{7. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS} +\end{center} + + +A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other separate +and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of a storage or +distribution medium, is called an ``aggregate'' if the copyright +resulting from the compilation is not used to limit the legal rights +of the compilation's users beyond what the individual works permit. +When the Document is included in an aggregate, this License does not +apply to the other works in the aggregate which are not themselves +derivative works of the Document. + +If the Cover Text requirement of section~3 is applicable to these +copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one half of +the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be placed on +covers that bracket the Document within the aggregate, or the +electronic equivalent of covers if the Document is in electronic form. +Otherwise they must appear on printed covers that bracket the whole +aggregate. + + +\begin{center} +{\Large\bf 8. TRANSLATION\par} +\phantomsection +\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{8. TRANSLATION} +\end{center} + + +Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may +distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section~4. +Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special +permission from their copyright holders, but you may include +translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the +original versions of these Invariant Sections. You may include a +translation of this License, and all the license notices in the +Document, and any Warranty Disclaimers, provided that you also include +the original English version of this License and the original versions +of those notices and disclaimers. In case of a disagreement between +the translation and the original version of this License or a notice +or disclaimer, the original version will prevail. + +If a section in the Document is Entitled ``Acknowledgements'', +``Dedications'', or ``History'', the requirement (section~4) to Preserve +its Title (section~1) will typically require changing the actual +title. + + +\begin{center} +{\Large\bf 9. TERMINATION\par} +\phantomsection +\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{9. TERMINATION} +\end{center} + + +You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document except +as expressly provided for under this License. Any other attempt to +copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Document is void, and will +automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, +parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this +License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such +parties remain in full compliance. + + +\begin{center} +{\Large\bf 10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE\par} +\phantomsection +\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE} +\end{center} + + +The Free Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions +of the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time. Such new +versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may +differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. See +https://www.gnu.org/licenses/. + +Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number. +If the Document specifies that a particular numbered version of this +License ``or any later version'' applies to it, you have the option of +following the terms and conditions either of that specified version or +of any later version that has been published (not as a draft) by the +Free Software Foundation. If the Document does not specify a version +number of this License, you may choose any version ever published (not +as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. + + +\begin{center} +{\Large\bf ADDENDUM: How to use this License for your documents\par} +\phantomsection +\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{ADDENDUM: How to use this License for your documents} +\end{center} + +To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of +the License in the document and put the following copyright and +license notices just after the title page: + +\bigskip +\begin{quote} + Copyright \copyright{} YEAR YOUR NAME. + Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document + under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.2 + or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; + with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. + A copy of the license is included in the section entitled ``GNU + Free Documentation License''. +\end{quote} +\bigskip + +If you have Invariant Sections, Front-Cover Texts and Back-Cover Texts, +replace the ``with \dots\ Texts.'' line with this: + +\bigskip +\begin{quote} + with the Invariant Sections being LIST THEIR TITLES, with the + Front-Cover Texts being LIST, and with the Back-Cover Texts being LIST. +\end{quote} +\bigskip + +If you have Invariant Sections without Cover Texts, or some other +combination of the three, merge those two alternatives to suit the +situation. + +If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we +recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of +free software license, such as the GNU General Public License, +to permit their use in free software. + +%--------------------------------------------------------------------- + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual/incl/ini-etex.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual/incl/ini-etex.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..f8db7a942ef --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual/incl/ini-etex.txt @@ -0,0 +1,4 @@ +% Thomas Esser, 1998. public domain. +\input etex.src +\dump +\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual/incl/ini-pdfetex.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual/incl/ini-pdfetex.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..f88b7ac77b3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual/incl/ini-pdfetex.txt @@ -0,0 +1,8 @@ +% Thomas Esser, 1998. public domain. +% This is used for pdftex and pdfetex, which are now identical: both +% with e-TeX extensions, both with pdf output. +\input pdftexconfig.tex +\input etex.src +\input pdftexmagfix.tex +\dump +\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual/incl/pdfmin-crop.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual/incl/pdfmin-crop.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..4bc6d1552b8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual/incl/pdfmin-crop.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual/incl/pdfmin-fmt.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual/incl/pdfmin-fmt.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..15e66c635df --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual/incl/pdfmin-fmt.tex @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ +% $Id: pdfmin-fmt.tex 914 2024-01-07 21:48:39Z karl $ +% ConTeXt file to generate the two-column PDF output we show at the +% beginning. Since this code was already written, and still works, +% we just keep using it, instead of rewriting in LaTeX or plain TeX. + +\setuppapersize[letter][letter] + +\starttext +% The number of lines on the title page depends on exactly +% what \PDF\ code is generated; the Makefile outputs this. +% See frontispiece.txt. +\setvariables[pdftex][titlepagelines=61] + +% title page + +\definelayout + [titlepage] + [backspace=0pt, % left margin + cutspace=1.5in, % less between columns + topspace=0pt, + bottomspace=0pt, + header=0pt, + footer=0pt, + lines=\getvariable{pdftex}{titlepagelines}, + grid=yes, + width=middle] + +\definecolumnset + [titlepage] + [n=2,distance=.66in] + +\start + \chardef\fontdigits=2 + \switchtobodyfont[11pt,tt] + \setupinterlinespace + [line=\dimexpr((\paperheight)/\getvariable{pdftex}{titlepagelines})] + \setuptyping[margin=,color=] + \setuplayout[titlepage] + + \startcolumnset[titlepage] + \typefile{incl/pdfmin-src.txt} + \stopcolumnset + + \page + \setuplayout +\stop + +\stoptext diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual/pdftex-w.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual/incl/pdfmin-src.tex index a32da4e54ce..c6986788ac2 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual/pdftex-w.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual/incl/pdfmin-src.tex @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -% $Id: pdftex-w.tex 849 2021-02-18 17:55:44Z karl $ +% $Id: pdfmin-src.tex 914 2024-01-07 21:48:39Z karl $ % run with -ini: \catcode`{=1 \catcode`}=2 \def\TeX{T\kern-.1667em\lower.5ex\hbox{E}\kern-.125emX} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual/incl/pdfmin-src.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual/incl/pdfmin-src.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..89cc7c960f1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual/incl/pdfmin-src.txt @@ -0,0 +1,119 @@ +%PDF-1.4 +%ÐÔÅØ +3 0 obj +<< +/Length 119 +>> +stream +BT +/F1 9.9626 Tf 72 713.245 Td +[(W)80(elcome)-250(to)-250(pdfT)]TJ 67.818 +-2.241 Td [(E)]TJ 4.842 2.241 Td [(X!)]TJ +ET +endstream +endobj +2 0 obj +<< +/Type /Page +/Contents 3 0 R +/Resources 1 0 R +/MediaBox [0 0 612 792] +/Parent 5 0 R +>> +endobj +1 0 obj +<< +/Font << /F1 4 0 R >> +/ProcSet [ /PDF /Text ] +>> +endobj +7 0 obj +[333 408 500 500 833 778 333 333 333 500 564 +250 333 250 278 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 +500 500 500 278 278 564 564 564 444 921 722 +667 667 722 611 556 722 722 333 389 722 611 +889 722 722 556 722 667 556 611 722 722 944 +722 722 611 333 278 333 469 500 333 444 500 +444 500 444 333 500 500 278 278 500 278 778 +500 500 500 500 333 389 278] +endobj +8 0 obj +<< +/Type /FontDescriptor +/FontName /Times-Roman +/Flags 2 +/FontBBox [0 -216 1000 678] +/Ascent 678 +/CapHeight 651 +/Descent -216 +/ItalicAngle 0 +/StemV 83 +/XHeight 450 +>> +endobj +6 0 obj +<< +/Type /Encoding +/Differences [33/exclam 69/E 84/T 87/W/X +99/c/d/e/f 108/l/m 111/o/p 116/t] +>> +endobj +4 0 obj +<< +/Type /Font +/Subtype /Type1 +/BaseFont /Times-Roman +/FontDescriptor 8 0 R +/FirstChar 33 +/LastChar 116 +/Widths 7 0 R +/Encoding 6 0 R +>> +endobj +5 0 obj +<< +/Type /Pages +/Count 1 +/Kids [2 0 R] +>> +endobj +9 0 obj +<< +/Type /Catalog +/Pages 5 0 R +>> +endobj +10 0 obj +<< +/Producer (pdfTeX-1.40.25) +/Creator (TeX) +/CreationDate (D:20240108150253-08'00') +/ModDate (D:20240108150253-08'00') +/Trapped /False +/PTEX.Fullbanner (This is pdfTeX, Version +3.141592653-2.6-1.40.25 (TeX Live 2023) +kpathsea version 6.3.5) +>> +endobj +xref +0 11 +0000000000 65535 f +0000000296 00000 n +0000000192 00000 n +0000000015 00000 n +0000001010 00000 n +0000001162 00000 n +0000000898 00000 n +0000000363 00000 n +0000000716 00000 n +0000001219 00000 n +0000001268 00000 n +trailer +<< /Size 11 +/Root 9 0 R +/Info 10 0 R +/ID [<D7AF4FB2094D7DD8EC2DCBE1494C911E> +<D7AF4FB2094D7DD8EC2DCBE1494C911E>] >> +startxref +1529 +%%EOF diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual/incl/pdftex-help.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual/incl/pdftex-help.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..570587e4e87 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual/incl/pdftex-help.txt @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ +Usage: pdftex [OPTION]... [TEXNAME[.tex]] [COMMANDS] + or: pdftex [OPTION]... \FIRST-LINE + or: pdftex [OPTION]... &FMT ARGS + Run pdfTeX on TEXNAME, usually creating TEXNAME.pdf. + Any remaining COMMANDS are processed as pdfTeX input, after TEXNAME is read. + If the first line of TEXNAME is %&FMT, and FMT is an existing .fmt file, + use it. Else use `NAME.fmt', where NAME is the program invocation name, + most commonly `pdftex'. + + Alternatively, if the first non-option argument begins with a backslash, + interpret all non-option arguments as a line of pdfTeX input. + + Alternatively, if the first non-option argument begins with a &, the + next word is taken as the FMT to read, overriding all else. Any + remaining arguments are processed as above. + + If no arguments or options are specified, prompt for input. + +-cnf-line=STRING parse STRING as a configuration file line +-draftmode switch on draft mode (generates no output PDF) +-enc enable encTeX extensions such as \mubyte +-etex enable e-TeX extensions +[-no]-file-line-error disable/enable file:line:error style messages +-fmt=FMTNAME use FMTNAME instead of program name or a %& line +-halt-on-error stop processing at the first error +-ini be pdfinitex, for dumping formats; this is implicitly + true if the program name is `pdfinitex' +-interaction=STRING set interaction mode (STRING=batchmode/nonstopmode/ + scrollmode/errorstopmode) +-ipc send DVI output to a socket as well as the usual + output file +-ipc-start as -ipc, and also start the server at the other end +-jobname=STRING set the job name to STRING +-kpathsea-debug=NUMBER set path searching debugging flags according to + the bits of NUMBER +[-no]-mktex=FMT disable/enable mktexFMT generation (FMT=tex/tfm/pk) +-mltex enable MLTeX extensions such as \charsubdef +-output-comment=STRING use STRING for DVI file comment instead of date + (no effect for PDF) +-output-directory=DIR use existing DIR as the directory to write files in +-output-format=FORMAT use FORMAT for job output; FORMAT is `dvi' or `pdf' +[-no]-parse-first-line disable/enable parsing of first line of input file +-progname=STRING set program (and fmt) name to STRING +-recorder enable filename recorder +[-no]-shell-escape disable/enable \write18{SHELL COMMAND} +-shell-restricted enable restricted \write18 +-src-specials insert source specials into the DVI file +-src-specials=WHERE insert source specials in certain places of + the DVI file. WHERE is a comma-separated value + list: cr display hbox math par parend vbox +-synctex=NUMBER generate SyncTeX data for previewers according to + bits of NUMBER (`man synctex' for details) +-translate-file=TCXNAME use the TCX file TCXNAME +-8bit make all characters printable by default +-help display this help and exit +-version output version information and exit + +pdfTeX home page: <http://pdftex.org> + +Email bug reports to pdftex@tug.org (https://lists.tug.org/pdftex). + + + +pdfTeX 3.141592653-2.6-1.40.25 (TeX Live 2023) +kpathsea version 6.3.5 +Copyright 2023 Han The Thanh (pdfTeX) et al. +There is NO warranty. Redistribution of this software is +covered by the terms of both the pdfTeX copyright and +the Lesser GNU General Public License. +For more information about these matters, see the file +named COPYING and the pdfTeX source. +Primary author of pdfTeX: Han The Thanh (pdfTeX) et al. +Compiled with libpng 1.6.39; using libpng 1.6.39 +Compiled with zlib 1.2.13; using zlib 1.2.13 +Compiled with xpdf version 4.04 diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual/incl/pdftex-syntax.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual/incl/pdftex-syntax.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..d27a524b915 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual/incl/pdftex-syntax.tex @@ -0,0 +1,660 @@ +% This is the list of new or extended primitives provided by pdftex. +% Don't edit this file, as it is auto-generated from the +% pdfTeX manual source pdftex.tex by the script syntaxform.pl. +% Syntax rule conventions borrowed from `TeXbook naruby' by Petr Olsak. +\section{Integer registers} + + +\Syntax{ +\cs{efcode} \Something{font} \Something{8-bit number} \Whatever{integer} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{knaccode} \Something{font} \Something{8-bit number} \Whatever{integer} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{knbccode} \Something{font} \Something{8-bit number} \Whatever{integer} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{knbscode} \Something{font} \Something{8-bit number} \Whatever{integer} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{lpcode} \Something{font} \Something{8-bit number} \Whatever{integer} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfadjustinterwordglue} \Whatever{integer} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfadjustspacing} \Whatever{integer} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfappendkern} \Whatever{integer} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfcompresslevel} \Whatever{integer} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfdecimaldigits} \Whatever{integer} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfdraftmode} \Whatever{integer} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfforcepagebox} \Whatever{integer} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfgamma} \Whatever{integer} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfgentounicode} \Whatever{integer} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfimageapplygamma} \Whatever{integer} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfimagegamma} \Whatever{integer} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfimagehicolor} \Whatever{integer} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfimageresolution} \Whatever{integer} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfinclusioncopyfonts} \Whatever{integer} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfinclusionerrorlevel} \Whatever{integer} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfinfoomitdate} \Whatever{integer} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfmajorversion} \Whatever{integer} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfminorversion} \Whatever{integer} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfmovechars} \Whatever{integer} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfobjcompresslevel} \Whatever{integer} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfomitcharset} \Whatever{integer} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfomitinfodict} \Whatever{integer} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfomitprocset} \Whatever{integer} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfoutput} \Whatever{integer} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfpagebox} \Whatever{integer} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfpkresolution} \Whatever{integer} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfprependkern} \Whatever{integer} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfprotrudechars} \Whatever{integer} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfsuppressptexinfo} \Whatever{integer} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfsuppresswarningdupdest} \Whatever{integer} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfsuppresswarningdupmap} \Whatever{integer} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfsuppresswarningpagegroup} \Whatever{integer} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdftracingfonts} \Whatever{integer} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfuniqueresname} \Whatever{integer} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{rpcode} \Something{font} \Something{8-bit number} \Whatever{integer} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{shbscode} \Something{font} \Something{8-bit number} \Whatever{integer} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{showstream} \Whatever{integer} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{stbscode} \Something{font} \Something{8-bit number} \Whatever{integer} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{tagcode} \Something{font} \Something{8-bit number} \Whatever{integer} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{tracinglostchars} \Whatever{integer} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{tracingstacklevels} \Whatever{integer} +} +\section{Read-only integers} + + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfelapsedtime} \Whatever{read-only integer} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdflastannot} \Whatever{read-only integer} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdflastlink} \Whatever{read-only integer} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdflastobj} \Whatever{read-only integer} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdflastxform} \Whatever{read-only integer} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdflastximage} \Whatever{read-only integer} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdflastximagecolordepth} \Whatever{read-only integer} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdflastximagepages} \Whatever{read-only integer} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdflastxpos} \Whatever{read-only integer} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdflastypos} \Whatever{read-only integer} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfrandomseed} \Whatever{read-only integer} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfretval} \Whatever{read-only integer} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfshellescape} \Whatever{read-only integer} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdftexversion} \Whatever{read-only integer} +} +\section{Dimen registers} + + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfdestmargin} \Whatever{dimen} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfeachlinedepth} \Whatever{dimen} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfeachlineheight} \Whatever{dimen} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdffirstlineheight} \Whatever{dimen} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfhorigin} \Whatever{dimen} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfignoreddimen} \Whatever{dimen} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdflastlinedepth} \Whatever{dimen} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdflinkmargin} \Whatever{dimen} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfpageheight} \Whatever{dimen} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfpagewidth} \Whatever{dimen} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfpxdimen} \Whatever{dimen} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfthreadmargin} \Whatever{dimen} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfvorigin} \Whatever{dimen} +} +\section{Token registers} + + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfpageattr} \Whatever{tokens} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfpageresources} \Whatever{tokens} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfpagesattr} \Whatever{tokens} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfpkmode} \Whatever{tokens} +} +\section{Expandable commands} + + +\Syntax{ +\cs{expanded} \Something{tokens} \Whatever{expandable} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{ifincsname} \Whatever{expandable} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{ifpdfabsdim} \Whatever{expandable} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{ifpdfabsnum} \Whatever{expandable} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{ifpdfprimitive} \Something{control sequence} \Whatever{expandable} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{input} \Something{general text} \Whatever{expandable} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{leftmarginkern} \Something{box number} \Whatever{expandable} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfcolorstackinit} \Optional{\Literal{page}} \Optional{\Literal{direct}} \Something{general text} \Whatever{expandable} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfcreationdate} \Whatever{expandable} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfescapehex} \Something{general text} \Whatever{expandable} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfescapename} \Something{general text} \Whatever{expandable} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfescapestring} \Something{general text} \Whatever{expandable} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdffiledump} \Optional{\Literal{offset} \Something{integer}} \Optional{\Literal{length} \Something{integer}} \Something{general text} \Whatever{expandable} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdffilemoddate} \Something{general text} \Whatever{expandable} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdffilesize} \Something{general text} \Whatever{expandable} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdffontname} \Something{font} \Whatever{expandable} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdffontobjnum} \Something{font} \Whatever{expandable} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdffontsize} \Something{font} \Whatever{expandable} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfincludechars} \Something{font} \Something{general text} \Whatever{expandable} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfinsertht} \Something{integer} \Whatever{expandable} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdflastmatch} \Something{integer} \Whatever{expandable} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfmatch} \Optional{\Literal{icase}} \Optional{\Literal{subcount} \Something{integer}} \Something{general text} \Something{general text} \Whatever{expandable} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfmdfivesum} \Optional{\Literal{file}} \Something{general text} \Whatever{expandable} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfnormaldeviate} \Whatever{expandable} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfpageref} \Something{page number} \Whatever{expandable} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfstrcmp} \Something{general text} \Something{general text} \Whatever{expandable} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdftexbanner} \Whatever{expandable} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdftexrevision} \Whatever{expandable} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfunescapehex} \Something{general text} \Whatever{expandable} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfuniformdeviate} \Something{number} \Whatever{expandable} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfxformname} \Something{object number} \Whatever{expandable} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfximagebbox} \Something{integer} \Something{integer} \Whatever{expandable} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{rightmarginkern} \Something{box number} \Whatever{expandable} +} +\section{General commands} + + +\Syntax{ +\cs{letterspacefont} \Something{control sequence} \Something{font} \Something{integer} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{partokencontext} \Something{number} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{partokenname} \Something{control sequence} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfannot} \Something{annot type spec} \Modelist{h, v, m} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfcatalog} \Something{general text} \Optional{\Literal{openaction} \Something{action spec}} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfcolorstack} \Something{stack number} \Something{stack action} \Something{general text} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfcopyfont} \Something{control sequence} \Something{font} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfdest} \Something{dest spec} \Modelist{h, v, m} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfendlink} \Modelist{h, m} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfendthread} \Modelist{v, m} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdffakespace} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdffontattr} \Something{font} \Something{general text} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdffontexpand} \Something{font} \Something{stretch} \Something{shrink} \Something{step} \Optional{\Literal{autoexpand}} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfglyphtounicode} \Something{general text} \Something{general text} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfinfo} \Something{general text} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfinterwordspaceoff} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfinterwordspaceon} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfliteral} \Optional{\Literal{shipout}} \Optional{\Literal{direct} \Or \Literal{page}} \Something{general text} \Modelist{h, v, m} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfmapfile} \Something{map filename} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfmapline} \Something{map spec} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfnames} \Something{general text} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfnobuiltintounicode} \Something{font} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfnoligatures} \Something{font} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfobj} \Something{object type spec} \Modelist{h, v, m} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfoutline} \Optional{\Something{attr spec}} \Something{action spec} \Optional{\Literal{count} \Something{integer}} \Something{general text} \Modelist{h, v, m} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfprimitive} \Something{control sequence} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfrefobj} \Something{object number} \Modelist{h, v, m} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfrefxform} \Something{object number} \Modelist{h, v, m} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfrefximage} \Something{object number} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfresettimer} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfrestore} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfrunninglinkoff} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfrunninglinkon} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfsave} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfsavepos} \Modelist{h, v, m} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfsetmatrix} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfsetrandomseed} \Something{number} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfspacefont} \Something{general text} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfstartlink} \Optional{\Something{rule spec}} \Optional{\Something{attr spec}} \Something{action spec} \Modelist{h, m} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfthread} \Optional{\Something{rule spec}} \Optional{\Something{attr spec}} \Something{id spec} \Modelist{h, v, m} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdftrailer} \Something{general text} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdftrailerid} \Something{general text} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdftstartthread} \Optional{\Something{rule spec}} \Optional{\Something{attr spec}} \Something{id spec} \Modelist{v, m} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfxform} \Optional{\Something{attr spec}} \Optional{\Something{resources spec}} \Something{box number} \Modelist{h, v, m} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{pdfximage} \Optional{\Something{rule spec}} \Optional{\Something{attr spec}} \Optional{\Something{page spec}} \Optional{\Something{pdf box spec}} \Optional{\Something{colorspace spec}} \Next \Something{general text} \Modelist{h, v, m} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{quitvmode} +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{special} \Lbrace\Literal{pdf:} \Something{text}\Rbrace +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{special} \Lbrace\Literal{pdf:direct:} \Something{text}\Rbrace +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{special} \Lbrace\Literal{pdf:page:} \Something{text}\Rbrace +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{special} \Optional{\Literal{shipout}} \Lbrace\Something{text}\Rbrace +} + +\Syntax{ +\cs{vadjust} \Optional{\Something{pre spec}} \Something{filler} \Lbrace \Something{vertical mode material} \Rbrace \Modelist{h, m} +} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual/incl/pdftexconfig.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual/incl/pdftexconfig.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..9b3011a22c3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual/incl/pdftexconfig.txt @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ +% tex-ini-files 2016-04-15: pdftexconfig.tex + +% Load shared (PDF) settings in pdfTeX + +% Enable PDF output +\pdfoutput = 1 + +% Paper size: dimensions given in absolute terms +\pdfpageheight = 11 true in +\pdfpagewidth = 8.5 true in + +% Enable PDF 1.5 output and thus more compression +\pdfminorversion = 5 +\pdfobjcompresslevel = 2 + +% Low-level settings unlikely ever to need to change +\pdfcompresslevel = 9 +\pdfdecimaldigits = 3 +\pdfpkresolution = 600 +\pdfhorigin = 1 true in +\pdfvorigin = 1 true in diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual/makefiles.cmd b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual/makefiles.cmd deleted file mode 100644 index 5bda71136c3..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual/makefiles.cmd +++ /dev/null @@ -1,13 +0,0 @@ -rem texexec --format=plain pdftex-x -rem copy pdf file to pdftex-y and edit that file -rem texexec --format=plain pdftex-z - -texexec --pdf --result=pdftex-a pdftex-t -texexec --pdf --result=pdftex-b pdftex-a --pdfarrange --print=up --paper=A4A3 --addempty=1,2 - -texexec --pdf --result=pdftex-l pdftex-t --mode=letter -texexec --pdf --result=pdftex-s pdftex-t --mode=screen - -del /q pdftex.zip - -zip pdftex pdftex-a.pdf pdftex-l.pdf pdftex-s.pdf pdftex-t.tex pdftex-i.tex pdftex-t.txt makefiles.cmd diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual/pdftex-a.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual/pdftex-a.pdf Binary files differindex 878bab87376..3719390ec0c 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual/pdftex-a.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual/pdftex-a.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual/pdftex-i.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual/pdftex-i.tex deleted file mode 100644 index 28036649bc7..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual/pdftex-i.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,136 +0,0 @@ -%$Id: pdftex-i.tex 635 2010-11-14 19:15:12Z karl $ - -\pdfmapline{+contnav ContextNavigation <contnav.pfb} -\startmode[screen] - -\setuppapersize - [S6][S6] - -\setuplayout - [topspace=20pt, - backspace=40pt, - width=520pt, - height=390pt, - lines=29, - header=0pt, - footer=0pt, - bottomdistance=10pt, - bottom=20pt, - leftmargin=30pt, - leftmargindistance=10pt, - rightmargin=0pt, - rightedge=27.5pt, - rightedgedistance=7.5pt] - -\setupcolors - [state=start] - -\setupbackgrounds - [page] - [background=color, - backgroundcolor=ColorP] - -\setupbackgrounds - [text][text] - [backgroundoffset=2.5pt, - background=color, - backgroundcolor=ColorT] - -\definecolor [ColorT] [s=.85] -\definecolor [ColorP] [r=.3,g=.4,b=.5] -\definecolor [ColorI] [r=.95,g=.95,b=0] - -\setupinteraction - [state=start, - menu=on, - color=ColorP, - contrastcolor=ColorP] - -\setupfootnotedefinition - [location=serried, - width=fit] - -\setuptabulate - [rulecolor=ColorP] - -\setupfootnotes - [rulecolor=ColorP] - -\setupinteractionmenu - [right,bottom] - [state=start, - color=ColorI, - contrastcolor=ColorI, - style=bold, - frame=off] - -\setuplist - [chapter,section] - [pagenumber=off] - -\startinteractionmenu[right] - \bodyfontsize=20pt - \but [firstpage] \rotate[rotation=270]{\symbol[firstpage]} \\ - \but [lastpage] \rotate[rotation=270]{\symbol[lastpage]} \\ \vfill - \but [previouspage] \rotate[rotation=270]{\symbol[previouspage]} \\ - \but [nextpage] \rotate[rotation=270]{\symbol[nextpage]} \\ \vfill - \but [PreviousJump] \rotate[rotation=270]{\symbol[PreviousJump]} \\ - \but [NextJump] \rotate[rotation=270]{\symbol[NextJump]} \\ -\stopinteractionmenu - -\startinteractionmenu[bottom] - \but [contents] content \\ \hfill - \but [paperversion::] The pdf\TeX\ user manual \\ \hfill - \but [CloseDocument] exit \\ -\stopinteractionmenu - -\setuphead - [section,subsection,subsubsection,pdftexprimitive,subject] - [textcolor=ColorP, - numbercolor=ColorT] - -\def\SubSub#1{\mathematics{\color[ColorT]{\blacktriangleright}}} - -\useexternaldocument[paperversion][pdftex-a] - -\coupledocument - [paperversion] - [pdftex-a] - [section,subsection,subsubsection,pdftexprimitive] - [the paper version] - -\setuphead - [section,subsection,subsubsection,pdftexprimitive] - [file=paperversion] - -\stopmode - -\startbuffer[screen] - -\setupbackgrounds [page] [background={color,content}] -\defineoverlay [content] [\overlaybutton{contents}] -\setupinteraction [menu=off] - -\startstandardmakeup - \setupalign[middle] - \startcolor[ColorP] - \definefont[test][TitleFont at 130pt] \test \setupinterlinespace - \strut PDF\kern.1em\TeX - \definefont[test][TitleFont at 60pt] \test \setupinterlinespace - \vfill - users manual - \vfill - \definefont[test][TitleFont at 15pt] \test \setupinterlinespace - \leavevmode - \gotobox{\strut \underbar{H\`an Th\^e Th\`anh}}[url(thanh)]\quad - \gotobox{\strut Sebastian Rahtz}[url(sebastian)]\quad - \gotobox{\strut Hans Hagen}[url(hans)]\quad - \gotobox{\strut Hartmut Henkel}[url(hartmut)] - \vfill - \stopcolor -\stopstandardmakeup - -\setupinteraction [menu=on] -\setupbackgrounds [page] [background=color] - -\stopbuffer diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual/pdftex-syntax.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual/pdftex-syntax.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 59cb911e35a..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual/pdftex-syntax.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,784 +0,0 @@ -%% $Id: syntaxform.pl 742 2016-04-25 17:30:55Z karl $ -%% This is the list of new or extended primitives provided by pdftex. -%% Don't edit this file, as it is now auto-generated from the -%% pdfTeX manual source pdftex-t.tex (and the generated -%% pdftex-syntax.tex) by the script syntaxform.awk. -%% Syntax rule conventions borrowed from `TeXbook naruby' by Petr Olsak. - -%% Integer registers: -\efcode <font> <8-bit number> (integer) -\knaccode <font> <8-bit number> (integer) -\knbccode <font> <8-bit number> (integer) -\knbscode <font> <8-bit number> (integer) -\lpcode <font> <8-bit number> (integer) -\pdfadjustinterwordglue (integer) -\pdfadjustspacing (integer) -\pdfappendkern (integer) -\pdfcompresslevel (integer) -\pdfdecimaldigits (integer) -\pdfdraftmode (integer) -\pdfforcepagebox (integer) -\pdfgamma (integer) -\pdfgentounicode (integer) -\pdfimageapplygamma (integer) -\pdfimagegamma (integer) -\pdfimagehicolor (integer) -\pdfimageresolution (integer) -\pdfinclusioncopyfonts (integer) -\pdfinclusionerrorlevel (integer) -\pdfinfoomitdate (integer) -\pdfmajorversion (integer) -\pdfminorversion (integer) -\pdfobjcompresslevel (integer) -\pdfomitcharset (integer) -\pdfomitinfodict (integer) -\pdfomitprocset (integer) -\pdfoutput (integer) -\pdfpagebox (integer) -\pdfpkresolution (integer) -\pdfprependkern (integer) -\pdfprotrudechars (integer) -\pdfsuppressptexinfo (integer) -\pdfsuppresswarningdupdest (integer) -\pdfsuppresswarningdupmap (integer) -\pdfsuppresswarningpagegroup (integer) -\pdftracingfonts (integer) -\pdfuniqueresname (integer) -\rpcode <font> <8-bit number> (integer) -\shbscode <font> <8-bit number> (integer) -\showstream (integer) -\stbscode <font> <8-bit number> (integer) -\tagcode <font> <8-bit number> (integer) -\tracinglostchars (integer) -\tracingstacklevels (integer) - -%% Read-only integers: -\pdfelapsedtime (read-only integer) -\pdflastannot (read-only integer) -\pdflastlink (read-only integer) -\pdflastobj (read-only integer) -\pdflastxform (read-only integer) -\pdflastximage (read-only integer) -\pdflastximagecolordepth (read-only integer) -\pdflastximagepages (read-only integer) -\pdflastxpos (read-only integer) -\pdflastypos (read-only integer) -\pdfrandomseed (read-only integer) -\pdfretval (read-only integer) -\pdfshellescape (read-only integer) -\pdftexversion (read-only integer) - -%% Dimen registers: -\pdfdestmargin (dimen) -\pdfeachlinedepth (dimen) -\pdfeachlineheight (dimen) -\pdffirstlineheight (dimen) -\pdfhorigin (dimen) -\pdfignoreddimen (dimen) -\pdflastlinedepth (dimen) -\pdflinkmargin (dimen) -\pdfpageheight (dimen) -\pdfpagewidth (dimen) -\pdfpxdimen (dimen) -\pdfthreadmargin (dimen) -\pdfvorigin (dimen) - -%% Token registers: -\pdfpageattr (tokens) -\pdfpageresources (tokens) -\pdfpagesattr (tokens) -\pdfpkmode (tokens) - -%% Expandable commands: -\expanded <tokens> (expandable) -\ifincsname (expandable) -\ifpdfabsdim (expandable) -\ifpdfabsnum (expandable) -\ifpdfprimitive <control sequence> (expandable) -\input <general text> (expandable) -\leftmarginkern <box number> (expandable) -\pdfcolorstackinit [page] [direct] <general text> (expandable) -\pdfcreationdate (expandable) -\pdfescapehex <general text> (expandable) -\pdfescapename <general text> (expandable) -\pdfescapestring <general text> (expandable) -\pdffiledump [offset <integer>] [length <integer>] <general text> (expandable) -\pdffilemoddate <general text> (expandable) -\pdffilesize <general text> (expandable) -\pdffontname <font> (expandable) -\pdffontobjnum <font> (expandable) -\pdffontsize <font> (expandable) -\pdfincludechars <font> <general text> (expandable) -\pdfinsertht <integer> (expandable) -\pdflastmatch <integer> (expandable) -\pdfmatch [icase] [subcount <integer>] <general text> <general text> (expandable) -\pdfmdfivesum [file] <general text> (expandable) -\pdfnormaldeviate (expandable) -\pdfpageref <page number> (expandable) -\pdfstrcmp <general text> <general text> (expandable) -\pdftexbanner (expandable) -\pdftexrevision (expandable) -\pdfunescapehex <general text> (expandable) -\pdfuniformdeviate <number> (expandable) -\pdfxformname <object number> (expandable) -\pdfximagebbox <integer> <integer> (expandable) -\rightmarginkern <box number> (expandable) - -%% General commands: -\letterspacefont <control sequence> <font> <integer> -\partokenname <control sequence> -\pdfannot <annot type spec> (h, v, m) -\pdfcatalog <general text> [openaction <action spec>] -\pdfcolorstack <stack number> <stack action> <general text> -\pdfcopyfont <control sequence> <font> -\pdfdest <dest spec> (h, v, m) -\pdfendlink (h, m) -\pdfendthread (v, m) -\pdffakespace -\pdffontattr <font> <general text> -\pdffontexpand <font> <stretch> <shrink> <step> [autoexpand] -\pdfglyphtounicode <general text> <general text> -\pdfinfo <general text> -\pdfinterwordspaceoff -\pdfinterwordspaceon -\pdfliteral [shipout] [direct | page] <general text> (h, v, m) -\pdfmapfile <map spec> -\pdfmapline <map spec> -\pdfnames <general text> -\pdfnobuiltintounicode <font> -\pdfnoligatures <font> -\pdfobj <object type spec> (h, v, m) -\pdfoutline [<attr spec>] <action spec> [count <integer>] <general text> (h, v, m) -\pdfprimitive <control sequence> -\pdfrefobj <object number> (h, v, m) -\pdfrefxform <object number> (h, v, m) -\pdfrefximage <object number> -\pdfresettimer -\pdfrestore -\pdfrunninglinkoff -\pdfrunninglinkon -\pdfsave -\pdfsavepos (h, v, m) -\pdfsetmatrix -\pdfsetrandomseed <number> -\pdfspacefont <general text> -\pdfstartlink [<rule spec>] [<attr spec>] <action spec> (h, m) -\pdfthread [<rule spec>] [<attr spec>] <id spec> (h, v, m) -\pdftrailer <general text> -\pdftrailerid <general text> -\pdftstartthread [<rule spec>] [<attr spec>] <id spec> (v, m) -\pdfxform [<attr spec>] [<resources spec>] <box number> (h, v, m) -\pdfximage [<rule spec>] [<attr spec>] [<page spec>] [<colorspace spec>] [<pdf box spec>] <general text> (h, v, m) -\quitvmode -\special {pdf: <text> } -\special {pdf:direct: <text> } -\special {pdf:page: <text> } -\special [shipout] {<general text> } -\vadjust [<pre spec>] <filler> { <vertical mode material> } (h, m) - -%% Syntax rules: -<general text> --> { <balanced text> } -<attr spec> --> attr <general text> -<resources spec> --> resources <general text> -<rule spec> --> (width | height | depth) <dimen> [<rule spec>] -<object type spec> --> reserveobjnum - | [useobjnum <number>] [stream [<attr spec>]] <object contents> -<annot type spec> --> reserveobjnum - | [useobjnum <number>] [<rule spec>] <general text> -<object contents> --> <file spec> - | <general text> -<xform attr spec> --> [<attr spec>] [<resources spec>] -<image attr spec> --> [<rule spec>] [<attr spec>] [<page spec>] [<colorspace spec>] [<pdf box spec>] -<outline spec> --> [<attr spec>] <action spec> [count <number>] <general text> -<action spec> --> user <user-action spec> - | goto <goto-action spec> - | thread <thread-action spec> -<user-action spec> --> <general text> -<goto-action struct spec> --> struct (<numid> | nameid | <general text>) -<goto-action spec> --> [<goto-action struct spec>] <numid> - | [<file spec>] [<goto-action struct spec>] <nameid> - | [<file spec>] [<goto-action struct spec>] [<page spec>] <general text> - | <file spec> [<goto-action struct spec>] <nameid> <newwindow spec> - | <file spec> [<goto-action struct spec>] [<page spec>] <general text> <newwindow spec> -<thread-action spec> --> [<file spec>] <numid> - | [<file spec>] <nameid> -<colorspace spec> --> colorspace <number> -<pdf box spec> --> mediabox | cropbox | bleedbox | trimbox | artbox -<map spec> --> { [<map modifier>] <balanced text> } -<map modifier> --> + | = | - -<numid> --> num <number> -<nameid> --> name <general text> -<newwindow spec> --> newwindow | nonewwindow -<dest spec> --> [struct <number>] \\ - (<numid> | <nameid>) - <dest type> -<dest type> --> xyz [zoom <number>] - | fitr <rule spec> - | fitbh - | fitbv - | fitb - | fith - | fitv - | fit -<thread spec> --> [<rule spec>] [<attr spec>] <id spec> -<id spec> --> <numid> | <nameid> -<file spec> --> file <general text> -<page spec> --> page <number> -<expand spec> --> <stretch> <shrink> <step> [autoexpand] -<stretch> --> <number> -<shrink> --> <number> -<step> --> <number> -<pre spec> --> pre -<pdfspecial spec> --> { [<pdfspecial id> [<pdfspecial modifier>]] <balanced text> } -<pdfspecial id> --> pdf: | PDF: -<pdfspecial modifier> --> direct: -<stack action> --> set | push | pop | current -<goto-action spec> --> [<goto-action struct spec>] <numid> - | [<file spec>] [<goto-action struct spec>] <nameid> - | [<file spec>] [<goto-action struct spec>] [<page spec>] <general text> - | <file spec> [<goto-action struct spec>] <nameid> <newwindow spec> - | <file spec> [<goto-action struct spec>] [<page spec>] <general text> <newwindow spec> -<text> }} is equivalent to \Syntax{\pdfliteral -shipout { <text> }}. -================= ERROR -%*********************************************************************** -================= ERROR -\subsection{Strings} -================= ERROR -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\pdfescapestring <general text> - (expandable)}} -\bookmark{\pdfescapestring} -================= ERROR -Starting with version 1.30.0, \PDFTEX\ provides a mechanism for converting -a general text into \PDF\ string. Many characters that may be needed inside -such a text (especially parenthesis), have a special meaning inside a \PDF\ -string object and thus, can't be used literally. The primitive replaces each -special \PDF\ character by its literal representation by inserting a backslash -before that character. Some characters (\eg\ space) are also converted into -3-digit octal number. In example, \type{\pdfescapestring{Text (1)}} will be -expanded to \type{Text\040\(1\)}. This ensures a literal interpretation of the -text by the \PDF\ viewer. -\introduced{1.30.0} -================= ERROR -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\pdfescapename <general text> - (expandable)}} -\bookmark{\pdfescapename} -================= ERROR -In analogy to \type{\pdfescapestring}, \type{\pdfescapename} replaces each -special \PDF\ character inside the general text by its hexadecimal -representation preceded by \type{#} character. This ensures the proper -interpretation of the text if used as a \PDF\ name object. In example, -\type{Text (1)} will be replaced by \type{Text#20#281#29}. -\introduced{1.30.0} -================= ERROR -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\pdfescapehex <general text> - (expandable)}} -\bookmark{\pdfescapehex} -================= ERROR -This command converts each character of <general text> into its -hexadecimal representation. Each character of the argument becomes a pair of -hexadecimal digits. \introduced{1.30.0} -================= ERROR -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\pdfunescapehex <general text> - (expandable)}} -\bookmark{\pdfunescapehex} -================= ERROR -This command treats each character pair of <general text> as -a hexadecimal number and returns an \ASCII\ character of this code. -\introduced{1.30.0} -================= ERROR -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\pdfstrcmp <general text> - <general text> (expandable)}} -\bookmark{\pdfstrcmp} -================= ERROR -This command compares two strings and expands to \type{0} if the strings -are equal, to \type{-1} if the first string ranks before the second, and -to \type{1} otherwise. \introduced{1.30.0} -================= ERROR -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\pdfmatch [icase] - [subcount <integer>] <general text> - <general text> (expandable)}} -\bookmark{\pdfmatch} -================= ERROR -This command implements pattern matching (using the syntax of \POSIX\ -extended regular expressions). The first <general text> is a -pattern and the second is a string. The command expands to \type{-1} if -the pattern is invalid, to \type{0} if no match is found, and to -\type{1} if a match is found. With the \type{icase} option, the matching -is case-insensitive. The \type{subcount} option sets the size of the -table storing the found (sub)patterns; its default is 10. -\introduced{1.30.0} -================= ERROR -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\pdflastmatch <integer> - (expandable)}} -\bookmark{\pdflastmatch} -================= ERROR -The matches found with \type{\pdfmatch} are stored in a table. This -command returns the entry for <integer>, in the format -<position>\type{->}<string>; <position> is -the position of the match (starting at zero) or \type{-1} if no match -was found, and <string> is the matched substring. -================= ERROR -Entry~0 contains the match as a whole; the subsequent entries contain -submatches corresponding to the subpatterns, up to \type{subcount-1}. -================= ERROR -If <integer> is less than zero, an error is given. -================= ERROR -For instance: -================= ERROR -\starttyping -\pdfmatch subcount 3 {ab(cd)*ef(gh)(ij)}{abefghij} -\pdflastmatch0 % "0->abefghij" -\pdflastmatch1 % "-1->" -\pdflastmatch2 % "4->gh" -\pdflastmatch3 % "-1->" -\stoptyping -================= ERROR -Entry~1 is empty because no match was found for \type{cd}, and entry~3 -is empty because it exceeds the table's size as set by \type{subcount}. -\introduced{1.30.0} -================= ERROR -%*********************************************************************** -================= ERROR -\subsection{Numbers} -================= ERROR -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\ifpdfabsnum (expandable)}} -\bookmark{\ifpdfabsnum} -================= ERROR -This conditional works like the standard \type{\ifnum}, except that it -compares absolute values of numbers. Although it seems to be a trivial -shortcut for a couple of \type{\ifnum x<0} tests, as a primitive it is -considerably more friendly in usage and works a bit faster. -\introduced{1.40.0} -================= ERROR -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\ifpdfabsdim (expandable)}} -\bookmark{\ifpdfabsdim} -================= ERROR -Analogous to \type{\ifpdfabsnum}, this conditional works like -\type{\ifdim}, except that it compares absolute values of -dimensions. \introduced{1.40.0} -================= ERROR -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\pdfuniformdeviate <number> - (expandable)}} -\bookmark{\pdfuniformdeviate} -================= ERROR -Generate a uniformly-distributed random integer value between 0 -(inclusive) and <number> (exclusive). This primitive expands -to a list of tokens. \introduced{1.30.0} -================= ERROR -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\pdfnormaldeviate (expandable)}} -\bookmark{\pdfnormaldeviate} -================= ERROR -Generate a normally-distributed random integer with a mean of~0 and -standard deviation 65\,536. That is, about 68\% of the time, the result -will be between $-65536$ and $65536$ (one standard deviation away from -the mean). About 95\% of results will be within two standard -deviations, and 99.7\% within three. This primitive expands to a list -of tokens. \introduced{1.30.0} -================= ERROR -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\pdfrandomseed (read-only integer)}} -\bookmark{\pdfrandomseed} -================= ERROR -You can use \type{\the\pdfrandomseed} to query the current seed value, -so you can \eg\ write the value to the log file. The initial value of -the seed is derived from the system time, and is not more than -1\,000\,999\,999 (this ensures that the value can be used with commands -like \type{\count}). \introduced{1.30.0} -================= ERROR -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\pdfsetrandomseed <number>}} -\bookmark{\pdfsetrandomseed} -================= ERROR -Set the random seed (\type{\pdfrandomseed}) to a specific value, -allowing you to replay sequences of semi-randoms at a later moment. -\introduced{1.30.0} -================= ERROR -%*********************************************************************** -================= ERROR -\subsection{Timekeeping} -================= ERROR -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\pdfelapsedtime (read-only integer)}} -\bookmark{\pdfelapsedtime} -================= ERROR -Return a number that represents the time elapsed from the moment of the -start of the run. The elapsed time is returned in `scaled seconds', -meaning seconds divided by 65536, \eg\ \PDFTEX\ has run for -\the\pdfelapsedtime\ `scaled seconds' when this paragraph was -typeset. Of course, the command will never return a value greater than -the highest number available in \TeX: if the time exceeds 32767 seconds, -the constant value $2^{31}-1$ will be returned. \introduced{1.30.0} -================= ERROR -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\pdfresettimer}} -\bookmark{\pdfresettimer} -================= ERROR -Reset the internal timer so that \type{\pdfelapsedtime} -starts returning micro-time from~0 again. \introduced{1.30.0} -================= ERROR -%*********************************************************************** -================= ERROR -\subsection{Files} -================= ERROR -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\pdffilemoddate <general text> - (expandable)}} -\bookmark{\pdffilemoddate} -================= ERROR -Expands to the modification date of file <general text> in the -same format as for \type{\pdfcreationdate}, \eg\ it's {\tt -\pdffilemoddate {./pdftex-t.tex}} for the source of this manual. As of -version 1.40.20, if the \type{SOURCE_DATE_EPOCH} and -\type{FORCE_SOURCE_DATE} environment variables are both set, -\type{\pdffilemoddate} returns a value in UTC, ending in \type{Z}. -\introduced{1.30.0} -================= ERROR -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\pdffilesize <general text> - (expandable)}} -\bookmark{\pdffilesize} -================= ERROR -Expands to the size of file <general text>, \eg\ it's {\tt -\pdffilesize {./pdftex-t.tex}} for the source of this manual. -\introduced{1.30.0} -================= ERROR -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\pdfmdfivesum - [file] - <general text> (expandable)}} -\bookmark{\pdfmdfivesum\ file} -================= ERROR -If the keyword \type{file} is given, expands to the \MDFIVE\ of file -\Somethingtext{general text} in uppercase hexadecimal format (same as -\type{\pdfescapehex}). Without \type{file}, expands to the \MDFIVE\ of -the \Somethingtext{generaltext} taken as a string. For example, it's -{\tt \pdfmdfivesum file {./pdftex-t.tex}} for the source of this manual. -\introduced{1.30.0} -================= ERROR -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\pdffiledump - [offset <integer>] - [length <integer>] - <general text> (expandable)}} -\bookmark{\pdffiledump} -================= ERROR -Expands to the dump of the first \type{length} \Somethingtext{integer} -bytes of the file \Somethingtext{general text}, in uppercase hexadecimal -format (same as \type{\pdfescapehex}), starting at offset -\type{offset}~\Somethingtext{number}, or the beginning of the file if -\type{offset}. If \type{length} is not given, the default is zero, so -expands to nothing. Both \Somethingtext{integer}s must be $\ge0$. For -example, the first ten bytes of the source of this manual are {\tt -\pdffiledump length 10 {./pdftex-t.tex}}. \introduced{1.30.0} -================= ERROR -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\input <general text> - (expandable)}} -\bookmark{\input} -================= ERROR -As of \TEXLIVE\ 2020, the \type{\input} primitive in all \TEX\ engines, -including \PDFTEX, now also accepts a group-delimited filename argument, -as a system-dependent extension, as in \type{\input} { -\type{foo.tex} }. The usage of \type{\input} with a standard -space/token-delimited filename is completely unchanged. -================= ERROR -This group-delimited argument was previously implemented in Lua\TEX; now -it is available in all engines. \ASCII\ double quote characters -(\type{"}) are removed from the filename, but it is otherwise left -unchanged after tokenization. -================= ERROR -This extension is unlike most others in that it affects a primitive in -standard \TEX\ (\type{\input}), rather than being related to a new -primitive, command line option, etc. This is allowed because additional -methods of recognizing filenames are explicitly mentioned in -\type{tex.web} as acceptable system-dependent extensions. -================= ERROR -Incidentally, this does not directly affect \LATEX's \type{\input} -command, as that is a macro redefinition of the standard \type{\input} -primitive. -================= ERROR -\introduced{1.40.21} -================= ERROR -%*********************************************************************** -================= ERROR -\subsection{Color stack} -================= ERROR -\PDFTEX\ 1.40.0 comes with color stack support (actually any graphic state -stack). -================= ERROR -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\pdfcolorstackinit [page] - [direct] <general text> (expandable)}} -\bookmark{\pdfcolorstackinit} -================= ERROR -The primitive initializes a new graphic stack and returns its number. Optional -page keyword instructs \PDFTEX\ to restore the graphic at the -beginning of every new page. Also optional direct has the same effect -as for \pdfliteral primitive. \introduced{1.40.0} -================= ERROR -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\pdfcolorstack <stack number> - <stack action> <general text>}} -\bookmark{\pdfcolorstack} -================= ERROR -The command operates on the stack of a given number. If \Something{stack -action} is push keyword, the new value provided as -<general text> is inserted into the top of the graphic stack -and becomes the current stack value. If followed by pop, the -top value is removed from the stack and the new top value becomes the -current. set keyword replaces the current value with -<general text> without changing the stack size. -current keyword instructs just to use the current stack value -without modifying the stack at all. \introduced{1.40.0} -================= ERROR -%*********************************************************************** -================= ERROR -\subsection{Transformations} -================= ERROR -Since the content of \pdfliteral is not interpreted anyhow, any -transformation inserted directly into the content stream, as well as saving -and restoring the current transformation matrix, remains unnoticed by -\PDFTEX\ positioning mechanism. As a consequence, links and other annotations -(that are formed in \PDF\ as different layer then the page content) are not -affected by such user-defined transformations. \PDFTEX\ 1.40.0 solves this -problem with three new primitives. -================= ERROR -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\pdfsetmatrix}} -\bookmark{\pdfsetmatrix} -================= ERROR -Afine transformations are normally expressed with six numbers. First -four (no unit) values defining scaling, rotating and skewing, plus two -extra dimensions for shifting. Since the translation is handled by \TeX\ -itself, \pdfsetmatrix primitive expects as an argument a string -containing just the first four numbers of the transformation separated -by a space and assumes two position coordinates to be~0. In example, -\type{\pdfsetmatrix{0.87 -0.5 0.5 0.87}} rotates the current space by 30 -degrees, inserting \type{0.87 -0.5 0.5 0.87 0 0 cm} into the content -stream. \introduced{1.40.0} -================= ERROR -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\pdfsave}} -\bookmark{\pdfsave} -================= ERROR -The command saves the current transformation by inserting \type{q} -operator into the content stream. \introduced{1.40.0} -================= ERROR -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\pdfrestore}} -\bookmark{\pdfrestore} -================= ERROR -The command restores previously saved transformation by inserting \type{Q} -operator into the content stream. One should keep in mind that \pdfsave -and \pdfrestore pairs should always be properly nested and should start -and end at the same group level. \introduced{1.40.0} -================= ERROR -%*********************************************************************** -================= ERROR -\subsection{Macro programming} -================= ERROR -Expansion-related. -================= ERROR -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\expanded <tokens> - (expandable)}} -\bookmark{\expanded} -================= ERROR -Expands <tokens> in exactly the same way as \type{\message}. -In contrast to \type{\edef}, macro parameter characters do not need to -be doubled. \type{\protected} macros are not expanded. -\introduced{1.40.20} -================= ERROR -================= ERROR -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\ifincsname (expandable)}} -\bookmark{\ifincsname} -================= ERROR -This conditional is true if evaluated inside \type{\csname ... \endcsname}, -and false otherwise. -================= ERROR -================= ERROR -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\ifpdfprimitive <control sequence> - (expandable)}} -\bookmark{\ifpdfprimitive} -================= ERROR -This condition checks if the following control sequence has its -primitive meaning. If it has, \type{\ifpdfprimitive} returns true. In -any other case (redefined, made \type{\undefined}, has never been -primitive) false is returned. \introduced{1.40.0} -================= ERROR -================= ERROR -flapping\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\partokencontext <number>}} -\bookmark{\partokencontext} -================= ERROR -The {\em par-token} (i.e., the token with the name given by -\type{\partokenname}, or \type{\par} by default; see -\type{\partokenname}, next) is inserted into the input stream in -different places, according to the \type{\partokencontext} value. This -value can be: -================= ERROR -0: {\em par-token} is inserted at empty lines (more exactly, when a - token category~5 is seen in state~$N$, reading a line); before - \type{\end}, \type{\vskip}, \type{\hrule}, \type{\unvbox}, and - \type{\halign}, if \TeX{} is in horizontal mode when those commands - are seen; and in various error recovery situations. These are the - standard cases, and this is the default value. -================= ERROR -1: {\em par-token} is inserted as above, and also at the end of - \type{\vbox}, \type{\vtop}, and \type{\vcenter}, if \TeX{} is in - horizontal mode at the time. -================= ERROR -2: {\em par-token} is inserted as above, and also at the end of - \type{\insert}, \type{\vadjust}, \type{\output}, \type{\noalign}, and - items of \type{\valign}, again if \TeX{} is in horizontal mode at the - time. -================= ERROR -With the default \type{\partokencontext=0}, \TEX\ behaves in its normal -way: the situations in cases 1 and 2 are processed by a direct call of -{\em end-paragraph} routine, with no emitted {\em par-token}. -================= ERROR -If \type{\partokencontext=1} then \TeX\ inserts the {\em par-token} in -additional cases: when vertical boxes are completed but horizontal mode -is not finished. Since vboxes are not uncommonly inserted directly by -users, with horizontal mode material, this allows macro programmers to -control all such boxes being finished by a {\em par-token}. An example: -================= ERROR -\starttyping -\partokenname\_mypar -\partokencontext=1 -\def\_mypar{Hi there!\endgraf} -\vbox{Vbox text.} -\stoptyping -================= ERROR -This will output ``\type{Hi there!''}\ after ``\type{Vbox text.}''. -================= ERROR -Finally, with \type{\partokencontext=2}, all cases where classical \TeX\ -uses the direct {\em end-paragraph} routine are changed to emit the {\em -par-token} instead. In contrast to case~1, these commands are rarely -invoked directly by users with horizontal mode material. -================= ERROR -The setting of the register \type{\partokencontext} is local. -\introduced{1.40.24} -================= ERROR -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\partokenname <control sequence>}} -\bookmark{\partokenname} -================= ERROR -\TeX{} internally inserts a control sequence, named \type{\par} by -default, into the input stream at empty lines, the end of vboxes, and -various other places (see \type{\partokencontext}, above). Let's call this -control sequence the {\em par-token}. -================= ERROR -Executing \type{\partokenname}<control-sequence> changes the -name of the {\em par-token} from \type{\par} to the given -<control-sequence>. The setting performed by -\type{\partokenname} is global. -================= ERROR -This makes it possible to release the name \type{\par} to the ``user's -name space'', i.e., after \type{\partokenname}, users can define and use -\type{\par} as they wish without changing the behavior of anything -internal to \TeX{}. For example: -================= ERROR -\starttyping -\catcode`\_=11 -\partokenname\_mypar % use \_mypar at user level -\let\_mypar=\par % make \_mypar equivalent to built-in \par -\def\par{some random text} % redefine \par -Hello world. -================= ERROR -Goodbye. -\end -\stoptyping -================= ERROR -This will not output ``\type{some random text}'' (the definition of -\type{\par}), due to the \type{\partokenname} setting. -================= ERROR -By default, the meaning of the {\em par-token} is to end a paragraph -(also named as \type{\endgraf} in the plain \TEX\ format). It can be -changed as usual with, for example, \type{\def}. Naturally, it is the -control sequence name given to \type{\partokenname} that must be -redefined. Continuing the previous example (prior to the \type{\end}): -================= ERROR -\starttyping -\def\_mypar{Hi there!\endgraf} -Paragraph one. -================= ERROR -Paragraph two.\let\_mypar=\endgraf -\stoptyping -================= ERROR -This will output ``\type{Hi there!''}\ after ``\type{Paragraph one.}'', -before ending the paragraph. -================= ERROR -Another behavior of the {\em par-token} built into \TEX\ is that macros -not defined as \type{\long} cause the error ``runaway argument'' if the -{\em par-token} is scanned as a parameter. After -\type{\setpartokenname}, it will be the new control sequence name that -triggers this error, not \type{\par}. For example (still continuing the -same example): -================= ERROR -\starttyping -\def\amac#1{} -\amac{long test, no error: \par} -\amac{long test, gives error: \_mypar} -\stoptyping -================= ERROR -\introduced{1.40.24} -================= ERROR -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\pdfprimitive <control sequence>}} -\bookmark{\pdfprimitive} -================= ERROR -This command executes the primitive meaning of the following control -sequence, regardless of whether the control sequence has been redefined -or made undefined. If the primitive was expandable, \type{\pdfprimitive} -expands also. On the other hand, if the following control sequence never -was a primitive, nothing happens and no error is raised. (In some -versions of \PDFTEX\ prior to 1.40.19, an error was wrongly given.) -\introduced{1.40.0} -================= ERROR -%*********************************************************************** -================= ERROR -\subsection{Typesetting} -================= ERROR -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\pdfinsertht <integer> - (expandable)}} -\bookmark{\pdfinsertht} -================= ERROR -If <integer> is the number of an insertion class, this command -returns the height of the corresponding box at the current time. -For instance, the following returns \type{12pt} in plain \TEX: -================= ERROR -\starttyping -Abc\footnote*{Whatever.}\par -\pdfinsertht\footins -\stoptyping -================= ERROR -================= ERROR -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\pdflastxpos (read-only integer)}} -\bookmark{\pdflastxpos} -================= ERROR -This primitive returns an integer number representing the absolute $x$ -coordinate of the last point marked by \type{\pdfsavepos}. The unit is -`scaled points' (sp). -================= ERROR -================= ERROR -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\pdflastypos (read-only integer)}} -\bookmark{\pdflastypos} -================= ERROR -Completely analogous to \type{\pdflastxpos}, returning the $y$ coordinate. -================= ERROR -================= ERROR -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\pdfsavepos (h, v, m)}} -\bookmark{\pdfsavepos} -================= ERROR -This primitive marks the current absolute ($x,y$) position on the -media, with the reference point in the lower left corner. It is active -only during page shipout, when the page is finally assembled. The -position coordinates can then be retrieved by the \type{\pdflastxpos} -and \type{\pdflastypos} primitives, and \eg\ written out to some -auxiliary file. The coordinates can be used only after the current -\type{\shipout} has been finalized, therefore normally two \PDFTEX\ -runs are required to utilize these primitives. Starting with -\PDFTEX\ 1.40.0, this mechanism can be used also while running -in \DVI\ mode. -================= ERROR -================= ERROR -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\quitvmode}} -\bookmark{\quitvmode} -================= ERROR -The primitive instructs \PDFTEX\ to quit vertical mode and start -typesetting a paragraph. Thus, \type{\quitvmode} has the same basic -effect as the \type{\leavevmode} macro from \type{plain.tex}. However, -\type{\leavevmode} expands the \type{\everypar} tokens list, which may -or may not be desired. \type{\quitvmode} does not expand -\type{\everypar}. \introduced{1.21a} -================= ERROR -================= ERROR -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\vadjust - [<pre spec>] - <filler> - { <vertical mode material> } - (h, m) diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual/pdftex-t.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual/pdftex-t.tex deleted file mode 100644 index 64cb46f9d9a..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual/pdftex-t.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,5692 +0,0 @@ -% interface=english modes=letter,screen output=pdftex -% vim: tw=79 - -% $Id: pdftex-t.tex 905 2023-02-28 01:23:10Z karl $ - -% The number of lines on the title page depends on exactly -% what \PDF\ code is generated. -\setvariables[pdftex][titlepagelines=64] - -\setupoutput - [pdftex] - -%D ConTeXt defaults to 1.5; we want to be maximally compatible (and we don't -%D use any features from 1.4++ anyway, do we?) -\pdfminorversion=3 - -%D First we define ourselves some abbreviations, if only to force -%D consistency and to save typing. We use real small capitals, not pseudo. - -\setupsynonyms - [abbreviation] - [textstyle=smallcaps, - style=smallcaps, - location=left, - width=broad, - sample=\POSTSCRIPT] - -\setupcapitals - [title=no] - -\def\svnscan $#1 #2 #3 #4-#5-#6 #7${ - \def\rcsrevision{#3} - \def\rcsyear{#4} - \def\rcsmonth{#5} - \def\rcsday{{\count0=#6\relax\the\count0}} - \def\rcsmonthname{\ifcase\rcsmonth ERROR\or - January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or July\or - August\or September\or October\or November\or December\else ERROR\fi} -} - -\svnscan $Id: pdftex-t.tex 905 2023-02-28 01:23:10Z karl $ - -\def\versplit#1#2#3{#1.#2#3}% 140 -> 1.40 -\def\currentpdftex{\expandafter\versplit\the\pdftexversion.\pdftexrevision} - -%*********************************************************************** - -\def\eTeX{{$\varepsilon$}-\kern-.125em\TeX} -\def\eg{e.g.} -\def\Eg{E.g.} -\def\MDFIVE{MD5} % not oldstyle 5, capital MD -\def\PDFReference{{\sl PDF Reference}} % PDF with capital letters - -\abbreviation [AFM] {afm} {Adobe Font Metrics} -\abbreviation [BIBTEX] {Bib\TeX} {Handles bibliographies} -\abbreviation [ASCII] {ascii} {American Standard Code for Information Interchange} -\abbreviation [CONTEXT] {\ConTeXt} {general purpose macro package} -\abbreviation [CTAN] {ctan} {global \TEX\ archive server} -\abbreviation [DVI] {dvi} {native \TEX\ Device Independent file format} -\abbreviation [ENCTEX] {enc\TeX} {enc\TeX\ extension to \TEX} -\abbreviation [EPSTOPDF] {epstopdf} {\EPS\ to \PDF\ conversion tool} -\abbreviation [EPS] {eps} {Encapsulated PostScript} -\abbreviation [ETEX] {\eTeX} {an extension to \TEX} -\abbreviation [EXIF] {exif} {Exchangeable Image File format (JPEG file variant)} -\abbreviation [FPTEX] {fp\TeX} {\WIN\ \WEBC\ distribution} -\abbreviation [GHOSTSCRIPT] {Ghostscript} {\PS\ and \PDF\ language interpreter} -\abbreviation [GNU] {gnu} {GNU's Not Unix} -\abbreviation [HZ] {hz} {Hermann Zapf optimization} -\abbreviation [ISO] {iso} {International Organization for Standardization} -\abbreviation [JBIG] {jbig} {Joint Bi-level Image Experts Group} -\abbreviation [JBIGTWO] {jbig2} {Joint Bi-level Image Experts Group} -\abbreviation [JFIF] {jfif} {JPEG File Interchange Format} -\abbreviation [JPEG] {jpeg} {Joint Photographic Experts Group} -\abbreviation [JPEG] {jpeg} {Joint Photographic Experts Group} -\abbreviation [LATEX] {\LaTeX} {general purpose macro package} -\abbreviation [MAC] {Macintosh} {Macintosh hardware platform} -\abbreviation [MACOSX] {Mac\,OS\,X} {Macintosh operating system version 10+} -\abbreviation [MACTEX] {Mac\TeX} {\MAC\ \TEXLIVE\ distribution} -\abbreviation [METAFONT] {\MetaFont} {graphic programming environment, bitmap output} -\abbreviation [METAPOST] {\MetaPost} {graphic programming environment, vector output} -\abbreviation [MIKTEX] {MiK\TeX} {\WIN\ distribution} -\abbreviation [MLTEX] {ml\TeX} {ML\TeX\ extension to \TEX} -\abbreviation [MPTOPDF] {mptopdf} {\METAPOST\ to \PDF\ conversion tool} -\abbreviation [MSDOS] {ms-dos} {Microsoft DOS platform (Intel)} -\abbreviation [PDFETEX] {pdfe\TeX} {\ETEX\ extension supporting \PDF\ output} -\abbreviation [PDFLATEX] {pdf\LaTeX} {\LATEX\ format using \PDFTEX, producing \PDF} -\abbreviation [PDFTEX] {pdf\TeX} {\TEX\ extension supporting \PDF\ output} -\abbreviation [PDF] {pdf} {Portable Document Format} -\abbreviation [PDFA] {pdf/\kern-.16em a} {PDF A/ standards} -\abbreviation [PERL] {Perl} {Perl programming environment} -\abbreviation [PFA] {PFA} {Adobe PostScript Font format (ASCII)} -\abbreviation [PFB] {PFB} {Adobe PostScript Font format (Binary)} -\abbreviation [PK] {pk} {Packed bitmap font} -\abbreviation [PNG] {png} {Portable Network Graphics} -\abbreviation [POSIX] {posix} {Portable Operating System Interface} -\abbreviation [PROTEXT] {pro\TeX t} {\WIN\ \WEBC\ distribution based on \MIKTEX} -\abbreviation [PS] {ps} {PostScript} -\abbreviation [POSTSCRIPT] {PostScript} {PostScript} -\abbreviation [PSTOPDF] {PStoPDF} {PostScript to \PDF\ converter (on top of \GHOSTSCRIPT)} -\abbreviation [RGB] {rgb} {Red Green Blue color specification} -\abbreviation [TCX] {tcx} {\TEX\ Character Translation} -\abbreviation [TDS] {tds} {\TEX\ Directory Standard} -\abbreviation [TEXEXEC] {\TeX exec} {\CONTEXT\ command line interface} -\abbreviation [TEXINFO] {Texinfo} {\GNU\ documentation format} -\abbreviation [TEXUTIL] {\TeX util} {\CONTEXT\ utility tool} -\abbreviation [TEX] {\TeX} {typographic language and program} -\abbreviation [TEXLIVE] {\TeX\ Live} {\TeX\ Live distribution (cross-platform)} -\abbreviation [TFM] {tfm} {\TEX\ Font Metrics} -\abbreviation [TIF] {tiff} {Tagged Interchange File format} -\abbreviation [TUG] {tug} {\TEX\ Users Group} -\abbreviation [UNIX] {Unix} {Unix platform} -\abbreviation [URL] {url} {Uniform Resource Locator} -\abbreviation [WEBC] {Web2c} {Implementation framework for \TEX\ and friends} -\abbreviation [WEB] {web} {literate programming environment} -\abbreviation [WIN] {Windows} {Microsoft Windows platform} - -%D It makes sense to predefine the name of the author of \PDFTEX, doesn't it? - -\def\THANH{H\`an Th\^e\llap{\raise 0.5ex\hbox{\'{}}} Th\`anh} - -%D Because they are subjected to change and tend to spoil the visual -%D appearance of the \TEX\ source, \URL's are defined here. - -\useURL [ptex_org] [http://www.pdftex.org] % links to ptex_examples -\useURL [ptex_ctan] [https://ctan.org/pkg/pdftex] -\useURL [ptex_devel] [svn://tug.org/pdftex/branches/stable] - -% where bug reports should go: -\useURL [ptex_bugs] [mailto:pdftex@tug.org] [] [pdftex@tug.org] -\useURL [ptex_listinfo] [https://lists.tug.org/pdftex] - -\useURL [etex_ctan] [https://ctan.org/pkg/etex] -\useURL [kpathsea] [https://tug.org/kpathsea] -\useURL [texlive] [https://tug.org/texlive] -\useURL [web2c] [https://tug.org/web2c] -\useURL [ctan_systems] [http://mirror.ctan.org/systems] -\useURL [win32] [http://mirror.ctan.org/systems/win32] -\useURL [context] [http://www.pragma-ade.com] -\useURL [tex_showcase] [https://tug.org/texshowcase] - -\useURL [pdfreference] [https://www.adobe.com/devnet/pdf/pdf_reference.html] -\useURL [thanh_truetype_tub] [https://tug.org/TUGboat/tb30-1/tb94thanh.pdf] -\useURL [jbig2enc] [https://github.com/agl/jbig2enc] - -% keep next 2 lines as temporary kludge for a while to make \type{} of -% older ConTeXt versions handle these two new primitives; the original -% problem with \type{} is already solved in ConTeXt as of 2006-02-14. -\let\ifpdfabsnum\relax -\let\ifpdfabsdim\relax - -\def\Syntax #1{\strut\kern-.25em{#1}\kern-.25em\relax} -\def\Next {\crlf\hbox to 2em{}\nobreak} -\def\Sugar #1{\unskip\unskip\unskip\kern.25em{#1}\kern.25em - \penalty0 \ignorespaces} % allow break -% -\def\Lbrace {\Sugar{\tttf\leftargument}} -\def\Literal #1{\Sugar{\type{#1}}} -\def\Means {\Sugar{\mathematics{\rightarrow}}} -\def\Modelist #1{\Sugar{\mathematics{(\hbox{#1})}}} -\def\Optional #1{\Sugar{\mathematics{[\hbox{#1}]}}} -\def\Or {\Sugar{\mathematics{\vert}}} -\def\Rbrace {\Sugar{\tttf\rightargument}} -\def\Tex #1{\Sugar{\type{#1}}} -\def\Whatever #1{\Sugar{\kern.75em\mathematics{(\hbox{#1})}}} % parens - % a full quad before, more of a separator on - % syntax lines. - -% hyphenates, angle brackets -\def\Something#1{\Sugar{\mathematics{\langle}\prewordbreak - {#1}\prewordbreak\mathematics{\rangle}}} -% -% undoes the .25em spacing of \Sugar, letting before and after spaces in -% the input stand. -\def\Somethingtext#1{\Syntax{\Something{#1}}} - -\hbadness=10000 % don't care - -% Break after these chars in urls, not before. -\sethyphenatedurlafter / -\sethyphenatedurlafter . -\sethyphenatedurlafter _ - -% introduced -\def\introduced#1{The primitive was introduced in \PDFTEX\ #1.} -\def\introducedplural#1{The primitives were introduced in \PDFTEX\ #1.} - -% to get bookmarks for primitives like \ifpdfprimitive -\appendtoks\def\tex#1{\string\\#1}\to\simplifiedcommands - -%D We typeset the \URL's in a monospaced font. - -\setupurl - [style=type] - -%D The basic layout is pretty simple. Because we want non european readers to -%D read the whole text as well, a letter size based alternative is offered -%D too. Mode switching is taken care of at the command line when running -%D \TEXEXEC. - -\startmode[letter] - - \setuppapersize - [letter][letter] - -\stopmode - -\setuplayout - [topspace=1.5cm, - backspace=2.5cm, - leftmargin=2.5cm, - width=middle, - footer=1.5cm, - header=1.5cm, - height=middle] - -%D For the moment we use the description mechanism to typeset keywords etc. -%D Well, I should have used capitals. - -\definedescription - [description] - [location=serried, - width=broad] - -\definedescription - [PathDescription] - [location=left, - sample=TEXPSHEADERS, - width=broad, - headstyle=type] - -\definehead - [pdftexprimitive] - [subsubsection] - -\setuphead - [pdftexprimitive] - [style=, - before=\blank, - after=\blank, - numbercommand=\SubSub] - -%D This is typically a document where we want to save pages, -%D so we don't start any matter (part) on a new page. - -\setupsectionblock [frontpart] [page=] -\setupsectionblock [bodypart] [page=] -\setupsectionblock [backpart] [page=] - -%D The \type{\SubSub} command is rather simple and generates a triangle. -%D This makes the primitives stand out a bit more. - -\def\SubSub#1{\mathematics{\blacktriangleright}} - -%D But, for non Lucida users, the next one is more safe: - -\def\SubSub#1{\goforwardcharacter} - -%D I could have said: -%D -%D \starttyping -%D \setupsection[section-5][previousnumber=no,bodypartconversion=empty] -%D \setuplabeltext[subsubsection=\mathematics{\blacktriangleright}] -%D \stoptyping -%D -%D but this is less clear. - -%D We use white space, but not too much. - -\setupwhitespace - [medium] - -\setupblank - [medium] - -%D Verbatim things get a small margin. - -\setuptyping - [margin=standard] - -\definetyping - [esctyping] -\setuptyping - [esctyping] - [margin=standard,option=commands,escape=@] - -%D Due to the lots of verbatim we will be a bit more tolerant in breaking -%D paragraphs into lines. - -\setuptolerance - [verytolerant,stretch] - -%D We put the chapter and section numbers in the margin and use bold fonts. - -\setupheads - [alternative=margin] - -\setuphead - [section] - [style=\bfb] - -\setuphead - [subsection] - [style=\bfa] - -%D The small table of contents is limited to section titles and is fully -%D interactive. - -\setuplist - [section] - [criterium=all, - interaction=all, - width=2em, - aligntitle=yes, - alternative=a] - -%D Ah, this manual is in english! - -\mainlanguage - [en] - -%D We use Palatino fonts, because they look so well on the screen. The -%D version generated at \PRAGMA\ uses Optima Nova instead. Both fonts are -%D designed by Hermann Zapf. - -\setupfonthandling [hz] [min=25,max=25,step=5] - -\setupalign - [hz,hanging] - -\startnotmode[atpragma] - - \setupfontsynonym [Serif] [handling=quality] - \setupfontsynonym [SerifBold] [handling=quality] - \setupfontsynonym [SerifSlanted] [handling=quality] - \setupfontsynonym [SerifItalic] [handling=quality] - \setupfontsynonym [SerifBoldSlanted] [handling=quality] - \setupfontsynonym [SerifBoldItalic] [handling=quality] - - % We use adobe metrics instead of urw metrics because tetex only - % ships the former. Beware, these metrics differ! - - \loadmapfile[context-base.map] - \usetypescript [adobekb] [\defaultencoding] - \usetypescript [palatino][\defaultencoding] - - \setupbodyfont - [palatino,11pt] - - \definefontsynonym[TitleFont][SerifBold] - -\stopnotmode - -\startmode[atpragma] - - \usetypescriptfile[type-ghz] - - \setupfontsynonym [Sans] [handling=quality] - \setupfontsynonym [SansBold] [handling=quality] - \setupfontsynonym [SansSlanted] [handling=quality] - \setupfontsynonym [SansItalic] [handling=quality] - \setupfontsynonym [SansBoldSlanted] [handling=quality] - \setupfontsynonym [SansBoldItalic] [handling=quality] - - \definetypeface[optima][ss][sans][optima-nova] [default][encoding=\defaultencoding] - \definetypeface[optima][tt][mono][latin-modern][default][encoding=\defaultencoding,rscale=1.1] - - \setupbodyfont[optima,10pt,ss] - - \definefontsynonym[TitleFont][SansBold] - -\stopmode - -%D This document is mildly interactive. Yes, Thanh's name will end up ok in -%D the document information data. - -\setupinteraction - [state=start, - style=normal, - color=, - page=yes, - openaction=firstpage, - title=pdfTeX users manual, - author={H\`an Th\^e Th\`anh, Sebastian Rahtz, Hans Hagen, Hartmut Henkel, - Pawe\l\ Jackowski, Martin Schr\"oder, Karl Berry}] - -\setupinteractionscreen % still needed? - -\startnotmode[screen] - -\setupinteractionscreen - [option=bookmark] - -\stopnotmode - -%D Some headers and footers will complete the layout. - -\setupheadertexts - [The pdf\TeX\ user manual] - -\setupfootertexts - [pagenumber] - -%D For Tobias Burnus, who loves bookmarks, I've enabled them. - -\placebookmarks - [section,subsection,pdftexprimitive] - -%D Let's also define a screen layout: - -\startmode[screen] \environment pdftex-i \stopmode - -%D We auto-cross link the paper and screen version: - -\startnotmode[screen] - -%\coupledocument -% [screenversion] -% [pdftex-s] -% [section,subsection,subsubsection,pdftexprimitive] -% [the screen version] - -\setuphead - [section,subsection,subsubsection,pdftexprimitive] - [file=screenversion] - -\setuplist - [section] - [alternative=c] - -\stopnotmode - -%D The text starts here! - -\starttext - -%D Being lazy, I don't split the file, so paper and screen get -%D mixed in one document. - -\startmode[screen] \getbuffer[screen] \stopmode - -\startnotmode[screen] - -%D But first we typeset the title page. It has a background. This -%D background, showing a piece of \PDF\ code, will be referred to -%D later on. - -%D We can use more modern \CONTEXT\ features, but for the moment -%D stick to the old style and methods. - -\NormalizeFontWidth - \TitleFont - {\hskip.5mm The pdf\TeX\ user manual} % \hskip is fake offset - \paperheight - {TitleFont} - -\setupbackgrounds - [page] - [background={title,joke,names,content}] - -\defineoverlay - [title] - [\hbox to \paperwidth - {\hfill - \TitleFont\setstrut - \rotate{The pdf\TeX\ user manual}% - \hskip.5cm}] % \dp\strutbox}] - -% \defineoverlay -% [joke] -% [\hbox to \paperwidth -% {\TitleFont\setstrut -% \dimen0=\overlaywidth -% \advance\dimen0 by -\ht\strutbox -% \advance\dimen0 by -\dp\strutbox -% \advance\dimen0 by -1cm -% \dimen2=\overlayheight -% \advance\dimen2 by -1cm -% \hskip.5cm\expanded{\externalfigure -% [pdftex-z.pdf] -% [width=\the\dimen0,height=\the\dimen2]}% -% \hfill}] - -% \defineoverlay -% [names] -% [\vbox to \paperheight -% {\dontcomplain -% \TitleFont\setstrut -% \setbox0=\hbox{\TeX}% -% \hsize\paperwidth -% \rightskip\ht0 -% \advance\rightskip\dp\strutbox -% \advance\rightskip\dp\strutbox -% \bfa \setupinterlinespace -% \vfill -% \hfill \THANH \endgraf -% \hfill Sebastian Rahtz \endgraf -% \hfill Hans Hagen -% \hfill Hartmut Henkel -% \hfill Pawe\l\ Jackowski -% \vskip 1ex -% \hfill \currentdate -% \vskip 2ex}] - -\defineoverlay - [content] - [\overlaybutton{contents}] - -% title page - -\definelayout - [titlepage] - [backspace=.5cm, - cutspace=3.5cm, - topspace=.5cm, - bottomspace=.5cm, - header=0pt, - footer=0pt, - lines=\getvariable{pdftex}{titlepagelines}, - grid=yes, - width=middle] - -\definecolumnset - [titlepage] - [n=2,distance=0.2cm] - -\start - - \chardef\fontdigits=2 - \switchtobodyfont[10pt,tt] - \setupinterlinespace - [line=\dimexpr((\paperheight-1cm)/\getvariable{pdftex}{titlepagelines})] - \setuptyping[margin=,color=] - \setuplayout[titlepage] - - \startcolumnset[titlepage] - \typefile{pdftex-w.txt} - \stopcolumnset - - \page - \setuplayout - -\stop - -% \startstandardmakeup -% -% %D The titlepage is generated using the background overlay mechanism. This -% %D saves me the trouble of determining funny skips and alignments. So no text -% %D goes here. -% -% \stopstandardmakeup - -\setupbackgrounds - [page] - [background=] - -%D The inside title page is as follows. - -\startstandardmakeup[footerstate=none] - - \dontcomplain - - \setupalign[left] - - \start - - \bfd The pdf\TeX\ user manual - - \bfa \setupinterlinespace - - \vskip4ex - - \THANH\par - Sebastian Rahtz\par - Hans Hagen\par - Hartmut Henkel\par - Pawe\l\ Jackowski\par - Martin Schr\"oder\par - Karl Berry\par - - \vskip3ex - - \rcsmonthname\ \rcsday, \rcsyear\par - \vskip1ex - Rev.\ \rcsrevision - - \stop - - \vfill - - \startlines - The title page is the result of - this plain \TeX\ text: - \stoplines - - \blank[2*big] \setuptyping[after=] - - \starttyping - \pdfoutput=1 - \pdfcompresslevel=0 - \pdfobjcompresslevel=0 - \pdfmapline{ptmr8r Times-Roman 2 <8r.enc} - \font\tenrm=ptmr8r - \tenrm - Welcome to pdf\TeX! - \end - \stoptyping - -\stopstandardmakeup - -\setuppagenumber[number=1] % added in case of single sided usage - -%D So far for non screen mode. - -\stopnotmode - -%D We start with a small table of contents, typeset in double column format. - -\startfrontmatter - -\subject[contents]{Contents} - -\startcolumns[distance=3em] - \placelist[section] -\stopcolumns - -\stopfrontmatter - -%D And here it is: the main piece of text. - -\startbodymatter - -%*********************************************************************** - -\section{Introduction} - -The main purpose of the \PDFTEX\ project is to create and maintain -an extension of \TEX\ that can produce \PDF\ directly from \TEX\ -source files and improve|/|enhance the result of \TEX\ typesetting -with the help of \PDF. When \PDF\ output is not selected, \PDFTEX\ -produces standard \DVI\ output, otherwise it generates \PDF\ output -that looks identical to the \DVI\ output. An important aspect of this -project is to investigate alternative justification algorithms (\eg\ -a font expansion algorithm akin to the \HZ\ micro||typography algorithm by -Prof.~Hermann Zapf). - -\PDFTEX\ is based on the original \TEX\ sources and \WEBC, and has been -successfully compiled on \UNIX, \WIN\ and \MSDOS\ systems. It is -actively maintained, with new features trickling in. Great care is taken -to keep new \PDFTEX\ versions backward compatible with earlier ones. - -A \quote {conservative} successor to \TEX, named \ETEX, was developed -in the 1990s. Since \PDFTEX\ version 1.40, the \ETEX\ extensions are -always part of the \PDFTEX\ engine, so \type{pdfetex} is now simply a -link to \type{pdftex}; they have identical behavior. For documentation -on the \ETEX\ extensions, see \from[etex_ctan]. - -Furthermore, \PDFTEX\ itself has acquired plenty of extensions over the -years which are not related specifically to \PDF\ output, generally new -primitives for various features that are inconvenient or impossible to -implement at the \TEX\ level. Many of these extensions have been adopted -across all engines (not necessarily by the same name), and some are or -will be required by \LATEX. Therefore, \type{etex} is also a link to -\type{pdftex}, the difference being only whether \DVI\ or \PDF\ output -is generated by default. - -Other extensions are \MLTEX\ and \ENCTEX; these are also included in the -current \PDFTEX\ code, although are little used for new documents. - -\PDFTEX\ is maintained by \THANH\ and others. The -\PDFTEX\ homepage is \from [ptex_org]. Please send \PDFTEX\ comments and -bug reports to the mailing list \from [ptex_bugs] (\from [ptex_listinfo]). - -%*********************************************************************** - -\subsection{About this manual} - -This manual revision (\rcsrevision) is intended to cover -\PDFTEX\ development up to version \currentpdftex. The primary -repository for the manual and its sources is at \from[ptex_devel]. -Copies in \PDF\ format can also be found on \CTAN\ via \from[ptex_ctan]. - -Thanks to the many people who have contributed to the manual. -Improvements are always possible, and bugs not unlikely. -Please send questions or suggestions by email to \from[ptex_bugs]. - -%*********************************************************************** - -\subsection{Legal Notice} - -Copyright \copyright\ 1996||2022 \THANH. -Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document -under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.2 -or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; -with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. -A copy of the license is included in the section entitled ``GNU -Free Documentation License''. - -%*********************************************************************** - -\section{About \PDF} - -The cover of this manual lists an almost minimal \PDF\ file generated by -\PDFTEX, from the corresponding source on the next page. Since -compression is not enabled, such a \PDF\ file is rather verbose and -readable. The first line specifies the version used. \PDF\ viewers are -supposed to silently skip over all elements they cannot handle. - -A \PDF\ file consists of objects. These objects can be recognized by their -number and keywords: - -\starttyping -9 0 obj << /Type /Catalog /Pages 5 0 R >> endobj -\stoptyping - -Here \typ{9 0 obj ... endobj} is the object capsule. The first number -is the object number. The sequence \type{5 0 R} is an object reference, -a pointer to another object (no.~5). The second number (here a zero) -is currently not used in \PDFTEX; it is the version number of the -object. It is for instance used by \PDF\ editors, when they replace -objects by new ones. - -When a viewer opens a \PDF\ file, it goes to the end of the file, -looking for the keyword \type{startxref}. The number after -\type{startxref} gives the absolute position (byte offset from the file -start) of the so||called \quote {object cross-reference table} that -begins with the keyword \type{xref}. This table in turn tells the byte -offsets of all objects that make up the \PDF\ file, providing fast -random access to the individual objects (here the \type{xref} table -shows 11~objects, numbered from~0 to~10; the object no.~0 is always -unused). The actual starting point of the file's object structure is -defined after the \type{trailer}: the \type{/Root} entry points to the -\type{/Catalog} object (no.~9). In this object the viewer can find the -pointer \type{/Pages} to the page list object (no.~5). In our example we -have only one page. The trailer also usually holds an \type{/Info} -entry, which points to an object (no.~10) with a bit more about the -document. We can follow the thread: - -\startnarrower -\type{/Root} $\longrightarrow$ object~9 $\longrightarrow$ -\type{/Pages} $\longrightarrow$ object~5 $\longrightarrow$ -\type{/Kids} $\longrightarrow$ object~2 $\longrightarrow$ -\type{/Contents} $\longrightarrow$ object~3 -\stopnarrower - -As soon as we add annotations, a fancy word for hyperlinks and the like, -some more entries will be present in the catalog. We invite users to -take a look at the \PDF\ code of this file to get an impression of that. - -The page content is a stream of drawing operations. Such a stream -can be compressed, where the level of compression can be set with -\type{\pdfcompresslevel} (compression is switched off for the title -page). Let's take a closer look at this stream in object~3. Often -(but not in our example) there is a transformation matrix, six numbers -followed by \type{cm}. As in \POSTSCRIPT, the operator comes after the -operands. Between \type{BT} and \type{ET} comes the text. A font is -selected by a \type{Tf} operator, which is given a font resource name -\type{/F..} and the font size. The actual text goes into \type{()} -bracket pairs so that it creates a \POSTSCRIPT\ string. The numbers -in bracket pairs provide horizontal movements like spaces and -fine glyph positioning (kerning). When one analyzes a file produced by -a less sophisticated typesetting engine, whole sequences of words can -be recognized. In \PDF\ files generated by \PDFTEX\ however, many words -come out rather fragmented, mainly because a lot of kerning takes place; -in our example the \type{80} moves the text \type{(elcome)} left towards -the letter \type{(W)} by 80/1000 of the font size. \PDF\ viewers in search -mode simply ignore the kerning information in these text streams. When -a document is searched, the search engine reconstructs the text from these -(string) snippets. - -Every \type{/Page} object points also to a \type{/Resources} object -(no.~1) that gives all ingredients needed to assemble the page. In our -example only a \type{/Font} object (no.~4) is referenced, which in turn -tells that the text is typeset in \type{/Font} \type{/Times-Roman}. The -\type{/Font} object points also to a \type{/Widths} array (object no.~7) -that tells for each character by how much the viewer must move forward -horizontally after typesetting a glyph. - -More details about the font can be found in the \type{/FontDescriptor} -object (no.~8); if a font file is embedded, this object points to the -font program stream. But as the Times-Roman font used for our example is -one of the 14 so||called standard fonts that should always be present in -any \PDF\ viewer and therefore need not be embedded in the \PDF\ file, -it is left out here for brevity. However, when we use for instance a -Computer Modern Roman font, we have to make sure that this font is later -available to the \PDF\ viewer, and the best way to do this is to embed -the font. It's highly recommended nowadays to embed even the standard -fonts; you can't know how it looks exactly at the viewer side unless you -embed every font. - -In this simple file we don't specify in what way the file should be opened, -for instance full screen or clipped. A closer look at the page object no.~2 -(\typ{/Type /Page}) shows that a mediabox (\typ{/MediaBox}) is part of the -page description. A mediabox acts like the (high-resolution) bounding box -in a \POSTSCRIPT\ file. \PDFTEX\ users can add dictionary entries to page -objects with the \type{\pdfpageattr} primitive. - -Although in most cases macro packages will shield users from these -internals, \PDFTEX\ provides access to many of the entries described -here, either automatically by translating the \TEX\ data structures into -\PDF\ ones, or manually by pushing entries to the catalog, page, info or -self-created objects. One can for instance create an object by using -\type{\pdfobj}, after which \type{\pdflastobj} returns its number. So - -\starttyping -\pdfobj{<< /Type/ExtGState /LW 2 >>} -\stoptyping - -inserts an object into the \PDF\ file (it creates a ``graphics state'' -object setting the line width to 2~units), and \type{\pdflastobj} now -returns the number \PDFTEX\ assigned to this object. Unless objects are -referenced by others, they will just end up as isolated entities, not -doing any real harm but bloating the \PDF\ file. - -In general this rather direct way of pushing objects in the \PDF\ files -by primitives like \type{\pdfobj} is not very useful, and only makes -sense when implementing, say, fill||in field support or annotation -content reuse. We will come to that later. - -Of course, this is just the barest introduction to \PDF\ format. For -those who want to learn more about the gory \PDF\ details, the best bet -is to read the \PDFReference. You can download this book as a big \PDF\ -file from Adobe's \PDF\ Technology Center, \from[pdfreference] --- or -get the heavy paper version. - -We now turn to specifics of \PDFTEX. - -%*********************************************************************** - -\section{Invoking \PDFTEX} - -\PDFTEX\ has many command line options. Except for the simple and -rarely-used \type{-draftmode} and \type{-output-format} options, they -are all inherited from the common framework for \TeX\ engines as -implemented in \WEBC\ (its manual is available at \from [web2c]). - -The same commonality holds for environment variables; see the section -``Setting search paths'' above for an overview. Two additional -environment variables need more description here: first, -\type{SOURCE_DATE_EPOCH} (introduced in version 1.40.17, 2016). If this -is set, it must be a positive integer (with one trivial exception: if it -is set but empty, that is equivalent to 0). Non-integer values cause a -fatal error. The value is used as the current time in seconds since the -usual Unix ``epoch'': the beginning of 1970-01-01, UTC. Thus, a value -of \type{32} would result in a \type{/CreationDate} and \type{/ModDate} -values of \type{19700101000032Z}. This is useful for reproducible -builds of documents. (See also \type{\pdfinfoomitdate}, -\type{\pdfsuppressptexinfo}, et al.) - -The second, related, environment variable is \type{FORCE_SOURCE_DATE}. -If this is set to~\type{1}, \TEX's time-related primitives are also -initialized from the value of \type{SOURCE_DATE_EPOCH}. These primitives -are \type{\year}, \type{\month}, \type{\day}, and \type{\time}. If -\type{SOURCE_DATE_EPOCH} is not set, setting \type{FORCE_SOURCE_DATE} -has no effect. If \type{FORCE_SOURCE_DATE} is unset, set to the empty -string, or set to~\type{0}, the primitives reflect the current time as -usual. Any other value elicits a warning, and the current time is used. -This is useful if one wants to make reproducible \PDF{}s for a set -of documents without changing them in any way, e.g., an operating system -distribution with manuals that use \type{\today}. Except in such unusual -circumstances, it is better not to set this, and let the \TEX\ -primitives retain the meaning they have always had. - -In addition, if both \type{SOURCE_DATE_EPOCH} and -\type{FORCE_SOURCE_DATE} are set, \type{\pdffilemoddate} returns a value -in UTC, ending in \type{Z}. (The values of the environment variables are -irrelevant in this case.) - -Finally, just to have the list of options and basic invocation at hand, -here is a verbatim listing of the \type{-}\type{-help} output. All -options can be specified with one or two dashes and unambiguously -abbreviated. - -\begingroup -\startnotmode[screen] - \switchtobodyfont[10pt] % keep line lengths shorter -\stopnotmode - -\typefile{pdftex-help.txt} - -\endgroup - -%*********************************************************************** - -\section{Macro packages supporting \PDFTEX} - -As \PDFTEX\ generates the final \PDF\ output without help of -a postprocessor, macro packages that take care of these \PDF\ features -have to be set up properly. Typical tasks are handling color, -graphics, hyperlink support, threading, font||inclusion, as well as -page imposition and manipulation. All these \PDF||specific tasks can be -controlled by \PDFTEX's own primitives (a few also by a \PDFTEX||specific -\type{\special{pdf: ...}} primitive). Any other \type{\special{}} commands, -like the ones defined for various \DVI\ postprocessors, are simply -ignored by \PDFTEX\ when in \PDF\ output mode; a warning is given only -for non||empty \type{\special{}} commands. - -When a macro package already written for classical \TEX\ with \DVI\ output -is to be modified for use with \PDFTEX, it is very helpful to get some -insight to what extent \PDFTEX||specific support is needed. This info can -be gathered \eg\ by outputting the various \type{\special} commands -as \type{\message}. Simply type - -\starttyping -\pdfoutput=1 \let\special\message -\stoptyping - -or, if this leads to confusion, - -\starttyping -\pdfoutput=1 \def\special#1{\write16{special: #1}} -\stoptyping - -and see what happens. As soon as one \quote {special} message turns up, one -knows for sure that some kind of \PDFTEX\ specific support is needed, and -often the message itself gives a indication of what is needed. - -Currently all mainstream macro packages offer \PDFTEX\ support, with -automatic detection of \PDFTEX\ as engine. So there is normally no need -to turn on \PDFTEX\ support explicitly. - -\startitemize - -\item For \LATEX\ users, Sebastian Rahtz and Heiko Oberdiek's \type - {hyperref} package has substantial support for \PDFTEX\ and - provides access to most of its features. In the simplest and - most common case, the user merely needs to load \type{hyperref}, - and all cross||references will be converted to \PDF\ hypertext - links. \PDF\ output is automatically selected, compression is - turned on, and the page size is set up correctly. Bookmarks are - created to match the table of contents. - -\item The standard \LATEX\ \type{graphics}, \type{graphicx}, and - \type{color} packages also have automatic \pdfTeX\ support, which - allow use of color, text rotation, and graphics inclusion commands. - -\item The \CONTEXT\ macro package by Hans Hagen has very full support - for \PDFTEX\ in its generalized hypertext features. Support for - \PDFTEX\ is implemented as a special driver, and is invoked by - typing \type{\setupoutput[pdftex]} or feeding \TEXEXEC\ with the - \hbox{\tt -{}-pdf} option. - -\item \PDF\ from \TEXINFO\ documents can be created by running \PDFTEX\ on - the \TEXINFO\ file, instead of \TEX. Alternatively, run the shell - command \type{texi2pdf} instead of \type{texi2dvi}. - -\item A small modification of \filename {webmac.tex}, called \filename - {pdfwebmac.tex}, allows production of hyperlinked \PDF\ versions - of the program code written in \WEB. - -\stopitemize - -Some nice samples of \PDFTEX\ output can be found at -\from[ptex_org], \from[context], and \from[tex_showcase]. - -%*********************************************************************** - -\section{Setting up fonts} - -\PDFTEX\ can work with Type~1 and TrueType fonts (and to some extent -also with OpenType fonts). Font files should be available and embedded -for all fonts used in the generated \PDF. It is possible to use -\METAFONT||generated fonts in \PDFTEX\ --- but it is strongly -recommended not to use these fonts if an equivalent is available in -Type~1 or TrueType format, if only because bitmap Type~3 fonts render -poorly under enlargement. - -%*********************************************************************** - -\subsection[mapfile]{Map files} - -Font map files provide the connection between \TEX\ \TFM\ font files -and outline font file names. They contain also information about -re||encoding arrays, partial font embedding (``subsetting''), and -character transformation parameters (like SlantFont and ExtendFont). Those -map files were first created for \DVI\ postprocessors. But, as \PDFTEX\ -in \PDF\ output mode includes all \PDF\ processing steps, it also needs -to know about font mapping, and therefore reads in one or more map files. -Map files are not read in when \PDFTEX\ is in \DVI\ mode. Bitmap fonts -can (and normally should) be used without being listed in the map file. - -By default, \PDFTEX\ reads the map file \filename{pdftex.map}. In \WEBC, -map files are searched for using the \type{TEXFONTMAPS} config file value -and environment variable. By default, the current directory and various -system directories are searched. - -Within the map file, each font is listed on a single line. The syntax of -each line is upward||compatible with \type{dvips} map files and can contain -the following fields (some are optional; explanations follow): - -\startnarrower -{\em tfmname psname fontflags special encodingfile fontfile} -\stopnarrower - -It is mandatory that {\em tfmname} is the first field. If a {\em -psname} is given, it must be the second field. Similarly if {\em -fontflags} is given it must be the third field (if {\em psname} is -present) or the second field (if {\em psname} is left out). The -positions of {\em special}, {\em encodingfile}, and {\em fontfile} can -be mixed. - -\startdescription {tfmname} -sets the name of the \TFM\ file for a font --- the file name given in a -\TEX\ \type{\font} command. This name must always be given. - -\stopdescription - -\startdescription {psname} -sets the (\POSTSCRIPT) base font name, which has two uses: - -First, when a \PDF\ file is embedded by \type{\pdfximage}, the -\type{/BaseFont} names in the font dictionaries of Type~1 and Type~1C -(CFF) fonts from the embedded \PDF\ file are checked against this {\em -psname} field. If names match, the glyphs of that font will not be -copied from the embedded \PDF\ file, but instead a local font is opened, -and all needed glyphs will be taken from the Type~1 font file that is -mentioned in the map line (see {\em fontfile} below). By this collecting -mechanism Type~1 glyphs can be shared between several embedded \PDF\ -files and with text that is typeset by \PDFTEX, which helps keeping the -resulting \PDF\ file size small, if many files with similar Type~1(C) -fonts are embedded. Replacing Type~1 fonts from embedded \PDF\ files -requires that also a Type~1 font file name is in the {\em fontfile} field -(see below). - -Second, if a font file is not to be embedded into the \PDF\ output -({\em fontfile} field missing), then the {\em psname} field will be -copied to the \type{/BaseFont} and \type{/FontName} dictionary entries -in the \PDF\ file, so that the \POSTSCRIPT\ font name will be known to -reading applications (\eg\ viewers). - -It is highly recommended to use the {\em psname} field, but -strictly speaking it is optional. - -\stopdescription - -\startdescription {fontflags} -optionally specify some characteristics of the font. The following description of -these flags is taken, with slight modification, from the \PDFReference\ -(the section on font descriptor flags). Viewers can adapt their rendering -to these flags, especially when they substitute a non-embedded font by -some own approximation. - -\startnarrower - -The value of the flags key in a font descriptor is a 32||bit integer that -contains a collection of boolean attributes. These attributes are true if the -corresponding bit is set to~1. \in{Table}[flags] specifies the meanings of -the bits, with bit~1 being the least significant. Reserved bits must be set -to zero. - -\startbuffer -\starttabulate[|c|l|] -\HL -\NC \bf bit position \NC \bf semantics \NC\NR -\HL -\NC 1 \NC Fixed||width font \NC\NR -\NC 2 \NC Serif font \NC\NR -\NC 3 \NC Symbolic font \NC\NR -\NC 4 \NC Script font \NC\NR -\NC 5 \NC Reserved \NC\NR -\NC 6 \NC Uses the Adobe Standard Roman Character Set \NC\NR -\NC 7 \NC Italic \NC\NR -\NC 8--16 \NC Reserved \NC\NR -\NC 17 \NC All||cap font \NC\NR -\NC 18 \NC Small||cap font \NC\NR -\NC 19 \NC Force bold at small text sizes \NC\NR -\NC 20--32 \NC Reserved \NC\NR -\HL -\stoptabulate -\stopbuffer - -\placetable - [here][flags] - {The meaning of flags in the font descriptor.} - {\getbuffer} - -All characters in a {\em fixed||width} font have the same width, while -characters in a proportional font have different widths. Characters in a {\em -serif font} have short strokes drawn at an angle on the top and bottom of -character stems, while sans serif fonts do not have such strokes. A {\em -symbolic font} contains symbols rather than letters and numbers. Characters -in a {\em script font} resemble cursive handwriting. An {\em all||cap} font, -which is typically used for display purposes such as titles or headlines, -contains no lowercase letters. It differs from a {\em small||cap} font in -that characters in the latter, while also capital letters, have been sized -and their proportions adjusted so that they have the same size and stroke -weight as lowercase characters in the same typeface family. - -Bit~6 in the flags field indicates that the font's character set -conforms to the -Adobe Standard Roman Character Set, or a subset of that, and that it uses -the standard names for those characters. - -Finally, bit~19 is used to determine whether or not bold characters are -drawn with extra pixels even at very small text sizes. Typically, when -characters are drawn at small sizes on very low resolution devices such -as display screens, features of bold characters may appear only one pixel -wide. Because this is the minimum feature width on a pixel||based device, -ordinary non||bold characters also appear with one||pixel wide features, -and thus cannot be distinguished from bold characters. If bit~19 is set, -features of bold characters may be thickened at small text sizes. - -\stopnarrower - -If the {\em fontflags} field is not given, and the font is embedded, -\PDFTEX\ treats it as the value~4 (decimal, that is, bit position 3 is set), -a symbolic font. For non-embedded fonts, the default value is -\type{0x22}, a non-symbolic serif font. If you do not know the correct -value, it is best not to specify it at all, as specifying a bad value of -font flags may cause trouble in viewers. On the other hand this option -is not absolutely useless because it provides backward compatibility -with older map files (see the {\em fontfile} description below). - -\stopdescription - -\startdescription {special} -specifies font manipulations in the same way as -\type{dvips}. Currently only the keywords \type{SlantFont} -and \type{ExtendFont} are interpreted, other instructions (notably -\type{ReEncodeFont} and its parameters, see {\em encoding} below) are -just ignored. The permitted \type{SlantFont} range is $-$1..1; -for \type{ExtendFont} it's $-$2..2. The block of {\em special} -instruction must be enclosed by double quote characters: \type{"}. - -\stopdescription - -\startdescription {encodingfile} specifies the name of the file -containing the external encoding vector to be used for the font. The -encoding file name must have the extension \type{.enc}, and the file -name including extension must be given with either a preceding~\type{<} -character or a preceding~\type{<[}. The format of the encoding vector is -identical to that used by \type{dvips}. If no encoding is specified, the -font's built||in default encoding is used. The {\em encodingfile} field -may be omitted if you are sure that the font resource has the correct -built||in encoding. In general this option is highly recommended, and it -is {\em required} when subsetting a TrueType font. - -Starting with version 1.40.19, an encoding file can also be specified -for bitmap \PK\ fonts. In this case, it assigns the glyph names from the -given encoding vector, which can be used with the -\type{\pdfglyphtounicode} primitive (q.v.). For example: - -\starttyping -\pdfglyphtounicode{ffi}{0066 0066 0069} % normally: \input glyphtounicode -\pdfgentounicode=1 -\pdfmapline{cmb10 <7t.enc} -\font\cmb=cmb10 \cmb ffi -\stoptyping - -The result is a \PDF\ file with a correctly-labeled \type{/ffi} -character instead of the numeric character position in the -\type{cmb10.tfm} (decimal 14). - -\stopdescription - -\startdescription {fontfile} -sets the name of the font file to be embedded into the \PDF\ output for a -given \TeX\ font (the {\em tfmname}~$\leftrightarrow$~{\em fontfile} -mapping is the most prominent use of the \filename{pdftex.map} file). -The font file name must belong to a Type~1 or TrueType font file. If -the {\em fontfile} field is missing, no font embedding can take place; -in case the {\em psname} field does not contain one of the 14 standard -font names also a warning will be given. Not embedding a font into a \PDF\ -file might be troublesome, as it requires that the font or some similar -looking replacement font is available within the \PDF\ viewer, so that -it can render the glyphs with its own font version. - -The font file name should be preceded by one or two special characters, -specifying how to handle the font file: - -\startitemize - -\item If the font file name is preceded by a \type{<} character, the - font file will be only partially embedded in the \PDF\ output - (``subsetted''), meaning that only used glyphs are written to - the \PDF\ file. This is the most common use and is {\em strongly - recommended} for any font, as it ensures the portability and - reduces the size of the \PDF\ output. Subsetted fonts are included - in such a way that name and cache clashes are minimized. - -\item If the font file name is preceded by a double \type{<<}, the font - file will be included entirely --- all glyphs of the font are - embedded, including even those not used in the document. Apart - from causing large size \PDF\ output, this option may cause - troubles with TrueType fonts, so it is normally not recommended - for Type~1 or TrueType fonts. But this is currently the only mode - that allows the use of OpenType fonts. This mode might also be - useful in case the font is atypical and cannot be subsetted well - by \PDFTEX. {\em Beware: proprietary font vendors typically - forbid full font inclusion.} - -\item If no special character precedes the font file name, it is - ignored, with a warning (this case was deprecated in \PDFTEX\ - version 1.40.0). You achieve exactly the same \PDF\ result if you - just remove the font file name from the map entry. Then the glyph - widths that go into the \PDF~file are extracted from the - \TFM~file, and a font descriptor object is created that contains - approximations of the font metrics for the selected font. - -\item Specifying the {\em psname} and no font file name is only useful - as a last-ditch fallback when you do not want to embed the font - (\eg\ due to font license restrictions), but wish to use the font - metrics and let the \PDF\ viewer generate instances that look - close to the used font in case the font resource is not installed - on the system where the \PDF\ output will be viewed or - printed. To use this feature, the font flags {\em must} be - specified, and it must have the bit~6 set on, which means that - only fonts with the Adobe Standard Roman Character Set can be - simulated. The only exception is the case of a symbolic font, - which is not very useful. - -\stopitemize - -If you encounter problematic lookups, for instance if \PDFTEX\ tries -to open a \type{.pfa} file instead of a \type{.pfb}, you can add -the suffix to the filename. In this respect, \PDFTEX\ completely relies -on the \type{kpathsea} library. - -\stopdescription - -For Type~1 and TrueType fonts, the font file will be included only once -in the \PDF\ output, regardless of how many \TeX\ \type{\font} instances -are used in the document. For instance, given - -\starttyping -\font\a = cmr12 -\font\b = cmr12 at 11pt -\stoptyping - -the outline file \type{cmr12.pfb} will only be included once in the -\PDF, and merely scaled down to create the instance for \type{\b}. - -If a used font is not present in the map files, \PDFTEX\ will try to use -\PK~fonts as most \DVI\ drivers do, creating \PK~fonts on||the||fly if -needed. This is the normal, and recommended, way to use bitmap fonts. - -To summarize this rather confusing story, we include some example map -lines. The most common way is to embed only a subset of glyphs from a -font for a particular desired encoding, like this: - -\starttyping -ptmri8r Times-Italic <8r.enc <ptmri8a.pfb -\stoptyping - -Without re||encoding it looks like this: - -\starttyping -cmr10 CMR10 <cmr10.pfb -\stoptyping - -\type{SlantFont} and \type{ExtendFont} fields are specified as with -\type{dvips}. \type{SlantFont} and \type{ExtendFont} work only with -embedded Type~1 fonts: - -\starttyping -psyro StandardSymL ".167 SlantFont" <usyr.pfb -pcrr8rn Courier ".85 ExtendFont" <8r.enc <pcrr8a.pfb -\stoptyping - -Entirely embed a font into the \PDF\ file without and with re||encoding -(not typically useful): - -\starttyping -fmvr8x MarVoSym <<marvosym.pfb -pgsr8r GillSans <8r.enc <<pgsr8a.pfb -\stoptyping - -A TrueType font can be used in the same way as a Type~1 font: - -\starttyping -verdana8r Verdana <8r.enc <verdana.ttf -\stoptyping - -Finally, a few cases with non-embedded fonts. If the fontfile is -missing, the viewer application will have to use its own approximation -of the missing font (with and without re||encoding): - -\starttyping -ptmr8r Times-Roman <8r.enc -psyr Symbol -\stoptyping - -In the next example the numerical font flags give some rough hint what -general characteristics the GillSans font has, so \eg\ the Adobe Reader -might try an approximation, if it doesn't have the font resource nor -any clue how a font named GillSans should look like: - -\starttyping -pgsr8r GillSans 32 <8r.enc -\stoptyping - -Not embedding fonts is rather risky and should generally be avoided. -The recommendation these days is to embed all fonts, even the 14 standard ones. - -%*********************************************************************** - -\subsection{Helper tools for TrueType fonts} - -As mentioned above, \PDFTEX\ can work with TrueType fonts. Defining -TrueType fonts is similar to Type~1. The only extra thing to do -with TrueType is to create a \TFM\ file. There is a program called -\type{ttf2afm} in the \PDFTEX\ distribution which can be used to -extract \AFM\ from TrueType fonts (another conversion program is -\type{ttf2pt1}). Usage of \type{ttf2afm} is simple: - -\starttyping -ttf2afm -e <encoding vector> -o <afm outputfile> <ttf input file> -\stoptyping - -A TrueType file can be recognized by its suffix \filename {ttf}. The optional -{\em encoding} specifies the encoding, which is the same as the encoding -vector used in map files for \PDFTEX\ and \type{dvips}. If the encoding is -not given, all the glyphs of the \AFM\ output will be mapped to \type -{/.notdef}. \type{ttf2afm} writes the output \AFM\ to standard output. If we -need to know which glyphs are available in the font, we can run \type -{ttf2afm} without encoding to get all glyph names. The resulting \AFM\ file -can be used to generate a \TFM\ one by applying \filename {afm2tfm}. - -To use a new TrueType font the minimal steps may look like below. We suppose -that \filename {test.map} is used. - -\starttyping -ttf2afm -e 8r.enc -o times.afm times.ttf -afm2tfm times.afm -T 8r.enc -echo "times TimesNewRomanPSMT <8r.enc <times.ttf" >>test.map -\stoptyping - -There are a few limitations with TrueType fonts in comparison with -Type~1 fonts: - -\startitemize[a,packed] -\item The special effects SlantFont|/|ExtendFont did not work - before version 1.40.0. -\item To subset a TrueType font, the font must be specified as re||encoded, - therefore an encoding vector must be given. -\item TrueType fonts coming with embedded \PDF\ files are kept - untouched; they are not replaced by local ones. -\stopitemize - -For much more about \PDFTEX\ and TrueType fonts, including many details -on handling glyph names, see ``A closer look at TrueType fonts and -\PDFTEX'', {\em TUGboat} 30:1 (2009), pp.~32||34, \from[thanh_truetype_tub] - -%*********************************************************************** - -\section{Formal syntax specification} - -This section formally specifies the \PDFTEX-specific extensions to the -\TEX\ macro programming language. Most primitives are prefixed by -\type{pdf}. The general definitions and syntax rules follow after the -list of primitives. - -Two new units of measure were introduced in \PDFTEX\ 1.30.0: the -new Didot (1\,nd~=~0.375\,mm) and the new Cicero (1\,nc~=~12\,nd) -(the former was proposed by \ISO\ in 1975). - -% Generated list of primitives (see Makefile). -\input pdftex-syntax.tex - -\subsubject{General definitions and syntax rules} - -\startpacked - -%%S NL -%%S Syntax rules: - -\Syntax{ -\Something{general text} \Means % - \Lbrace \Something{balanced text} \Rbrace -} - -\Syntax{ -\Something{attr spec} \Means % - \Literal{attr} \Something{general text} -} - -\Syntax{ -\Something{resources spec} \Means % - \Literal{resources} \Something{general text} -} - -\Syntax{ -\Something{rule spec} \Means % - (\Literal{width} \Or \Literal{height} \Or \Literal{depth}) % - \Something{dimen} \Optional{\Something{rule spec}} -} - -%\Syntax{\Something{object type spec} \Means -% \Optional{\Literal{stream} -% \Optional{\Something{attr spec}}} \Something{object contents}} - -\Syntax{ -\Something{object type spec} \Means % - \Literal{reserveobjnum} - \Or \Next % - \Optional{\Literal{useobjnum} \Something{number}} \Next % - \Optional{\Literal{stream} \Optional{\Something{attr spec}}} % - \Something{object contents} -} - -\Syntax{ -\Something{annot type spec} \Means % - \Literal{reserveobjnum} - \Or \Next % - \Optional{\Literal{useobjnum} \Something{number}} % - \Optional{\Something{rule spec}} % - \Something{general text} -} - -\Syntax{ -\Something{object contents} \Means % - \Something{file spec} - \Or \Something{general text} -} - -\Syntax{ -\Something{xform attr spec} \Means % - \Optional{\Something{attr spec}} \Optional{\Something{resources spec}} -} - -\Syntax{ -\Something{image attr spec} \Means % - \Optional{\Something{rule spec}} % - \Optional{\Something{attr spec}} % - \Optional{\Something{page spec}} % - \Optional{\Something{colorspace spec}} % - \Optional{\Something{pdf box spec}} -} - -\Syntax{ -\Something{outline spec} \Means % - \Optional{\Something{attr spec}} % - \Something{action spec} % - \Optional{\Literal{count} \Something{number}} % - \Something{general text} -} - -\Syntax{ -\Something{action spec} \Means % - \Literal{user} \Something{user-action spec} - \Or \Literal{goto} \Something{goto-action spec} - \Or \Next \Literal{thread} \Something{thread-action spec} -} - -\Syntax{ -\Something{user-action spec} \Means % - \Something{general text} -} - -\Syntax{ -\Something{goto-action struct spec} \Means % - \Literal{struct} (\Something{numid} \Or \Literal{nameid} \Or \Something{general text}) -} - -% keep in sync with redundant copy below. -\Syntax{ -\Something{goto-action spec} \Means % - \Optional{\Something{goto-action struct spec}} \Something{numid} - \Or \Next \Optional{\Something{file spec}} \Optional{\Something{goto-action struct spec}} \Something{nameid} - \Or \Next \Optional{\Something{file spec}} \Optional{\Something{goto-action struct spec}} \Optional{\Something{page spec}} \Something{general text} - \Or \Next \Something{file spec} \Optional{\Something{goto-action struct spec}} \Something{nameid} \Something{newwindow spec} - \Or \Next \Something{file spec} \Optional{\Something{goto-action struct spec}} \Optional{\Something{page spec}} \Something{general text} \Something{newwindow spec} -} - -\Syntax{ -\Something{thread-action spec} \Means % - \Optional{\Something{file spec}} \Something{numid} - \Or \Optional{\Something{file spec}} \Something{nameid} -} - -\Syntax{ -\Something{colorspace spec} \Means % - \Literal{colorspace} \Something{number} -} - -\Syntax{ -\Something{pdf box spec} \Means % - \Literal{mediabox} % - \Or \Literal{cropbox} % - \Or \Literal{bleedbox} % - \Or \Literal{trimbox} % - \Or \Literal{artbox} -} - -\Syntax{ -\Something{map spec} \Means % - \Lbrace \Optional{\Something{map modifier}} % - \Something{balanced text} \Rbrace -} - -\Syntax{ -\Something{map modifier} \Means % - \Literal{+} \Or \Literal{=} \Or \Literal{-} -} - -\Syntax{ -\Something{numid} \Means % - \Literal{num} \Something{number} -} - -\Syntax{ -\Something{nameid} \Means % - \Literal{name} \Something{general text} -} - -\Syntax{ -\Something{newwindow spec} \Means % - \Literal{newwindow} \Or \Literal{nonewwindow} -} - -\Syntax{ -\Something{dest spec} \Means % - \Optional{\Literal{struct} \Something{number}} \\ - (\Something{numid} \Or \Something{nameid}) - \Something{dest type} -} - -\Syntax{ -\Something{dest type} \Means % - \Literal{xyz} \Optional{\Literal{zoom} \Something{number}} - \Or \Literal{fitr} \Something{rule spec} - \Or \Next \Literal{fitbh} - \Or \Literal{fitbv} - \Or \Literal{fitb} - \Or \Literal{fith} - \Or \Literal{fitv} - \Or \Literal{fit} -} - -\Syntax{ -\Something{thread spec} \Means % - \Optional{\Something{rule spec}} % - \Optional{\Something{attr spec}} % - \Something{id spec} -} - -\Syntax{ -\Something{id spec} \Means % - \Something{numid} \Or \Something{nameid} -} - -\Syntax{ -\Something{file spec} \Means % - \Literal{file} \Something{general text} -} - -\Syntax{ -\Something{page spec} \Means % - \Literal{page} \Something{number} -} - -\Syntax{ -\Something{expand spec} \Means % - \Something{stretch} % - \Something{shrink} % - \Something{step} % - \Optional{\Literal{autoexpand}} -} - -\Syntax{ -\Something{stretch} \Means % - \Something{number} -} - -\Syntax{ -\Something{shrink} \Means % - \Something{number} -} - -\Syntax{ -\Something{step} \Means % - \Something{number} -} - -\Syntax{ -\Something{pre spec} \Means % - \Literal{pre} -} - -\Syntax{ -\Something{pdfspecial spec} \Means % - \Lbrace \Optional{\Something{pdfspecial id} % - \Optional{\Something{pdfspecial modifier}}} % - \Something{balanced text} \Rbrace -} - -\Syntax{ -\Something{pdfspecial id} \Means % - \Literal{pdf:} \Or \Literal{PDF:} -} - -\Syntax{ -\Something{pdfspecial modifier} \Means % - \Literal{direct:} -} - -\Syntax{ -\Something{stack action} \Means % - \Literal{set} \Or \Literal{push} \Or \Literal{pop} \Or \Literal{current} -} - -\stoppacked - -A \Something{general text} is expanded immediately, like \type{\special} -in traditional \TEX, unless explicitly mentioned otherwise. - -Some of the object and image related primitives can be prefixed by -\type{\immediate}. More about that in the next sections. - -%*********************************************************************** - -\section[primitives]{\PDFTEX\ primitives} - -Here follows a description of the primitives added by \PDFTEX\ to the -original \TEX\ engine (other extensions by \ETEX, \MLTEX\ and \ENCTEX\ -are not listed). Many of these primitives are described further in the -\filename {samplepdf.tex} file in the \PDFTEX\ distribution. - -If the output is \DVI, then the \PDFTEX-specific dimension parameters -are not used at all. However, some \PDFTEX\ integer parameters can -affect \DVI\ as well as \PDF\ output (specifically, \type{\pdfoutput} and -\type{\pdfadjustspacing}). - -%A warning to macro writers: The \PDFTEX-team reserves the namespaces -%\type{\pdf*} and \type{\ptex*} for use by \PDFTEX; if you define macros -%whose names start with \type{\pdf} or \type{\ptex}, you risk nameclashes -%with new primitives introduced in future versions of \PDFTEX. - -General warning: many of these new primitives, for example -\type{\pdfdest} and \type{\pdfoutline}, write their arguments directly -to the \PDF\ output file (when producing \PDF), as \PDF\ string -constants. This means that {\em you} (or, more likely, the macros you -write) must escape characters as necessary (namely \type{\}, \type{(}, -and \type{)}. Otherwise, an invalid \PDF\ file may result. The -\type{hyperref} and \TEXINFO\ packages have code which may serve as -a starting point for implementing -this, although it will certainly need to be adapted to any particular -situation. - -%*********************************************************************** - -\subsection{Document setup} - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfoutput} \Whatever{integer}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfoutput}} - -This parameter specifies whether the output format should be \DVI\ or -\PDF. A positive value means \PDF\ output, otherwise (default 0) one gets -\DVI\ output. This primitive is the only one that must be set to produce -\PDF\ output (unless the commandline option \type{-output-format=pdf} -is used); all other primitives are optional. This parameter cannot be -specified {\em after} shipping out the first page. In other words, if -we want \PDF\ output, we have to set \type{\pdfoutput} before \PDFTEX\ -ships out the first page. - -When \PDFTEX\ starts complaining about specials, one can be rather sure -that a macro package is not aware of the \PDF\ mode. A simple way of -making macros aware of \PDFTEX\ in \PDF\ or \DVI\ mode is: - -\starttyping -\ifx\pdfoutput\undefined \csname newcount\endcsname\pdfoutput \fi -\ifcase\pdfoutput DVI CODE \else PDF CODE \fi -\stoptyping - -Using the \type{ifpdf.sty} file, which works with both \LATEX\ and plain -\TeX, is a cleaner way of doing this. Historically, the simple test -\type{\ifx\pdfoutput\undefined} was defined; but nowadays, the \PDFTEX\ -engine is used in distributions also for non-\PDF\ formats (\eg\ -\LATEX), so \type{\pdfoutput} may be defined even when the output format -is \DVI. - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfmajorversion} \Whatever{integer}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfmajorversion}} - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfminorversion} \Whatever{integer}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfminorversion}} - -Together, these two primitives specify the \PDF\ version for generated \PDF\ -output. The defaults compiled into the \PDFTEX\ program are -\type{\pdfmajorversion=1} and \type{\pdfminorversion=4}, thus \PDF~1.4 -is generated by default. - -However, distributions typically alter the engine's compiled default -minor version of~4 when building formats. For example, as of 2010, -\TEXLIVE\ sets \type{\pdfminorversion=5} when formats are built. This is -so object compression can be enabled (see \type{\pdfobjcompress} below). - -This value also defines the highest \PDF\ version for included \PDF{}s -to be allowed without error, by default (see -\type{\pdfinclusionerrorlevel}). - -The values for both must be $\ge\,1$ but are not checked further. -Furthermore, they are set independently; only setting -\type{\pdfmajorversion=2} would result in \PDF~2.4 output; it's -necessary to additionally set \type{\pdfminorversion}. - -If specified, these primitives must appear before any data is to be -written to the generated \PDF\ file. The \type{\pdfmajorversion} -primitive was introduced in \PDFTEX\ 1.40.21. \type{\pdfminorversion} -was originally a shortened synonym of the -\type{\pdfoptionpdfminorversion} command, which is now obsolete. -\introduced{1.30.0} - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfcompresslevel} \Whatever{integer}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfcompresslevel}} - -This integer parameter specifies the level of {\em stream} compression -(text, inline graphics, and embedded \PNG\ images (only if they are un- -and re-compressed during the embedding process); all done by the -\type{zlib} library). Zero means no compression, 1~means fastest, -9~means best, $2..8$ means something in between. A value outside this -range will be adjusted to the nearest meaningful value. This parameter -is read each time \PDFTEX\ starts a stream. Setting -\type{\pdfcompresslevel=0} is useful for \PDF\ stream debugging. - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfobjcompresslevel} \Whatever{integer}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfobjcompresslevel}} - -This integer parameter controls the compression of {\em non-stream} -objects. If specified, the parameter must appear before any data is -written to the \PDF\ output. \introduced{1.40.0} - -In the \PDF-1.4 specification, non-stream objects had to be written in -the \PDF\ file as clear text, uncompressed. The \PDF-1.5 specification -allows collecting non-stream objects as ``compressed objects'' into -``object stream'' objects (\type{/Type /ObjStm}, see \PDF\ Ref.\ -5th~ed., sect.~3.4.6). At the end of the \PDF\ file, an \type{/XRef} -cross-reference stream is then written out instead of the object table. -This can result in a considerably smaller \PDF\ file, particularly if -lots of annotations and links are used. - -The writing of compressed objects is enabled by setting -\type{\pdfobjcompresslevel} to a value between~1 and~3; it's disabled -if~0 (default). Object compression also requires that -\type{\pdfminorversion}$\,\ge\,$5 (or -\type{\pdfmajorversion}$\,\ge\,$2), else a warning is given and the -compression is disabled. The \type{\pdfobjcompresslevel} value is -clipped to the range $0..3$. Using values outside this range is not -recommended (for future extension). - -The \type{\pdfobjcompresslevel} settings have the following effects: -\startitemize[0,packed] -\item When set to~0, no object streams are generated at all. -\item When set to~1, -all non-stream objects are compressed with the exception of any objects -coming with embedded \PDF\ files (``paranoid'' mode, to avoid yet unknown -problems), and also the \type{/Info} dictionary is not compressed for -clear-text legibility. -\item When set to~2, also all non-stream objects coming -with embedded \PDF\ files are compressed, but the \type{/Info} dictionary -is still not compressed. -\item Finally, when set to~3, all non-stream objects -are compressed, including the \type{/Info} dictionary (this means that -the \type{/Info} can't be read as clear text any more). If object streams -are to be used, currently \type{\pdfobjcompresslevel=2} is recommended, -and is so specified in some distributions, including \TEXLIVE~2010 and later. -\stopitemize - -\description{Compatibility caveat:} \PDF\ files generated with object -streams enabled can't be read with (sufficiently old) \PDF\ viewers that -don't understand \PDF-1.5 files. For widest distribution and unknown -audience, don't activate object stream writing. The \PDF-1.5 standard -describes also a hybrid object compression mode that gives some backward -compatibility, but this is currently not implemented, as \PDF-1.5 was -rather quickly adopted by modern \PDF\ viewers. Also not implemented is -the optional \type{/Extends} key. - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfdecimaldigits} \Whatever{integer}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfdecimaldigits}} - -This integer parameter specifies the numeric accuracy of real -coordinates as written to the \PDF\ file. It gives the maximal number of -decimal digits after the decimal point. Valid values are in range -$0..4$. A higher value means more precise output, but also results in a -larger file size and more time to display or print. In most cases the -optimal value is~2. This parameter does not influence the precision of -numbers used in raw \PDF\ code, like that used in \type{\pdfliteral} and -annotation action specifications; also multiplication items (\eg\ -scaling factors) are not affected and are always output with best -precision. This parameter is read when \PDFTEX\ writes a real number to -the \PDF\ output. - -When including huge \METAPOST\ images using \filename {supp-pdf.tex}, one can -limit the accuracy to two digits with: \type{\twodigitMPoutput}. - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfhorigin} \Whatever{dimen}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfhorigin}} - -This parameter can be used to set the horizontal offset the output box -from the top left corner of the page. A value of 1~inch corresponds to the -normal \TEX\ offset. This parameter is read when \PDFTEX\ starts shipping -out a page to the \PDF\ output. - -For standard purposes, this parameter should always be kept at -1~true inch. If you want to shift text on the page, use \TEX's -own \type{\hoffset} primitive. To avoid surprises, after global -magnification has been changed by the \type{\mag} primitive, the -\type{\pdfhorigin} parameter should still be 1~true inch, \eg\ -by typing \type{\pdfhorigin=1 true in} after issuing the \type{\mag} -command. Or, you can preadjust the \type{\pdfhorigin} value before typing -\type{\mag}, so that its value after the \type{\mag} command ends up at -1~true inch again. - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfvorigin} \Whatever{dimen}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfvorigin}} - -This parameter is the vertical companion of \type{\pdfhorigin}, and the -notes above regarding \type{\mag} and true dimensions apply. Also keep -in mind that the \TEX\ coordinate system starts in the top left corner -(downward), while \PDF\ coordinates start at the bottom left corner -(upward). - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfpagewidth} \Whatever{dimen}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfpagewidth}} - -This dimension parameter specifies the page width of the \PDF\ output -(the screen, the paper, etc.). \PDFTEX\ reads this parameter when it -starts shipping out a page. After magnification has been changed by -the \type{\mag} primitive, check that this parameter reflects the wished -true page width. - -If the value is set to zero, the page width is calculated as -$w_{\hbox{\txx box being shipped out}} + 2 \times (\hbox{horigin} + -\hbox{\type{\hoffset}})$. When part of the page falls off the paper or -screen, you can be rather sure that this parameter is set wrong. - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfpageheight} \Whatever{dimen}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfpageheight}} - -Similar to the previous item, this dimension parameter specifies the -page height of the \PDF\ output. If set to zero, the page height will -be calculated analogously to the above. After magnification has been -changed by the \type{\mag} primitive, check that this parameter reflects -the wished true page height. - -%*********************************************************************** - -\subsection[sec.docinfocatalog]{Document info and catalog} - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfomitinfodict} \Whatever{integer}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfomitinfodict}} - -If nonzero, omit the \type{/Info} dictionary completely, as required by -the \PDF\ A-4 standard. \introduced{1.40.25} - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfinfo} \Something{general text}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfinfo}} - -This primitive allows the user to specify information for the document -info dictionary; if this information is provided, it can be extracted, -\eg\ by the \type{pdfinfo} program. The \Something{general text} is a -collection of key||value||pairs. The key names are preceded by a -\type{/}, and the values, being strings, are given between -parentheses. All keys, and the primitive itself, are optional. Possible -keys are:\crlf -\type{/Title},\crlf -\type{/Author},\crlf -\type{/Subject},\crlf -\type{/Keywords},\crlf -\type{/Producer} (defaults to \hbox{\tt pdfTeX-\currentpdftex}),\crlf -\type{/Creator} (defaults to \type{TeX}),\crlf -\type{/CreationDate} (defaults to current date and time, with time zone),\crlf -\type{/ModDate} (same default),\crlf -\type{/Trapped} (defaults to \type{/False},\crlf -\type{/PTEX.Fullbanner} (defaults to the \type{\pdftexbanner} string, q.v.). - -\type{/CreationDate} and \type{/ModDate} are expressed in the form -\type{D:YYYYMMDDhhmmssTZ}, where \type{YYYY} is the year, \type{MM} is -the month, \type{DD} is the day, hh is the hour, \type{mm} is the -minutes, \type{ss} is the seconds, and \type{TZ} is an optional string -denoting the time zone, \type{Z} for universal time. For example, this -is the Unix epoch, the beginning of 1970-01-01 UTC, in this format: -\type{19700101000000Z}. If the time zone is not UTC, it is given as -\type{+HH'mm'} or \type{-HH'mm'}, indicating an offset of the given -hours and minutes from UTC, with the given either later (\type{+}) or -earlier (\type{-}) than UTC. (This syntax is specified by the PDF -definition.) - -Multiple appearances of \type{\pdfinfo} are concatenated. Usually if a -key is given more than once, the first appearance will be used, but this -is viewer||dependent. Except for standard \TeX\ expansion, \PDFTEX\ does -not perform any further operations in the \Something{general text} -provided by the user. - -Here is an example of using \type{\pdfinfo} to include the -information not supplied by \PDFTEX: - -\starttyping -\pdfinfo { - /Title (example.pdf) - /Author (Tom and Jerry) - /Subject (Example) - /Keywords (mouse, cat) -} -\stoptyping - -For more details on all this, see the \PDFReference. - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfinfoomitdate} \Whatever{integer}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfinfoomitdate}} - -If nonzero, omit the \type{/CreationDate} and \type{/ModDate} keys from -the document info dictionary described above. This can be useful in -making reproducible \PDF{}s. \introduced{1.40.17} - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfsuppressptexinfo} \Whatever{integer}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfsuppressptexinfo}} - -Treated as a bitmask, specifying which \type{PTEX.*} keys to omit from -the output: - -\startbuffer -\starttabulate[|l|l|] -\HL -\NC \bf value \NC \bf suppresses \NC\NR -\HL -\NC \tt 1 \NC \type{PTEX.Fullbanner} \NC\NR -\NC \tt 2 \NC \type{PTEX.FileName} \NC\NR -\NC \tt 4 \NC \type{PTEX.PageNumber} \NC\NR -\NC \tt 8 \NC \type{PTEX.InfoDict} \NC\NR -\HL -\stoptabulate -\stopbuffer - -\placetable - [here][suppressptexinfo] - {\type{\pdfsuppressptexinfo} bit meanings.} - {\getbuffer} - -Thus, the value \type{-1}, or the sum of all defined bits, will suppress -everything. - -\type{PTEX.Fullbanner} is included by default in the general document -info dictionary, as mentioned under \type{\pdfinfo} above. The other -\type{PTEX.*} keys are included when a \PDF\ is included in the document -(and not otherwise), as described in \in{section}[sec.addpdfkeys]. - -This conditional suppression can be useful in making reproducible -\PDF{}s. \introduced{1.40.17} - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfcatalog} \Something{general text} - \Optional{\Literal{openaction} \Something{action spec}}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfcatalog}} - -Similar to the document info section is the document catalog, where -possible keys are \type{/URI}, which specifies the base \URL\ of the -document, and \type {/PageMode}, which determines how the \PDF\ viewer -displays the document on startup. The possibilities for the latter are -explained in \in {table} [pagemode]: - -\startbuffer -\starttabulate[|l|l|] -\HL -\NC \bf value \NC \bf meaning \NC\NR -\HL -\NC \tt /UseNone \NC neither outline nor thumbnails visible \NC\NR -\NC \tt /UseOutlines \NC outline visible \NC\NR -\NC \tt /UseThumbs \NC thumbnails visible \NC\NR -\NC \tt /FullScreen \NC full||screen mode \NC\NR -\HL -\stoptabulate -\stopbuffer - -\placetable - [here][pagemode] - {Supported \type{/PageMode} values.} - {\getbuffer} - -The default \type{/PageMode} setting is \type{/UseNone}. In -full||screen mode, there is no menu bar, window controls, nor any other -window present. - -After the \Something{general text}, a construct \Literal{openaction} -\Something{action spec} can be given, where \Literal{openaction} is a -\PDFTEX\ keyword, and \Something{action spec} specifies the action to be -taken when opening the document. This \Something{action spec} is the -same as for internal links; see \in {section} [linking]. (Instead of -using this method, one can also write the open action directly into the -catalog.) - -Several settings can be made in one \type{\pdfcatalog} call, for -example: - -\starttyping -\pdfcatalog{ - /PageMode /FullScreen -} openaction goto page 2 {/Fit} -\stoptyping - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfcreationdate} \Whatever{expandable}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfcreationdate}} - -Expands to the date string \PDFTEX\ uses in the info dictionary of the -document, \eg\ for this file {\tt\pdfcreationdate}. \introduced{1.30.0} - - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfnames} \Something{general text}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfnames}} - -This primitive inserts the \Something{general text} to the \type -{/Names} array. The text must -conform to the specifications as laid down in the \PDFReference, -otherwise the document can be invalid. - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdftrailer} \Something{general text}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdftrailer}} - -This command puts its argument text verbatim into the file trailer -dictionary. Example: \type{\pdftrailer {/mytrlrkey /mytrlrval}}. -\introduced{1.11a} - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdftrailerid} \Something{general text}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdftrailerid}} - -Use the \Something{general text} to seed the \type{/ID} value in the -trailer, instead of the default combination of the input file -name and starting time. If the argument is empty, the \type{/ID} is -omitted entirely. Example: \type{\pdftrailerid{}}. This can be useful -in making reproducible \PDF{}s. \introduced{1.40.17} - -%*********************************************************************** - -\subsection{Fonts} - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfpkresolution} \Whatever{integer}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfpkresolution}} - -This integer parameter specifies the default resolution of embedded \PK\ -fonts and is read when \PDFTEX\ embeds a \PK\ font during finishing the -\PDF\ output. As bitmap fonts are still rendered poorly by some \PDF\ -viewers, it is best to use Type~1 fonts when available. - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdffontexpand} - \Something{font} \Something{stretch} \Something{shrink} - \Something{step} \Optional{\Literal{autoexpand}}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdffontexpand}} - -This extension to \TEX's font definitions controls a major \PDFTEX\ feature -called {\em font expansion}. We describe this by an example: - -\starttyping -\font\somefont=sometfm at 10pt -\pdffontexpand\somefont 30 20 10 autoexpand -\pdfadjustspacing=2 -\stoptyping - -The \type{30 20 10} means this: \quotation {hey \TEX, when line breaking -is going badly, you may stretch the glyphs from this font as much as -3\,\% or shrink them as much as 2\,\%}. For practical reasons \PDFTEX\ -uses discrete expansion steps, in this example, 1\,\%. Roughly spoken, the -trick is as follows. Consider a text typeset in triple column mode. When -\TEX\ cannot break a line in the appropriate way, the unbreakable parts -of the word will stick into the margin. When \PDFTEX\ notes this, it -will try to scale (shrink) the glyphs in that line using fixed steps, -until the line fits. When lines are too spacy, the opposite happens: -\PDFTEX\ starts scaling (stretching) the glyphs until the white space -gaps is acceptable. This glyph stretching and shrinking is called -{\em font expansion}. To enable font expansion, \type{\pdfadjustspacing} -must be set to a value greater than zero. - -There are two different modes for font expansion: - -First, if the \type{autoexpand} option is given --- which is the -recommended mode --- only a single map entry is needed for all expanded -font versions, using the name of the unexpanded \TFM\ file ({\em -tfmname}). No expanded {\em tfmname} versions need be mentioned (they are -ignored), as \PDFTEX\ generates expanded instances of the unexpanded \TFM\ -data structures and keeps them in its memory. Since \PDFTEX~1.40.0 the -\type{autoexpand} mode happens within the page stream by modification of -the text matrix (\PDF\ operator ``\type{Tm}''), and not at the font -file level, giving the advantage that it now works not only with Type~1 -but also with TrueType and OpenType fonts (and even without embedding -a font file; but that's not recommended). In this mode \PDFTEX\ requires -only unexpanded font files. - -Second, if the \type{autoexpand} option is missing, setting up font -expansion gets more tedious, as there must be map entries for \TFM\ files -in all required expansion values. The expanded {\em tfmname} variants -are constructed by adding the font expansion value to the {\em tfmname} -of the base font, \eg\ there must be a map entry with {\em tfmname} -\type{sometfm+10} for 1\,\% stretch or \type{sometfm-15} for 1.5\,\% -shrink. This also means that for each expanded font variant a \TFM\ -file with properly expanded metrics must exist. Having several map -entries for the various expansion values of a font requires providing -for each expansion value an individually crafted font file with expanded -glyphs. Depending on how these glyphs are generated, this might give -slightly better glyph forms than the rather simple glyph stretching -used in \type{autoexpand mode}. The drawback is that several font -files will be embedded in the \PDF\ output for each expanded font, -leading to significantly larger \PDF\ files than in \type{autoexpand} -mode. For moderate expansion values, going without \type{autoexpand} -mode is typically not worth the trouble. - -A caveat: when \type{\pdffontexpand} is executed, \PDFTEX\ immediately -loads two fonts, at the maximum stretch and shrink; in our example, -\type{sometfm+30} and \type{sometfm-20}. (If they aren't available, -\type{mktextfm} may be uselessly called, and then an error message -issued.) This happens even if those fonts never end up being used, which -is arguably undesirable, but hard to change. It is not a problem when -using \type{autoexpand}. - -The font expansion mechanism is inspired by an optimization first -introduced by Prof.~Hermann Zapf, which in itself goes back to -optimizations used in the early days of typesetting: use different -glyphs to optimize the grayness of a page. So, there are many, slightly -different~a's, e's, etc. For practical reasons \PDFTEX\ does not use -such huge glyph collections; it uses horizontal scaling instead. This is -sub||optimal, and for many fonts, possibly offensive to the design. But, -when using \PDF, it's not illogical: \PDF\ viewers support arbitrary -scaling, after all. (Also, they used to use so||called -Multiple Master fonts when no fonts are embedded and|/|or can be found -on the target system. Such fonts are designed to adapt their design to -the different scaling parameters. It is up to the user to determine -to what extent mixing slightly remastered fonts can be used without -violating the design. Think of an O: when geometrically stretched, the -vertical part of the glyph becomes thicker, and looks incompatible with -an unscaled original. With a Multiple Master situation, one can stretch -while keeping this thickness compatible. Perhaps something similar -happens with TrueType and OpenType fonts nowadays.) - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfadjustspacing} \Whatever{integer}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfadjustspacing}} - -This primitive provides a switch for enabling font expansion. By default, -\type{\pdfadjustspacing} is set to~0; then font expansion is disabled, -so that the \PDFTEX\ output is identical to that from the original \TEX\ -engine. - -Font expansion can be activated in two modes. When -\type{\pdfadjustspacing} is set to~1, font expansion is applied {\em -after} \TEX's normal paragraph breaking routines have broken the paragraph -into lines. In this case, line breaks are identical to standard \TEX\ -behavior. - -When set to~2, the width changes that are the result of stretching and -shrinking are taken into account {\em while} the paragraph is broken into -lines. In this case, line breaks are likely to be different from those of -standard \TEX. In fact, paragraphs may even become longer or shorter. - -Both alternatives require a collection of \TFM\ files that are -related to the \Something{stretch} and \Something{shrink} settings -for the \type{\pdffontexpand} primitive, unless this is given with the -\type{autoexpand} option. - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\efcode} \Something{font} - \Something{8-bit number} \Whatever{integer}}} -\bookmark{\tex{efcode}} - -We haven't yet told the whole story. One can imagine that some glyphs are -visually more sensitive to stretching or shrinking than others. Then the -\type{\efcode} primitive can be used to influence the expandability of -individual glyphs within a given font, as a factor to the expansion -setting from the \type{\pdffontexpand} primitive. The syntax is similar -to \type{\sfcode} (but with the \Something{font} required), and it -defaults to~1000, meaning 100\,\% expandability. The given integer value -is clipped to the range $0..1000$, corresponding to a usable -expandability range of $0..100$\,\%. Example: - -\starttyping -\efcode\somefont`A=800 -\efcode\somefont`O=0 -\stoptyping - -Here an A may stretch or shrink only by 80\,\% of the current expansion -value for that font, and expansion for the~O is disabled. The actual -expansion is still bound to the steps as defined by \type{\pdffontexpand} -primitive, otherwise one would end up with more possible font inclusions -than would be comfortable. - -Changes to this table are global, i.e., ignore \TeX's usual grouping, -and apply only to the given \Something{font}. - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfprotrudechars} \Whatever{integer}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfprotrudechars}} - -Yet another way of optimizing paragraph breaking is to let certain -characters move into the margin (`character protrusion'). When -\type{\pdfprotrudechars=1}, the glyphs qualified as such will make -this move when applicable, without changing the line-breaking. When -\type{\pdfprotrudechars=2} (or greater), character protrusion will -be taken into account while considering breakpoints, so line-breaking -might be changed. This qualification and the amount of shift are set by -the primitives \type{\rpcode} and \type{\lpcode}. Character protrusion -is disabled when \type{\pdfprotrudechars=0} (or negative). - -If you want to protrude some item other than a character (\eg\ -a \type{\hbox}), you can do so by padding the item with an invisible -zero||width character, for which protrusion is activated. - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\rpcode} \Something{font} - \Something{8-bit number} \Whatever{integer}}} -\bookmark{\tex{rpcode}} - -The amount that a character from a given font may shift into the right -margin (`character protrusion') is set by the primitive \type{\rpcode}. -The protrusion distance is the integer value given to \type{\rpcode}, -multiplied with 0.001\,em from the current font. The given integer value -is clipped to the range $-1000..1000$, corresponding to a usable -protrusion range of $-$1\,em..1\,em. Example: - -\starttyping -\rpcode\somefont`,=200 -\rpcode\somefont`-=150 -\stoptyping - -Here the comma may shift by 0.2\,em into the margin and the hyphen by -0.15\,em. All these small bits and pieces will help \PDFTEX\ to give -you better paragraphs (use \type{\rpcode} judiciously; don't overdo it). - -Remark: old versions of \PDFTEX\ use the character width as measure. This -was changed to a proportion of the em-width after \THANH\ finished his -master's thesis. - -Changes to this table are global, i.e., ignore \TeX's usual grouping, -and apply only to the given \Something{font}. - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\lpcode} \Something{font} - \Something{8-bit number} \Whatever{integer}}} -\bookmark{\tex{lpcode}} - -This is similar to \type{\rpcode}, but affects the amount by which -characters may protrude into the left margin. Here also the given integer -value is clipped to the range $-1000..1000$. - -Changes to this table are global, i.e., ignore \TeX's usual grouping, -and apply only to the given \Something{font}. - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\leftmarginkern} \Something{box number} - \Whatever{expandable}}} -\bookmark{\tex{leftmarginkern}} - -The \Tex{\leftmarginkern} \Something{box number} primitive expands to the -width of the margin kern at the left side of the horizontal list stored -in \Tex{\box} \Something{box number}. The expansion string includes the -unit \type{pt}. \Eg, when the left margin kern of \type{\box0} amounts -to $-$10\,pt, \type{\leftmarginkern0} will expand to \type{-10pt}. -A similar primitive \type{\rightmarginkern} exists for the right margin. -\introduced{1.30.0} - -These are auxiliary primitives to make character protrusion -more versatile. When using the \TEX\ primitive \type{\unhbox} or -\type{\unhcopy}, the margin kerns at either end of the unpackaged -hbox will be removed (\eg\ to avoid weird effects if several -hboxes are unpackaged behind each other into the same horizontal -list). These \type{\unhbox} or \type{\unhcopy} are often used together -with \type{\vsplit} for dis- and re||assembling of paragraphs, \eg\ to -add line numbers. Paragraphs treated like this do not show character -protrusion by default, as the margin kerns have been removed during the -unpacking process. - -The \type{\leftmarginkern} and \type{\rightmarginkern} primitives allow -to access the margin kerns and store them away before unpackaging the -hbox. \Eg\, the following code snipplet restores margin kerning of -a horizontal list stored in \type{\box\testline}, resulting in a hbox with -proper margin kerning (which is then done by ordinary kerns). - -\starttyping -\dimen0=\leftmarginkern\testline -\dimen1=\rightmarginkern\testline -\hbox to\hsize{\kern\dimen0\unhcopy\testline\kern\dimen1} -\stoptyping - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\rightmarginkern} \Something{box number} - \Whatever{expandable}}} -\bookmark{\tex{rightmarginkern}} - -The \Tex{\rightmarginkern} \Something{box number} primitive expands to -the width of the margin kern at the right side of the horizontal list -stored in \Tex{\box} \Something{box number}. See \type{\leftmarginkern} -for more details. -\introduced{1.30.0} - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\letterspacefont} \Something{control sequence} - \Something{font} \Something{integer}}} -\bookmark{\tex{letterspacefont}} - -This primitive creates an instance of \Something{font} with the widths -of all glyphs increased by \Something{integer} thousandths of an em (as -set in \Something{font}). The effect is letter spacing, but the glyphs -are actually larger (sidebearings are increased), so a single glyph will -take more space. For instance, the following creates a font -\type{\lsfont} whose glyphs are all 1.2\,pt larger than those of -\type{\normalfont}: - -\starttyping -\font\normalfont=myfont at 12pt -\letterspacefont\lsfont\normalfont 100 -\stoptyping - -Negative values are allowed for \Something{integer}. -Letter spacing works natively in \PDF\ mode only, unless special fonts are -devised (in our example, a \type{myfont+100ls} font), as with font expansion. - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfcopyfont} \Something{control sequence} - \Something{font}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfcopyfont}} - -This primitive defines \Something{control sequence} as a synonym for -\Something{font}. - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdffontattr} \Something{font} - \Something{general text}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdffontattr}} - -This primitive inserts the \Something{general text} to the \type{/Font} -dictionary. The text must conform to the specifications as laid down in -the \PDFReference, otherwise the document can be invalid. For examples, -see the \type{cmap} and \type{CJK} packages. - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdffontname} \Something{font} - \Whatever{expandable}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdffontname}} - -In \PDF\ files produced by \PDFTEX\ one can recognize a font resource -by the prefix~\type{/F} followed by a number, for instance \type{/F12} -or \type{/F54}. For a given \TEX\ \Something{font}, this primitive -expands to the number from the corresponding font resource name. -\Eg, if \type{/F12} corresponds to some \TEX\ font \type{\foo}, the -\type{\pdffontname\foo} expands to the number~\type{12}. - -In the current implementation, when \type{\pdfuniqueresname} (see below) -is set to a positive value, the \type{\pdffontname} still returns only the -number from the font resource name, but not the appended random string. - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdffontobjnum} \Something{font} - \Whatever{expandable}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdffontobjnum}} - -This command is similar to \type{\pdffontname}, but it returns the -\PDF\ object number of the font dictionary instead of the number from -the font resource name. \Eg, if the font dictionary (\type{/Type -/Font}) in \PDF\ object~3 corresponds to some \TEX\ font \type{\foo}, -the \type{\pdffontobjnum\foo} gives the number~\type{3}. - -Use of \type{\pdffontname} and \type{\pdffontobjnum} allows users full -access to all the font resources used in the document. - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdffontsize} \Something{font} - \Whatever{expandable}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdffontsize}} - -This primitive expands to the font size of the given font, with unit -\type{pt}. \Eg, when using the plain \TeX\ macro package, the call -\type{\pdffontsize\tenrm} expands to \type{10.0pt}. - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfincludechars} \Something{font} - \Something{general text} \Whatever{expandable}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfincludechars}} - -This command causes \PDFTEX\ to treat the characters in \Something{general -text} as if they were used with \Something{font}\unkern, which means that the -corresponding glyphs will be embedded into the font resources in the \PDF\ -output. Nothing is appended to the list being built. - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfomitcharset} \Whatever{integer}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfomitcharset}} - -If this primitive parameter is zero (the default), the \type{/CharSet} -entry is included as usual for fonts in the \PDF\ output; if it is set -to 1, then \type{/CharSet} is omitted. (Other values may have other -meanings in the future, so do not rely on them.) - -Explanation: This parameter was created because the \PDFA-1 standard -requires \type{/CharSet}, whereas \PDFA-2 and \PDFA-3 allow it to be -omitted but have extraordinary requirements, which \PDFTEX\ does not -currently meet, if it is included.\introduced{1.40.20} - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfuniqueresname} \Whatever{integer}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfuniqueresname}} - -When this primitive is assigned a positive number, \PDF\ resource names -will be made reasonably unique by appending a random string consisting -of six \ASCII\ characters. - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfmapfile} \Something{map spec}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfmapfile}} - -This primitive is used for reading a font map file consisting of -one or more font map lines. The name of the map file is given in -the \Something{map spec} together with an optional leading modifier -character. If no \type{\pdfmapfile} primitive is given, the default map -file \filename{pdftex.map} will be read by \PDFTEX. There is a companion -primitive \type{\pdfmapline} that allows to scan single map lines; -its map line argument has the same syntax as the map lines from a map -file. Both primitives can be used concurrently. The \type{\pdfmapfile} -primitive is fast for reading external bulk font map information (many -map lines collected in a map file), whereas the \type{\pdfmapline} allows -to put the font map information for individual \TeX\ fonts right into -the \TeX\ source or a style file. In any case the map line information -is scanned by \PDFTEX, and in the most common case the data are put into -a fresh internal map entry data structure, which is then consulted once -a font is called. - -Normally there is no need for the \PDFTEX\ user to bother about the -\type{\pdfmapfile} or \type{\pdfmapline} primitives, as the main \TEX\ -distributions provide nice helper tools that automatically assemble -the default font map file. Prominent tool examples are the scripts -\type{updmap} and \type{updmap-sys} coming with \TEXLIVE. -If your map file isn't in the current directory (or a standard system -directory), you will need to set the \type{TEXFONTMAPS} variable (in -\WEBC) or give an explicit path so that it will be found. - -When the \type{\pdfmapfile} or \type{\pdfmapline} primitive is read -by \PDFTEX, the argument (map file or map line) will be processed -{\em immediately}, and the internal map entry database is updated. -The operation mode of the \type{\pdfmapfile} and \type{\pdfmapline} -primitives is selected by an optional modifier character (\type{+}, -\type{=}, \type{-}) in front of the {\em tfmname} field. This modifier -defines how the individual map lines are going to be handled, and how -a collision between an already registered map entry and a newer one is -resolved; either ignoring a later entry, or replacing or deleting an -existing entry. But in any case, map entries of fonts already in use -are kept untouched. Here are two examples: - -\starttyping -\pdfmapfile{+myfont.map} -\pdfmapline{+ptmri8r Times-Italic <8r.enc <ptmri8a.pfb} -\stoptyping - -When no modifier character is given (\eg\ \type{\pdfmapfile{foo.map}} -or \type{\pdfmapline{phvr8r Helvetica}}) and there hasn't already been -any call of one of these primitives before, then the default map file -\filename{pdftex.map} will {\em not} be read in. Apart from this the -given map file will be processed similarly as with a \type{+} modifier: -duplicate later map entries within the file are ignored and a warning is -issued. This means, that you can block reading of the default map file -also by an empty \type{\pdfmapfile{}} or \type{\pdfmapline{}} early in -the \TeX\ file. When the default map file is large but you don't need it -anyway, these command variants might considerably speed up the \PDFTEX\ -startup process. - -If a modifier is given, the mechanism is so that before reading the -items given as arguments to \type{\pdfmapfile} or \type{\pdfmapline} -the default map file will be read first --- if this hasn't already -been done or been prevented by the above blocking cases. This should -be mostly compatible with the traditional behavior. If you want to add -support for a new font through an additional font map file while keeping -all the existing mappings, don't use the primitive versions without -modifier, but instead type either \type{\pdfmapfile{+myfont.map}} or -\type{\pdfmapfile{=myfont.map}}, as described below. - -\type{\pdfmapfile {+foo.map}} reads the file \filename{foo.map}; duplicate -later map entries within the file are ignored and a warning is issued. - -\type{\pdfmapfile {=foo.map}} reads the file \filename{foo.map}; -matching map entries in the database are replaced by new entries from -\filename{foo.map} (if they aren't already in use). - -\type{\pdfmapfile {-foo.map}} reads the file \filename{foo.map}; matching -map entries are deleted from the database (if not yet in use). - -If you want to use a base map file name other than \type{pdftex.map}, -or change its processing options through a \PDFTEX\ format, you can do -this by appending the \type{\pdfmapfile} command to the \type{\everyjob{}} -token list for the \type{-ini} run, \eg: - -\starttyping -\everyjob\expandafter{\the\everyjob\pdfmapfile{+myspecial.map}} -\dump -\stoptyping - -This would always read the file \type{myspecial.map} after the default -\type{pdftex.map} file. - - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfmapline} \Something{map spec}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfmapline}} - -Similar to \type{\pdfmapfile}, but here you can give a single -map line (like the ones in map files) as an argument. The optional modifiers -(\type{+-=}) have the same effect as with \type{\pdfmapfile}; see also -the description above. Example: - -\starttyping -\pdfmapline{+ptmri8r Times-Italic <8r.enc <ptmri8a.pfb} -\stoptyping - -This primitive (especially the \type{\pdfmapline{=...}} variant) is useful -for temporary quick checks of a new font map entry during development, -before finally putting it into a map file. - -\type{\pdfmapline {}} like \type{\pdfmapfile {}} blocks reading -of the default map file, if it comes early enough in the \TeX\ -input. \introduced{1.20a} - - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfsuppresswarningdupmap} \Whatever{integer}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfsuppresswarningdupmap}} - -Ordinarily, \PDFTEX\ gives a warning when a duplicate map entry for a -given font is read, whatever the mechanism. However, sometimes it is -useful to include map information within the document, using -\type{\pdfmapfile} or \type{\pdfmapline}, even for fonts that happen to -be installed on the system. Then seeing the warnings on every run is -just noise, and can be suppressed by setting this parameter to a -positive number. \introduced{1.40.13} - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdftracingfonts} \Whatever{integer}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdftracingfonts}} - -This integer parameter specifies the level of verbosity for info about -expanded fonts given in the log, \eg\ when \type{\tracingoutput=1}. -If \type{\pdftracingfonts=0}, which is the default, the log shows the -actual non-zero signed expansion value for each expanded letter within -brackets, \eg: - -\starttyping -...\xivtt (+20) t -\stoptyping - -If \type{\pdftracingfonts=1}, also the name of the \TFM\ file is listed, -together with the font size, \eg: - -\starttyping -...\xivtt (cmtt10+20@14.0pt) t -\stoptyping - -Setting \type{\pdftracingfonts} to a value other than~0 or~1 is not -recommended, to allow future extensions. \introduced{1.30.0} - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfmovechars} \Whatever{integer}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfmovechars}} - -Since \PDFTEX\ version 1.30.0 the primitive \type{\pdfmovechars} is obsolete, -and its use merely leads to a warning. (This primitive specified whether -\PDFTEX\ should try to move characters in range 0..31 to higher slots; -its sole purpose was to remedy certain bugs of early \PDF\ viewers.) - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfpkmode} \Whatever{tokens}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfpkmode}} - -The \type{\pdfpkmode} is a token register that sets the \METAFONT\ mode for -pixel font generation. The contents of this register is dumped into the -format, so one can (optionally) preset it \eg\ in \type{pdftexconfig.tex}. -\introduced{1.30.0} - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfnoligatures} \Something{font}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfnoligatures}} - -This disables all ligatures in the loaded font \Something{font}. -\introduced{1.30.0} - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\tagcode} \Something{font} - \Something{8-bit number} \Whatever{integer}}} -\bookmark{\tex{tagcode}} - -This primitive accesses a character's \type{char_tag} info. It is meant -to delete \type{lig_tag} (the character's ligature/kerning program), -\type{list_tag} (which indicates that the character belongs to a chain of -ascending sizes) and/or \type{ext_tag} (which indicates that the character -is extensible), with the following options: assigning \type{-7} or smaller -clears all tags, \type{-6} clears \type{ext_tag} and \type{list_tag}, -\type{-5} clears \type{ext_tag} and \type{lig_tag}, \type{-4} clears -\type{ext_tag}, \type{-3} clears \type{list_tag} and \type{lig_tag}, -\type{-2} clears \type{list_tag}, \type{-1} clears \type{lig_tag}, -and \type{0} or larger does nothing. Changes are irreversible and global. - -Conversely, when queried, the primitive returns \type{0} if the tag's -value is \type{no_tag}, \type{1} if \type{lig_tag} is set, \type{2} if -\type{list_tag} is set or \type{4} (not~3) if \type{ext_tag} is set. - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfgentounicode} \Whatever{integer}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfgentounicode}} - -By default, \PDFTEX\ does not include a \type{/ToUnicode} resource when -including fonts in the output. Such a resource (also called a CMap -resource) maps glyph names to Unicode characters in a \PDF\ file. -Lacking such a resource, it is the \PDF\ reader which determines how and -whether searching in the \PDF\ file works. In practice, searching for -basic \ASCII\ characters generally works, but searching for anything -beyond those, including ligatures such as `fi', fails in some versions -of some \PDF\ browsers (most notably Adobe Reader). - -If \type{\pdfgentounicode} is set to \type{1} when the job ends, the -\type{/ToUnicode} resource will be included in the output, with mappings -for Type~1 fonts used in the documents. The mapping is created as -follows: for each glyph in the font, look for its \type{ToUnicode} value -in a global hash table. By default that global hash table is empty, in -which case \PDFTEX\ merely emits a warning. Entries are added to the -table using the following command: - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfglyphtounicode} \Something{general text} - \Something{general text}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfglyphtounicode}} - -The first argument is the name of a glyph, the second is a string of Unicode -numeric values denoting characters, separated by spaces. For instance: - -\starttyping -\pdfgentounicode=1 -\pdfglyphtounicode{ff}{0066 0066} -\stoptyping - -\noindent maps the \type{ff} ligature to a pair of \type{f}'s (whose -code is \type{U+0066}). - -Once a single \type{\pdfglyphtounicode} definition is made, whether it -is used or not, another feature comes into play: glyph names of the form -\type{uniXXXX} or \type{uXXXX} are mapped to the natural \type{U+XXXX}. -Many fonts use this style of naming. - -In addition, the \type{glyphtounicode.tex} file (distributed with -\PDFTEX\ and other software) contains thousands of such definitions, -covering most common glyph names. So, for practical purposes, one would -probably want: - -\starttyping -\input glyphtounicode -\pdfgentounicode=1 -\stoptyping - -\LATEX\ users could load the \type{cmap} package to achieve the same -effect. - - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfnobuiltintounicode} \Something{font}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfnobuiltintounicode}} - -The primary purpose of this command is to prevent \PDFTEX\ from -generating the \type{ToUnicode}/CMap resource for the given font when -\type{\pdfgentounicode=1}, most likely because the CMap resource is -already generated by some other method (for example, the \LATEX\ -\type{cmap} package uses \type{\pdffontattr} to generate a CMap -resource). - -Minimal example: -\starttyping -\font\f=cmb10 -\pdfnobuiltintounicode\f -\f No unicode mappings for this output. -\stoptyping -\introduced{1.40.11} - - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfinterwordspaceon}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfinterwordspaceon}} -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfinterwordspaceoff}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfinterwordspaceoff}} -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfspacefont} \Something{general text}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfspacefont}} - -The first two commands insert corresponding whatsit nodes which turn -on/off generation of faked interword spaces in the \PDF\ output (they -cause errors in \DVI\ output). This allows for better reflowing of text -on the fly by \PDF\ readers, better extraction of textual content, and -is required by \PDF/A. It does not affect the normal \TeX\ justification -with glue of the typeset output. - -This works roughly as follows: with \type{\pdfinterwordspaceon}, -\PDFTEX\ will guess when an interword space should be inserted, based on -movement within some limits in horizontal direction. When found, -\PDFTEX\ inserts a true space character into the \PDF\ page description -for the viewers, and adjusts the next movement so that the next -character will be in the expected position, according to normal \TEX\ -behavior. - -Where does that \quotation{true space character} come from? -There are two possibilities. - -\startitemize -\item If the current font has a real space character, it is used. -\PDFTEX\ considers a font to have such a space character if 1)~the font -has an encoding vector (\type{.enc} file) specified in its map entry, -and 2)~the encoding has a glyph named \type{space} (that is, the -PostScript name \type{/space}) at slot 32. For example, the font -\type{texnansi-lmr10} uses the encoding file \type{lm-texnansi.enc}, -which has such an entry. - -\item -If the current font does not have such a space character (this is the -case for most traditional \TEX\ fonts, such as \type{cmr10} and -\type{ec-lmr10}), \PDFTEX\ will use the space character from a special -fallback font named (by default) \type{pdftexspace}[\type{.tfm}]. -\PDFTEX\ automatically defines a map entry for this font which looks as -follows: - -\starttyping -\pdfmapline{=pdftexspace PdfTeX-Space <pdftexspace.pfb} -\stoptyping - -The \type{pdftexspace.tfm} and \type{pdftexspace.pfb} files are expected -to be available to \PDFTEX\ just like any other font. (They are -distributed with \PDFTEX.) The \type{pdftexspace} font was constructed -by hand; it has a space character that is .333em (and no other -characters). - -It is possible to use a different fallback font for the space character -by specifying \type{\pdfspacefont}\Lbrace \Something{somefont}\Rbrace. -(This is most likely to be useful for testing or debugging.) In this -case, \PDFTEX\ assumes that the given font has a real space character at -slot 32, and that any necessary corresponding map entry exists. For -example: - -\starttyping -\pdfspacefont{texnansi-lmr10} % use space char from this font if - % current font has no space char -\stoptyping -\stopitemize - -History: Before \PDFTEX\ version 1.40.25, no check was made for a -\type{space} character in the current font, the fallback font was named -\type{dummy-space}, and its space character was tiny, 0.001em. It turned -out that \PDF\ viewers were unhappy with this tiny space, especially -with tagged \PDF. - -Example of usage (see also the \type{fake-interword-space.tex} test file): - -\starttyping -Text with no interword spaces. - -\pdfglyphtounicode{space}{0020} -\pdfinterwordspaceon - -Switch to text with faked interword spaces. - -\pdfinterwordspaceoff - -Back to text with no interword spaces. -\stoptyping -\introducedplural{1.40.15, 1.40.25} - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdffakespace}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdffakespace}} - -Insert a faked interword space to the output, regardless of the value of -\type{\pdfinterwordspaceon} and \type{\pdfinterwordspaceoff}. Example: - -\starttyping -Text with no interword \pdffakespace\pdffakespace spaces. -\stoptyping -\introduced{1.40.15} - -%*********************************************************************** - -\subsection{Spacing} - -Controlling spacing before and after characters was introduced in -version 1.30, mostly to handle punctuation rules in different -languages. The \type{\...code} tables here, like those in the previous -section, operate globally, i.e., ignore \TeX's usual grouping, and apply -only to the given \Something{font}, not other instances of the -underlying font. - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfadjustinterwordglue} \Whatever{integer}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfadjustinterwordglue}} - -If positive, adjustment of interword glue is enabled and controlled by the -following three primitives. - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\knbscode} \Something{font} - \Something{8-bit number} \Whatever{integer}}} -\bookmark{\tex{knbscode}} - -The amount of space, in thousandths of an em, added to the natural width -of the glue following a character (the name stands for ``kern before -space'', although technically it is looking at glue items, not kern -items). This amounts is clipped to the range $-1000..1000$. For -instance, the following example means that glues after periods will be -increased by .2\,em. - -\starttyping -\pdfadjustinterwordglue=1 -\knsbcode\font`\.=200 -\stoptyping - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\stbscode} \Something{font} - \Something{8-bit number} \Whatever{integer}}} -\bookmark{\tex{stbscode}} - -This works like \type{\knbscode}, but applies to the stretch component of -the following glue. - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\shbscode} \Something{font} - \Something{8-bit number} \Whatever{integer}}} -\bookmark{\tex{shbscode}} - -Like \type{\stbscode}, but for the shrink component. - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfprependkern} \Whatever{integer}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfprependkern}} - -If positive, automatic insertion of kerns before characters is enabled. - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\knbccode} \Something{font} - \Something{8-bit number} \Whatever{integer}}} -\bookmark{\tex{knbccode}} - -The width of the kern, in thousandths of an em, inserted before a character. -It is clipped to the range $-1000..1000$. For instance, with the -following code, a .15\,em-kern will be inserted before all question marks -(useful for \eg\ French punctuation): - -\starttyping -\pdfprependkern=1 -\knbccode\font`\?=150 -\stoptyping - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfappendkern} \Whatever{integer}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfappendkern}} - -Same as \type{\pdfprependkern}, but for kerns inserted after characters. - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\knaccode} \Something{font} - \Something{8-bit number} \Whatever{integer}}} -\bookmark{\tex{knaccode}} - -Same as \type{\knbccode}, except the kern is inserted after the -character. Such a kern is required for instance after a left guillemet -in French punctuation. - -%*********************************************************************** - -\subsection{Vertical adjustments} - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfignoreddimen} \Whatever{dimen}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfignoreddimen}} - -This is the dimension which must assigned to the following four primitives -so they are ignored. Default is \type{-1000pt}, and it should be modified -with care since it also influences when a previous paragraph's depth is ignored -(for instance, the plain \TEX\ macro \type{\nointerlineskip} should be -modified accordingly). - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdffirstlineheight} \Whatever{dimen}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdffirstlineheight}} - -This parameter specifies the height of the first line of a paragraph, -regardless of its content. It is read when the paragraph builder is -called, and ignored when set to \type{\pdfignoreddimen}. By default, -it is set to \type{-1000pt}, so it is ignored as long as the value -of \type{\pdfignoreddimen} is the same. - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdflastlinedepth} \Whatever{dimen}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdflastlinedepth}} - -This is similar to the previous parameter, but affects the last line's -depth of a paragraph. - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfeachlineheight} \Whatever{dimen}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfeachlineheight}} - -Similar to \type{\pdffirstlineheight}, but for all lines of a paragraph, -including the first one, unless \type{\pdffirstlineheight} is specified. - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfeachlinedepth} \Whatever{dimen}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfeachlinedepth}} - -Like the preceding parameter, but for depth. - -%*********************************************************************** - -\subsection{\PDF\ objects} - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfobj} \Something{object type spec} - \Modelist{h, v, m}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfobj}} - -This command creates a raw \PDF\ object that is written to the \PDF\ -file as \type{1 0 obj} \unknown\ \type{endobj}. The object is written to -\PDF\ output as provided by the user. When \Something{object type spec} -is not given, \PDFTEX\ no longer creates a dictionary object with -contents \Something{general text}, as it did in the past. - -When, however, \Something{object type spec} is given as \Something{attr -spec} \Literal{stream}, the object will be created as a stream with -contents \Something{general text} and additional attributes in -\Something{attr spec}\unkern. - -When \Something{object type spec} is given as \Something{attr spec} -\Literal{file}, then the \Something{general text} will be treated as a file -name and its contents will be copied into the stream contents. - -When \Something{object type spec} is given as \type{reserveobjnum}, -just a new object number is reserved. The number of the reserved object -is accessible via \type{\pdflastobj}. The object can later be filled -with contents by \Syntax{\Tex{\pdfobj} \Literal{useobjnum} -\Something{number} \Lbrace\Something{balanced text}\Rbrace}. -But the reserved object number can already be used before by other -objects, which provides a forward||referencing mechanism. - -The object is kept in memory and will be written to the \PDF\ output only -when its number is referred to by \type{\pdfrefobj} or when \type{\pdfobj} -is preceded by \type{\immediate}. Nothing is appended to the list being -built. The number of the most recently created object is accessible via -\type{\pdflastobj}. - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdflastobj} \Whatever{read||only integer}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdflastobj}} - -This command returns the object number of the last object created by \type -{\pdfobj}. - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfrefobj} \Something{object number} - \Modelist{h, v, m}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfrefobj}} - -This command appends a whatsit node to the list being built. When the whatsit -node is searched at shipout time, \PDFTEX\ will write the object -\Something{object number} -to the \PDF\ output if it has not been written yet. - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfretval} \Whatever{read||only integer}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfretval}} - -Set to $-1$ if \type{\pdfobj} ignores an invalid object number. Perhaps -this will be used to store the error status of other primitives in the -future. - - -%*********************************************************************** - -\subsection{Page and pages objects} - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfpagesattr} \Whatever{tokens}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfpagesattr}} - -\PDFTEX\ expands this token list when it finishes the \PDF\ output and -adds the resulting character stream to the root \type{Pages} -object. When defined, these are applied to all pages in the -document. Some examples of attributes are \type{/CropBox}, the rectangle -specifying the region of the page being displayed and printed, and -\type{/Rotate}, the number of degrees (in multiples of 90) the page -should be rotated clockwise when it is displayed or printed. - -% /MediaBox is not a good example, since will never take effect - -\starttyping -\pdfpagesattr - { /Rotate 90 % rotate all pages by 90 degrees - /CropBox [0 0 612 792] } % the crop size of all pages (in bp) -\stoptyping - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfpageattr} \Whatever{tokens}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfpageattr}} - -This is similar to \type{\pdfpagesattr}, but has priority over it. -It can be used to override any attribute given by \type{\pdfpagesattr} -for an individual page. The token list is expanded when \PDFTEX\ ships out -a page. The contents are added to the attributes of the current page. - -If the \type{\pdfpageattr} value contains the string \type{/MediaBox}, -then \PDFTEX\ omits outputting its own \type{/MediaBox} value (which is -\type{[0 0 }\Something{\it page\_width} \Something{\it -page\_height}\type{]}). (This behavior was introduced in version -1.40.18.) - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfpageresources} \Whatever{tokens}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfpageresources}} - -These tokens are added to the resource dictionary for all pages, before -the font, XOBject, and ProcSet resources. - -\starttyping -\pdfpageresources{/MyPageResourceAttribute /MyValue} -\stoptyping - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfpageref} \Something{page number} - \Whatever{expandable}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfpageref}} - -This primitive expands to the number of the page object that contains -the dictionary for page \Something{page number}. If the page -\Something{page number} does not exist, a warning will be issued, -a fresh unused \PDF\ object will be generated, and \type{\pdfpageref} -will expand to that object number. - -\Eg, if the dictionary for page~5 of the \TEX\ document is contained in -\PDF\ object no.~18, \tex{pdfpageref5} expands to the number 18. - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfomitprocset} \Whatever{integer}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfomitprocset}} - -If this primitive parameter is zero (the default), the \type{/ProcSet} -array is included if \type{\pdfmajorversion} is~1, and omitted if -\type{\pdfmajorversion}$\,\ge\,2$. If this parameter is $>0$, -\type{/ProcSet} is always omitted. And if it is $<0$, \type{/ProcSet} is -always included. For information about what \type{/ProcSet} is, see the -\PDFReference\ or other documentation. - -\type{\ProcSet} was considered obsolete as of \PDF~1.4, but conforming -writers should continue to output it. It was formally deprecated in -\PDF~2.0.\introduced{1.40.25} - -%*********************************************************************** - -\subsection{Form XObjects} - -The next three primitives support a \PDF\ feature called \quote {object -reuse} in \PDFTEX. The idea is first to create a `form XObject' in -\PDF. The content of this object corresponds to the content of a \TEX\ -box; it can contain pictures and references to other form XObjects -as well. After creation, the form XObject can be used multiple times -by simply referring to its object number. This feature can be useful -for large documents with many similar elements, as it can reduce the -duplication of identical objects. - -These commands behave similarly to \type{\pdfobj}, \type{\pdfrefobj} -and \type{\pdflastobj}, but instead of taking raw \PDF\ code, they handle -text typeset by \TEX. - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfxform} \Optional{\Something{attr spec}} - \Optional{\Something{resources spec}} \Something{box number} - \Modelist{h, v, m}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfxform}} - -This command creates a form XObject corresponding to the contents of the -box \Something{box number}. The box can contain other raw objects, form -XObjects, or images as well. It can however {\em not} contain annotations -because they are laid out on a separate layer, are positioned absolutely, -and have dedicated housekeeping. \type{\pdfxform} makes the box void, -as \type{\box} does. - -When \Something{attr spec} is given, the text will be written -as additional attribute into the form XObject dictionary. The -\Something{resources spec} is similar, but the text will be added -to the resources dictionary of the form XObject. The text given by -\Something{attr spec} or \Something{resources spec} is written before -other entries of the form dictionary and|/|or the resources dictionary -and takes priority over later ones. - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfrefxform} \Something{object number} - \Modelist{h, v, m}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfrefxform}} - -The form XObject is kept in memory and will be written to the \PDF\ -output only when its object number is referred to by \type{\pdfrefxform} -or when \type{\pdfxform} is preceded by \type{\immediate}. Nothing is -appended to the list being built. The number of the most recently created -form XObject is accessible via \type{\pdflastxform}. - -When issued, \type{\pdfrefxform} appends a whatsit node to the list being -built. When the whatsit node is searched at shipout time, \PDFTEX\ will -write the form \Something{object number} to the \PDF\ output if it is -not written yet. - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdflastxform} \Whatever{read||only integer}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdflastxform}} - -The object number of the most recently created form XObject is accessible -via \type{\pdflastxform}. - -As said, this feature can be used for reusing information. This mechanism -also plays a role in typesetting fill||in forms. Such widgets sometimes -depends on visuals that show up on user request, but are hidden otherwise. - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfxformname} \Something{object number} - \Whatever{expandable}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfxformname}} - -In \PDF\ files produced by \PDFTEX\ one can recognize a form Xobject by -the prefix~\type{/Fm} followed by a number, for instance \type{/Fm2}. -For a given form XObject number, this primitive expands to the number in -the corresponding form XObject name. \Eg, if \type{/Fm2} corresponds to -some form XObject with object number 7, the \type{\pdfxformname7} -expands to the number~\type{2}. \introduced{1.30.0} - -%*********************************************************************** - -\subsection{Graphics inclusion} - -\PDF\ provides a mechanism for embedding graphic and textual objects: form -XObjects. In \PDFTEX\ this mechanism is accessed by means of \type{\pdfxform}, -\type{\pdflastxform} and \type{\pdfrefxform}. A special kind of XObjects -are bitmap graphics and for manipulating them similar commands are provided. - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfximage} - \Optional{\Something{rule spec}} - \Optional{\Something{attr spec}} - \Optional{\Something{page spec}} - \Optional{\Something{colorspace spec}} - \Optional{\Something{pdf box spec}} - \Something{general text} - \Modelist{h, v, m} -}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfximage}} - -This command creates an image object. The dimensions of the image can be -controlled via \Something{rule spec}\unkern. The default values are zero -for depth and \quote {running} for height and width. If all of them are -given, the image will be scaled to fit the specified values. If some -(but not all) are given, the rest will be set to a value corresponding -to the remaining ones so as to make the image size to yield the same -proportion of $width : (height+depth)$ as the original image size, where -depth is treated as zero. If none are given then the image will take its -natural size. - -An image inserted at its natural size often has a resolution of \type -{\pdfimageresolution} (see below) given in dots per inch in the output -file, but some images may contain data specifying the image resolution, -and in such a case the image will be scaled to the correct -resolution. The dimensions of an image can be accessed by enclosing the -\type{\pdfrefximage} command to a box and checking the dimensions of the -box: - -\starttyping -\setbox0=\hbox{\pdfximage{somefile.png}\pdfrefximage\pdflastximage} -\stoptyping - -Now we can use \type{\wd0} and \type{\ht0} to question the natural size of -the image as determined by \PDFTEX. When dimensions are specified before the -\type{{somefile.png}}, the graphic is scaled to fit these. Note that, unlike -\eg\ the original \type{\input} primitive, the filename is supplied between -braces. - -The image type is specified by the extension of the given file name: -\type{.png} stands for \PNG\ image, \type{.jpg} (or \type{.jpeg}) for -\JPEG, \type{.jbig2} (preferred, but \type{.jb2} works also) for \JBIGTWO, -and \type{.pdf} for \PDF\ file. But once \PDFTEX\ has opened the file, -it checks the file type first by looking to the magic number at the -file start, which gets precedence over the file name extension. This -gives a certain degree of fault tolerance, if the file name extension -is stated wrongly. - -Similarly to \type{\pdfxform}, the optional text given by \Something{attr -spec} will be written as additional attributes of the image before -other keys of the image dictionary. One should be aware, that slightly -different type of \PDF\ object is created while including \PNG, \JPEG, -or \JBIG2\ bitmaps and \PDF\ images. - -While working with \PDF\ or \JBIG2\ images, \Something{page spec} -allows to decide which page of the document is to be included; -the \Something{page spec} is irrelevant for the other two image -formats. Starting with \PDFTEX\ 1.11 one may also decide in the \PDF\ -image case, which page box of the image is to be treated as a final -bounding box. If \Something{pdf box spec} is present, it overrides the -default behavior specified by the \type{\pdfpagebox} parameter, and is -overridden by the (obsolete) \type{\pdfforcepagebox} parameter. This -option is irrelevant for non||\PDF\ inclusions. - -Starting with \PDFTEX\ 1.21, \type{\pdfximage} command supports -\type{colorspace} keyword followed by an object number (user||defined -colorspace for the image being included). This feature works for \JPEG\ -images only. \PNG s are \RGB\ palettes, \JBIG2 s are bitonal, and \PDF\ -images have always self||contained color space information. - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfrefximage} \Something{object number}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfrefximage}} - -The image is kept in memory and will be written to the \PDF\ output only when -its number is referred to by \type{\pdfrefximage} or \type{\pdfximage} is -preceded by \type{\immediate}. Nothing is appended to the list being built. - -\type{\pdfrefximage} appends a whatsit node to the list being built. When -the whatsit node is searched at shipout time, \PDFTEX\ will write the image -with number \Something{object number} to the \PDF\ output if it has not been -written yet. - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdflastximage} \Whatever{read||only integer}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdflastximage}} - -The number of the most recently created XObject image is accessible via \type -{\pdflastximage}. - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfximagebbox} \Something{integer} - \Something{integer} \Whatever{expandable}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfximagebbox}} - -The dimensions of the bounding box of a \PDF\ image loaded with -\type{\pdfximage} are stored in a table. This primitive returns those -dimensions as follows: - -\starttyping -\pdfximage{afile.pdf} -\pdfximagebbox\pdflastximage 1 % Returns lower-left x -\pdfximagebbox\pdflastximage 2 % Returns lower-left y -\pdfximagebbox\pdflastximage 3 % Returns upper-right x -\pdfximagebbox\pdflastximage 4 % Returns upper-right y -\stoptyping - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdflastximagecolordepth} - \Whatever{read||only integer}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdflastximagecolordepth}} - -The color depth (\type{1} for 1-bit images, \type{2} for 2-bit images, -and so on) of the last image accessed with \type{\pdfximage}. - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdflastximagepages} - \Whatever{read||only integer}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdflastximagepages}} - -This read||only register returns the highest page number from a file -previously accessed via the \type{\pdfximage} command. -This is useful only for \PDF\ files; it always returns \type{1} -for \PNG, \JPEG, or \JBIGTWO\ files. - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfimageresolution} \Whatever{integer}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfimageresolution}} - -The integer \type{\pdfimageresolution} parameter (unit: dots per -inch, dpi) is a last resort value, used only for bitmap (\JPEG, \PNG, -\JBIGTWO) images, but not for \PDF{}s. The priorities are as follows: -Often one image dimension (\type{width} or \type{height}) is stated -explicitly in the \TEX\ file. Then the image is properly scaled so -that the aspect ratio is kept. If both image dimensions are given, -the image will be stretched accordingly, whereby the aspect ratio might -get distorted. Only if no image dimension is given in the \TEX\ file, -the image size will be calculated from its width and height in pixels, -using the $x$ and $y$ resolution values normally contained in the image -file. If one of these resolution values is missing or weird (either -$<$~0 or $>$~65535), the \type{\pdfimageresolution} value will be used -for both $x$ and $y$ resolution, when calculating the image size. And -if the \type{\pdfimageresolution} is zero, finally a default resolution -of 72\,dpi would be taken. The \type{\pdfimageresolution} is read when -\PDFTEX\ creates an image via \type{\pdfximage}. The given value is -clipped to the range $0..65535$\,(dpi). - -Currently this parameter is used particularly for calculating the -dimensions of \JPEG\ images in \EXIF\ format (unless at least one -dimension is stated explicitly); the resolution values coming with -\EXIF\ files are currently ignored. - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfpagebox} \Whatever{integer}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfpagebox}} - -When \PDF\ files are included, the command \type{\pdfximage} allows the -selection of which \PDF\ page box to use in the optional field -\Something{image attr spec}\unkern. If the option isn't present, the -page box defaults to the value of \type{\pdfpagebox} as follows: -(1)~media box, (2)~crop box, (3)~bleed box, (4)~trim box, and -(5)~artbox. - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfforcepagebox} \Whatever{integer}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfforcepagebox}} - -%- It is now possible to specify the pdf page box to use when including pdfs. -% The syntax has been extended: -% \pdfximage [<image attr spec>] <general text> (h, v, m) -% <image attr spec> --> [<rule spec>] [<attr spec>] [<page spec>] [<pdf box spec>] -% <pdf box spec> --> mediabox|cropbox|bleedbox|trimbox|artbox -% The default is cropbox (which defaults to mediabox), to be compatible with -% previous versions of pdfTeX. -% The page box specified at \pdfximage can be globally overridden with the -% config parameter always_use_pdfpagebox and the command -% \pdfoptionalwaysusepdfpagebox <integer>, where 0 is the default (use -% whatever is specified with \pdfximage), 1 is media, 2 is crop, 3 is -% bleed, 4 is trim and 5 is artbox. This can only be set once per -% object, i.\,e.\ the value used at \pdfximage is remembered. -% See the PDF Reference for an explanation of the boxes. - -The integer primitive \type{\pdfforcepagebox} allows globally -overriding the choice of the page box used with \type{\pdfximage}. It -takes the same values as \type{\pdfpagebox}. The command is available -starting with \PDFTEX\ 1.30.0, as a shortened synonym of obsolete -\type{\pdfoptionalwaysusepdfpagebox} instruction, but is itself -now considered obsolete --- a mixture of \type{\pdfpagebox} and -\Something{image attr spec} is better. - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfinclusionerrorlevel} \Whatever{integer}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfinclusionerrorlevel}} - -This controls the behavior of \PDFTEX\ when a \PDF\ file is included -which has a newer \PDF\ version than the one specified by -\type{\pdfmajorversion} and \type{\pdfminorversion}. If -\type{\pdfinclusionerrorlevel} is set to~0 (the default), \PDFTEX\ gives -only a warning; if 1, \PDFTEX\ raises an error; if negative, no -diagnostic at all is given. - -It was originally a shortened synonym of -\type{\pdfoptionpdfinclusionerrorlevel}, which is now obsolete. -\introduced{1.30.0} - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfimagehicolor} \Whatever{integer}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfimagehicolor}} - -This parameter, when set to~1, enables embedding of \PNG\ images with -16~bit wide color channels at their full color resolution. This -embedding mode is defined only from \PDF\ version~1.5 onwards, so the -\type{\pdfimagehicolor} functionality is automatically disabled in -\PDFTEX\ if \type{\pdfminorversion}$\,<\,$5 and -\type{\pdfmajorversion}$\,=\,$1; in this case, each 16~bit color channel -is reduced to a width of 8~bits by stripping the lower 8~bits before -embedding. The same stripping happens when \type{\pdfimagehicolor} is -set to~0. If \type{\pdfmajorversion}$\,=\,$1 and -\type{\pdfminorversion}$\,\ge\,$5, or \type{\pdfmajorversion}$\,\ge\,$2, -the default value of \type{\pdfimagehicolor} is~1. If specified, the -parameter must appear before any data is written to the \PDF\ output. -\introduced{1.30.0} - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfimageapplygamma} \Whatever{integer}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfimageapplygamma}} - -This primitive, when set to~1, enables gamma correction while embedding -\PNG\ images, taking the value of the primitive \type{\pdfgamma} as -well as the gamma value embedded in the \PNG\ image into account. When -\type{\pdfimageapplygamma} is set to~0, no gamma correction is -performed. If specified, the parameter must appear before any data is -written to the \PDF\ output. \introduced{1.30.0} - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfgamma} \Whatever{integer}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfgamma}} - -This primitive defines the `device gamma' for \PDFTEX. Values are in -promilles (same as \type{\mag}). The default value of this primitive -is~1000, defining a device gamma value of~1.0. - -If \type{\pdfimageapplygamma} is set to~1, then whenever a \PNG\ image -is included, \PDFTEX\ applies a gamma correction. This correction is -based on the value of the \type{\pdfgamma} primitive and the `assumed -device gamma' that is derived from the value embedded in the actual -image. If no embedded value can be found in the \PNG\ image, then the -value of \type{\pdfimagegamma} is used instead. -If specified, the parameter must appear before any data is written to the -\PDF\ output. -\introduced{1.30.0} - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfimagegamma} \Whatever{integer}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfimagegamma}} - -This primitive gives a default `assumed gamma' value for \PNG\ images. -Values are in promilles (same as for \type{\pdfamma}). The default value -of this primitive is~2200, implying an assumed gamma value of~2.2. - -When \PDFTEX\ is applying gamma corrections, images that do not have an -embedded `assumed gamma' value are assumed to have been created for -a device with a gamma of 2.2. Experiments show that this default setting -is correct for a large number of images; however, if your images come -out too dark, you probably want to set \type{\pdfimagegamma} to a lower -value, like~1000. -If specified, the parameter must appear before any data is written to the -\PDF\ output. -\introduced{1.30.0} - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfpxdimen} \Whatever{dimen}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfpxdimen}} - -While working with bitmap graphics or typesetting electronic documents, -it might be convenient to base dimensions on pixels rather than \TeX's -standard units like \type{pt} or \type{em}. For this purpose, \PDFTEX\ -provides an extra unit called \type{px} that takes the dimension given to -the \type{\pdfpxdimen} primitive. In example, to make the unit \type{px} -corresponding to 96\,dpi pixel density (then 1\,px~=~72/96\,bp), one -can do the following calculation: - -\starttyping -\pdfpxdimen=1in % 1 dpi -\divide\pdfpxdimen by 96 % 96 dpi -\hsize=1200px -\stoptyping - -Then \type{\hsize} amounts to 1200~pixels in 96\,dpi, which is -exactly 903.375\,pt (but \TeX\ rounds it to 903.36914\,pt). The -default value of \type{\pdfpxdimen} is 1\,bp, corresponding to a pixel -density of 72\,dpi. This primitive is completely independent from the -\type{\pdfimageresolution} and \type{\pdfpkresolution} parameters. -\introduced{1.30.0} It used to be an integer register that gave -the dimension 1\,px as number of scaled points, defaulting to 65536 -(1\,px equal to 65536\,sp~$=$~1\,pt). Starting with \PDFTEX\ 1.40.0, -\type{\pdfpxdimen} is now a real dimension parameter. - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfinclusioncopyfonts} \Whatever{integer}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfinclusioncopyfonts}} - -If positive, this parameter forces \PDFTEX\ to include fonts from a \PDF\ -file loaded with \type{\pdfximage}, even if those fonts are available on -disk. Bigger files might be created, but included \PDF\ files are sure to -be embedded with the adequate fonts; indeed, the fonts on disk might be -different from the embedded ones, and glyphs might be missing. - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfsuppresswarningpagegroup} - \Whatever{integer}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfsuppresswarningpagegroup}} - -Ordinarily, \PDFTEX\ gives a warning when more than one included \PDF\ -file has a so-called ``page group object'' (\type{/Group}), because only -one can ``win'' --- that is, be propagated to the page level. Usually -the page groups are identical, but when they are not, the result is -unpredictable. It would be ideal if \PDFTEX\ in fact detected whether -the page groups were the same and only gave the warning in the -problematic case; unfortunately, this is not easy (a patch would be -welcome). Nevertheless, often one observes that there is no actual -problem. Then seeing the warnings on every run is just noise, and can -be suppressed by setting this parameter to a positive number. -\introduced{1.40.15} - -%*********************************************************************** - -\subsection{Annotations} - -\PDF\ 1.4 provides four basic kinds of annotations: - -\startitemize[packed] -\item hyperlinks, general navigation -\item text clips (notes) -\item movies -\item sound fragments -\stopitemize - -The first type differs from the other three in that there is a designated -area involved on which one can click, or when moved over some action occurs. -\PDFTEX\ is able to calculate this area, as we will see later. All -annotations can be supported using the next two general annotation -primitives. - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfannot} \Something{annot type spec} - \Modelist{h, v, m}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfannot}} - -This command appends a whatsit node corresponding to an annotation to -the list being built. The dimensions of the annotation can be controlled -via the \Something{rule spec}. The default values are running for all -width, height and depth. When an annotation is written out, running -dimensions will take the corresponding values from the box containing -the whatsit node representing the annotation. The \Something{general -text} is inserted as raw \PDF\ code to the contents of annotation. The -annotation is written out only if the corresponding whatsit node is -searched at shipout time. - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdflastannot} \Whatever{read||only integer}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdflastannot}} - -This primitive returns the object number of the last annotation created by -\type{\pdfannot}. These two primitives allow users to create any annotation -that cannot be created by \type{\pdfstartlink} (see below). - -%*********************************************************************** - -\subsection[linking]{Destinations and links} - -The first type of annotation, mentioned above, is implemented by three -primitives. The first one is used to define a specific location as being -referred to. This location is tied to the page, not the exact location on the -page. The main reason for this is that \PDF\ maintains a dedicated list of -these annotations |<|and some more when optimized|>| for the sole purpose of -speed. - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfdest} \Something{dest spec} - \Modelist{h, v, m}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfdest}} - -This primitive appends a whatsit node which establishes a destination -for links and bookmark outlines; the link is identified by either -a number or a symbolic name, and the way the viewer is to display the -page must be specified in \Something{dest type}\unkern, which must be -one of those mentioned in \in{table}[appearance]. If \Literal{struct} -\Something{number} is used, a structure destination is created instead of a -regular destination, referring to the structure element defined in object -\Something{number}. Structure destinations use a separate namespace and -therefore may have the same identifiers as a regular destination. - -\startbuffer -\starttabulate[|l|l|] -\HL -\NC \bf keyword \NC \bf meaning \NC\NR -\HL -\NC \tt fit \NC fit the page in the window \NC\NR -\NC \tt fith \NC fit the width of the page \NC\NR -\NC \tt fitv \NC fit the height of the page \NC\NR -\NC \tt fitb \NC fit the \quote{Bounding Box} of the page \NC\NR -\NC \tt fitbh \NC fit the width of \quote{Bounding Box} of the page \NC\NR -\NC \tt fitbv \NC fit the height of \quote{Bounding Box} of the page \NC\NR -\NC \tt xyz \NC goto the current position (see below) \NC\NR -\HL -\stoptabulate -\stopbuffer - -\placetable - [here][appearance] - {Options for display of outline and destinations.} - {\getbuffer} - -The specification \Literal{xyz} can optionally be followed by \Literal -{zoom} \Something{integer} to provide a fixed zoom||in. The \Something -{integer} is processed like \TEX\ magnification, i.\,e.\ 1000 is the -normal page view. When \Literal{zoom} \Something{integer} is given, -the zoom factor changes to 0.001 of the \Something{integer} value, -otherwise the current zoom factor is kept unchanged. - -The destination is written out only if the corresponding whatsit node is -searched at shipout time. - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfstartlink} - \Optional{\Something{rule spec}} - \Optional{\Something{attr spec}} - \Something{action spec} - \Modelist{h, m} -}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfstartlink}} - -This primitive is used along with \type{\pdfendlink} and appends -a whatsit node corresponding to the start of a hyperlink. The whatsit -node representing the end of the hyperlink is created by -\type{\pdfendlink}. The dimensions of the link are handled in the -similar way as in \type{\pdfannot}. Both \type{\pdfstartlink} and -\type{\pdfendlink} must be in the same level of box nesting. A hyperlink -with running width can be multi||line or even multi||page, in which case -all horizontal boxes with the same nesting level as the boxes containing -\type{\pdfstartlink} and \type{\pdfendlink} will be treated as part of -the hyperlink. The hyperlink is written out only if the corresponding -whatsit node is searched at shipout time. - -Additional attributes, which are explained in great detail in the -\PDFReference, can be given via \Something{attr spec}\unkern. Typically, -the attributes specify the color and thickness of any border around -the link. Thus \typ {/C [0.9 0 0] /Border [0 0 2]} specifies a color -(in \RGB) of dark red, and a border thickness of 2~points. - -While all graphics and text in a \PDF\ document have relative positions, -annotations have internally hard||coded absolute positions. Again this -is for the sake of speed optimization. The main disadvantage is that these -annotations do {\em not} obey transformations issued by \type -{\pdfliteral}s. - -The \Something{action spec} specifies the action that should be -performed when the hyperlink is activated, one of (see the syntax -rules) \Literal{user} \Something{user-action spec}, -\Literal{goto} \Something{goto-action spec}, -\Literal{thread} \Something{thread-action spec}. - -\startitemize - -\item A \Something{user-action spec} (\type{user {...}}) performs a -user||defined action. Examples: a \URL, like -\typ {/S /URI /URI (https://tug.org/)}; -or a named action, like \typ {/S /Named /N /NextPage}. - -\item A \Something{goto-action spec} (\type{goto ...}) performs various goto -actions, and is by far the most complex action. Here is a copy of the -syntax, for easier reference: - -\Syntax{ -\Something{goto-action spec} \Means % - \Optional{\Something{goto-action struct spec}} \Something{numid} - \Or \Next \Optional{\Something{file spec}} \Optional{\Something{goto-action struct spec}} \Something{nameid} - \Or \Next \Optional{\Something{file spec}} \Optional{\Something{goto-action struct spec}} \Optional{\Something{page spec}} \Something{general text} - \Or \Next \Something{file spec} \Optional{\Something{goto-action struct spec}} \Something{nameid} \Something{newwindow spec} - \Or \Next \Something{file spec} \Optional{\Something{goto-action struct spec}} \Optional{\Something{page spec}} \Something{general text} \Something{newwindow spec} -} - -\startitemize - -\item The \Something {numid} and \Something{nameid} alternatives specify a -destination identifier. - -\item The \Something{page spec} alternative specifies a page number for the -destination. In this case, the zoom factor is given by -\Something{general text}\unkern. - -\item The default behavior of the \Something{newwindow -spec} depends on the browser setting. - -\item A destination in another \PDF\ file can be specified with -\Something{file spec}\unkern, in which case \Something{newwindow spec} -specifies whether the file should be opened in a new window. A -\Something{file spec} can be either a \type{(string)} or a -\type{<<}\type{dictionary}\type{>>}. - -\item If a \Something{goto-action spec} contains a -\Something{goto-action struct spec}, then a structure destination is -referenced in addition to the regular destination. The form with -\Something{general text} is used if and only if a \Something{file spec} -is present; then the \Something{general text} should expand to a literal -\PDF\ dictionary describing a structure destination. Otherwise, the -\Something{numid} or \Something{nameid} directly after the -\Literal{struct} keyword identify a destination which must have been -created with \type{\pdfdest} \Literal{struct}\unskip. - -\stopitemize - -\item A \Something{thread-action spec} (\type{thread ...}) performs -article thread reading. The thread identifier, \Something{numid} or -\Something{nameid}, is similar to the destination identifier. A thread -can be performed in another \PDF\ file by specifying a \Something{file -spec}\unkern. - -\stopitemize - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfendlink} \Modelist{h, m}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfendlink}} - -This primitive ends a link started with \type{\pdfstartlink}. All text -between \type{\pdfstartlink} and \type{\pdfendlink} will be treated as part -of this link. \PDFTEX\ may break the result across lines (or pages), in which -case it will make several links with the same content. - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdflastlink} \Whatever{read||only integer}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdflastlink}} - -This primitive returns the object number of the last link created by -\type{\pdfstartlink} (analogous to \type{\pdflastannot}). -\introduced{1.40.0} - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdflinkmargin} \Whatever{dimen}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdflinkmargin}} - -This dimension parameter specifies the margin of the box representing -a hyperlink and is read when a page containing hyperlinks is shipped out. - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfdestmargin} \Whatever{dimen}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfdestmargin}} - -Margin added to the dimensions of the rectangle around the destinations. - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfsuppresswarningdupdest} \Whatever{integer}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfsuppresswarningdupdest}} - -Ordinarily, \PDFTEX\ gives a warning when the same destination is used -more than once. However, due to problematic macro packages, sometimes a -document may end up producing the warning through no fault of its own, -and fixing the macros may well not be trivial. Then seeing the warnings -on every run is just noise, and can be suppressed by setting this -parameter to a positive number. \introduced{1.40.13} - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfrunninglinkoff}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfrunninglinkoff}} -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfrunninglinkon}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfrunninglinkon}} - -These commands create corresponding whatsit nodes which turn off/on -generation of running links. Their typical usage is to turn off -generation of running links in the header or footer of a page. -Generation of running links is on when the shipout routine begins. - -The generation of running links works roughly like this: \PDFTEX\ keeps -a stack of links created by \type{\pdfstartlink}, called -\type{pdf_link_stack}. When writing out an hbox to \PDF, \PDFTEX\ checks -if the nesting level of the box is the same as the nesting level of the -top entry in \type{pdf_link_stack}; if yes that box would become a link, -too. - -The whatsit nodes created by the above primitives turn off/on a flag -which controls if a hbox being shipped can become a link, in addition to -the previous condition. - -Thus, the commands must be inserted before the hbox in question. For example: - -\starttyping -% (1) good: -\hbox{\pdfrunninglinkoff - \hbox{this is a line that would become a link otherwise} -} - -% (2) bad: -\hbox{\pdfrunninglinkoff this is a line that would become a link} -% too late; \pdfrunninglinkoff must be inserted before the box -\stoptyping - -%*********************************************************************** - -\subsection{Bookmarks} - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfoutline} - \Optional{\Something{attr spec}} - \Something{action spec} - \Optional{\Literal{count} \Something{integer}} - \Something{general text} - \Modelist{h, v, m} -}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfoutline}} - -This primitive creates an outline (or bookmark) entry. The first parameter -specifies the action to be taken, and is the same as that allowed for \type -{\pdfstartlink}. The \Something{count} specifies the number of direct -subentries under this entry; specify~0 or omit it if this entry has no -subentries. If the number is negative, then all subentries will be closed and -the absolute value of this number specifies the number of subentries. The -\Something{text} is what will be shown in the outline window. Note that this -is limited to characters in the \PDF\ Document Encoding vector. The outline -is written to the \PDF\ output immediately. - -%*********************************************************************** - -\subsection{Article threads} - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfthread} \Optional{\Something{rule spec}} - \Optional{\Something{attr spec}} \Something{id spec} \Modelist{h, v, m}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfthread}} - -Defines a bead within an article thread. Thread beads with same -identifiers (spread across the document) will be joined together. - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdftstartthread} - \Optional{\Something{rule spec}} - \Optional{\Something{attr spec}} - \Something{id spec} \Modelist{v, m}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfstartthread}} - -This uses the same syntax as \type{\pdfthread}, apart that it must be -followed by a \type{\pdfendthread}. \type{\pdfstartthread} and the -corresponding \type{\pdfendthread} must end up in vboxes with the same -nesting level; all vboxes between them will be added into the thread. -Note that during output runtime if there are other newly created -boxes which have the same nesting level as the vbox/vboxes containing -\type{\pdfstartthread} and \type{\pdfendthread}, they will be also added -into the thread, which is probably not what you want. To avoid such -unconsidered behavior, it's often enough to wrap boxes that shouldn't -belong to the thread by a box to change their box nesting level. - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfendthread} \Modelist{v, m}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfendthread}} - -This ends an article thread started before by \type{\pdfstartthread}. - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfthreadmargin} \Whatever{dimen}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfthreadmargin}} - -Specifies a margin to be added to the dimensions of a bead within -an article thread. - -%*********************************************************************** - -\subsection{Literals and specials} - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfliteral} - \Optional{\Literal{shipout}} - \Optional{\Literal{direct} \Or \Literal{page}} - \Something{general text} - \Modelist{h, v, m} - }} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfliteral}} - -Analogous to \type{\special} in the original \TEX, this command inserts -raw \PDF\ code into the output, appending a whatsit node to the list -being built. This allows support of color and text transformation, among -other things. - -By default, \Something{general text} is expanded immediately, when the -whatsit node is created, as with \type{\special}. Starting with version -1.40.25, the optional keyword \Literal{shipout} can be used to delay -expansion of \Something{general text} until the whatsit node is shipped -out, as with non-\type{\immediate} \type{\write}. - -Normally, \PDFTEX\ ends a text section in the \PDF\ output and sets the -transformation matrix to the current location on the page before -inserting \Something{general text}\unkern; this can be turned off by -giving the optional keyword \Literal{direct}. - -Starting with version 1.30.0, \PDFTEX\ supports the keyword \type{page} -in addition to \type{direct}. Both modify the default behavior of -\type{\pdfliteral}, avoiding translation of the coordinate space before -inserting the literal code. The difference is that the \type{page} -keyword instructs \PDFTEX\ to close a \type{BT ET} text block before -inserting anything. This means that the literal code inserted refers to -the \PDF\ origin (lower-left corner of the page) and can be safely -enclosed with \type{q Q}. In contrast, using \type{q Q} operators inside -\type{\pdfliteral} with the \type{direct} keyword will produce corrupted -\PDF\ output, as the \PDF\ standard doesn't allow doing anything like -this within a \type{BT ET} block. - -% HE: \unkern is a kludge here; wanted to have tight "{pdf:" -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\special} \Lbrace\unkern\Literal{pdf:} - \Something{text} \Rbrace}} -\bookmark{\tex{special}} - -This is equivalent to \Syntax{\Tex{\pdfliteral} \Lbrace \Something{text} -\Rbrace}. - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\special} \Lbrace\unkern\Literal{pdf:direct:} - \Something{text} \Rbrace}} -\bookmark{\tex{special\ direct}} - -This is equivalent to \Syntax{\Tex{\pdfliteral} \Literal{direct} \Lbrace -\Something{text} \Rbrace}. - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\special} \Lbrace\unkern\Literal{pdf:page:} - \Something{text} \Rbrace}} -\bookmark{\tex{special\ page}} - -This is equivalent to \Syntax{\Tex{\pdfliteral} \Literal{page} \Lbrace -\Something{text} \Rbrace}. - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\special} \Optional{\Literal{shipout}} - \Lbrace\unkern \Something{general text} \Rbrace}} -\bookmark{\tex{special\ shipout}} - -Starting with version 1.40.25, \PDFTEX\ extends the \type{\special} -primitive to support the optional keyword \Literal{shipout}. This delays -expansion of \Something{general text} until the page is shipped out, as -with non-\type{\immediate} \type{\write}. By default, \Something{general -text} is expanded immediately. - -\Syntax{\Tex{\special} \Literal{shipout} \Lbrace \unkern\Literal{pdf:} -\Something{text} \Rbrace} is equivalent to \Syntax{\Tex{\pdfliteral} -\Literal{shipout} \Lbrace \Something{text} \Rbrace}. - -%*********************************************************************** - -\subsection{Strings} - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfescapestring} \Something{general text} - \Whatever{expandable}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfescapestring}} - -Starting with version 1.30.0, \PDFTEX\ provides a mechanism for converting -a general text into \PDF\ string. Many characters that may be needed inside -such a text (especially parenthesis), have a special meaning inside a \PDF\ -string object and thus, can't be used literally. The primitive replaces each -special \PDF\ character by its literal representation by inserting a backslash -before that character. Some characters (\eg\ space) are also converted into -3||digit octal number. In example, \type{\pdfescapestring{Text (1)}} will be -expanded to \type{Text\040\(1\)}. This ensures a literal interpretation of the -text by the \PDF\ viewer. -\introduced{1.30.0} - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfescapename} \Something{general text} - \Whatever{expandable}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfescapename}} - -In analogy to \type{\pdfescapestring}, \type{\pdfescapename} replaces each -special \PDF\ character inside the general text by its hexadecimal -representation preceded by \type{#} character. This ensures the proper -interpretation of the text if used as a \PDF\ name object. In example, -\type{Text (1)} will be replaced by \type{Text#20#281#29}. -\introduced{1.30.0} - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfescapehex} \Something{general text} - \Whatever{expandable}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfescapehex}} - -This command converts each character of \Something{general text} into its -hexadecimal representation. Each character of the argument becomes a pair of -hexadecimal digits. \introduced{1.30.0} - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfunescapehex} \Something{general text} - \Whatever{expandable}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfunescapehex}} - -This command treats each character pair of \Something{general text} as -a hexadecimal number and returns an \ASCII\ character of this code. -\introduced{1.30.0} - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfstrcmp} \Something{general text} - \Something{general text} \Whatever{expandable}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfstrcmp}} - -This command compares two strings and expands to \type{0} if the strings -are equal, to \type{-1} if the first string ranks before the second, and -to \type{1} otherwise. \introduced{1.30.0} - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfmatch} \Optional{\Literal{icase}} - \Optional{\Literal{subcount} \Something{integer}} \Something{general text} - \Something{general text} \Whatever{expandable}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfmatch}} - -This command implements pattern matching (using the syntax of \POSIX\ -extended regular expressions). The first \Something{general text} is a -pattern and the second is a string. The command expands to \type{-1} if -the pattern is invalid, to \type{0} if no match is found, and to -\type{1} if a match is found. With the \type{icase} option, the matching -is case-insensitive. The \type{subcount} option sets the size of the -table storing the found (sub)patterns; its default is 10. -\introduced{1.30.0} - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdflastmatch} \Something{integer} - \Whatever{expandable}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdflastmatch}} - -The matches found with \type{\pdfmatch} are stored in a table. This -command returns the entry for \Something{integer}, in the format -\Something{position}\type{->}\Something{string}; \Something{position} is -the position of the match (starting at zero) or \type{-1} if no match -was found, and \Something{string} is the matched substring. - -Entry~0 contains the match as a whole; the subsequent entries contain -submatches corresponding to the subpatterns, up to \type{subcount-1}. - -If \Something{integer} is less than zero, an error is given. - -For instance: - -\starttyping -\pdfmatch subcount 3 {ab(cd)*ef(gh)(ij)}{abefghij} -\pdflastmatch0 % "0->abefghij" -\pdflastmatch1 % "-1->" -\pdflastmatch2 % "4->gh" -\pdflastmatch3 % "-1->" -\stoptyping - -Entry~1 is empty because no match was found for \type{cd}, and entry~3 -is empty because it exceeds the table's size as set by \type{subcount}. -\introduced{1.30.0} - -%*********************************************************************** - -\subsection{Numbers} - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\ifpdfabsnum} \Whatever{expandable}}} -\bookmark{\tex{ifpdfabsnum}} - -This conditional works like the standard \type{\ifnum}, except that it -compares absolute values of numbers. Although it seems to be a trivial -shortcut for a couple of \type{\ifnum x<0} tests, as a primitive it is -considerably more friendly in usage and works a bit faster. -\introduced{1.40.0} - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\ifpdfabsdim} \Whatever{expandable}}} -\bookmark{\tex{ifpdfabsdim}} - -Analogous to \type{\ifpdfabsnum}, this conditional works like -\type{\ifdim}, except that it compares absolute values of -dimensions. \introduced{1.40.0} - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfuniformdeviate} \Something{number} - \Whatever{expandable}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfuniformdeviate}} - -Generate a uniformly-distributed random integer value between 0 -(inclusive) and \Something{number} (exclusive). This primitive expands -to a list of tokens. \introduced{1.30.0} - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfnormaldeviate} \Whatever{expandable}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfnormaldeviate}} - -Generate a normally-distributed random integer with a mean of~0 and -standard deviation 65\,536. That is, about 68\% of the time, the result -will be between $-65536$ and $65536$ (one standard deviation away from -the mean). About 95\% of results will be within two standard -deviations, and 99.7\% within three. This primitive expands to a list -of tokens. \introduced{1.30.0} - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfrandomseed} \Whatever{read||only integer}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfrandomseed}} - -You can use \type{\the\pdfrandomseed} to query the current seed value, -so you can \eg\ write the value to the log file. The initial value of -the seed is derived from the system time, and is not more than -1\,000\,999\,999 (this ensures that the value can be used with commands -like \type{\count}). \introduced{1.30.0} - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfsetrandomseed} \Something{number}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfsetrandomseed}} - -Set the random seed (\type{\pdfrandomseed}) to a specific value, -allowing you to replay sequences of semi-randoms at a later moment. -\introduced{1.30.0} - -%*********************************************************************** - -\subsection{Timekeeping} - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfelapsedtime} \Whatever{read||only integer}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfelapsedtime}} - -Return a number that represents the time elapsed from the moment of the -start of the run. The elapsed time is returned in `scaled seconds', -meaning seconds divided by 65536, \eg\ \PDFTEX\ has run for -\the\pdfelapsedtime\ `scaled seconds' when this paragraph was -typeset. Of course, the command will never return a value greater than -the highest number available in \TeX: if the time exceeds 32767 seconds, -the constant value $2^{31}-1$ will be returned. \introduced{1.30.0} - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfresettimer}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfresettimer}} - -Reset the internal timer so that \type{\pdfelapsedtime} -starts returning micro||time from~0 again. \introduced{1.30.0} - -%*********************************************************************** - -\subsection{Files} - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdffilemoddate} \Something{general text} - \Whatever{expandable}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdffilemoddate}} - -Expands to the modification date of file \Something{general text} in the -same format as for \type{\pdfcreationdate}, \eg\ it's {\tt -\pdffilemoddate {./pdftex-t.tex}} for the source of this manual. As of -version 1.40.20, if the \type{SOURCE_DATE_EPOCH} and -\type{FORCE_SOURCE_DATE} environment variables are both set, -\type{\pdffilemoddate} returns a value in UTC, ending in \type{Z}. -\introduced{1.30.0} - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdffilesize} \Something{general text} - \Whatever{expandable}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdffilesize}} - -Expands to the size of file \Something{general text}, \eg\ it's {\tt -\pdffilesize {./pdftex-t.tex}} for the source of this manual. -\introduced{1.30.0} - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfmdfivesum} - \Optional{\Literal{file}} - \Something{general text} \Whatever{expandable}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfmdfivesum\ file}} - -If the keyword \type{file} is given, expands to the \MDFIVE\ of file -\Somethingtext{general text} in uppercase hexadecimal format (same as -\type{\pdfescapehex}). Without \type{file}, expands to the \MDFIVE\ of -the \Somethingtext{generaltext} taken as a string. For example, it's -{\tt \pdfmdfivesum file {./pdftex-t.tex}} for the source of this manual. -\introduced{1.30.0} - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdffiledump} - \Optional{\Literal{offset} \Something{integer}} - \Optional{\Literal{length} \Something{integer}} - \Something{general text} \Whatever{expandable}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdffiledump}} - -Expands to the dump of the first \type{length} \Somethingtext{integer} -bytes of the file \Somethingtext{general text}, in uppercase hexadecimal -format (same as \type{\pdfescapehex}), starting at offset -\type{offset}~\Somethingtext{number}, or the beginning of the file if -\type{offset}. If \type{length} is not given, the default is zero, so -expands to nothing. Both \Somethingtext{integer}s must be $\ge0$. For -example, the first ten bytes of the source of this manual are {\tt -\pdffiledump length 10 {./pdftex-t.tex}}. \introduced{1.30.0} - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\input} \Something{general text} - \Whatever{expandable}}} -\bookmark{\tex{input}} - -As of \TEXLIVE\ 2020, the \type{\input} primitive in all \TEX\ engines, -including \PDFTEX, now also accepts a group-delimited filename argument, -as a system-dependent extension, as in \type{\input} \Lbrace -\type{foo.tex} \Rbrace. The usage of \type{\input} with a standard -space/token-delimited filename is completely unchanged. - -This group-delimited argument was previously implemented in Lua\TEX; now -it is available in all engines. \ASCII\ double quote characters -(\type{"}) are removed from the filename, but it is otherwise left -unchanged after tokenization. - -This extension is unlike most others in that it affects a primitive in -standard \TEX\ (\type{\input}), rather than being related to a new -primitive, command line option, etc. This is allowed because additional -methods of recognizing filenames are explicitly mentioned in -\type{tex.web} as acceptable system-dependent extensions. - -Incidentally, this does not directly affect \LATEX's \type{\input} -command, as that is a macro redefinition of the standard \type{\input} -primitive. - -\introduced{1.40.21} - -%*********************************************************************** - -\subsection{Color stack} - -\PDFTEX\ 1.40.0 comes with color stack support (actually any graphic state -stack). - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfcolorstackinit} \Optional{\Literal{page}} - \Optional{\Literal{direct}} \Something{general text} \Whatever{expandable}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfcolorstackinit}} - -The primitive initializes a new graphic stack and returns its number. Optional -\Literal{page} keyword instructs \PDFTEX\ to restore the graphic at the -beginning of every new page. Also optional \Literal{direct} has the same effect -as for \Tex{\pdfliteral} primitive. \introduced{1.40.0} - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfcolorstack} \Something{stack number} - \Something{stack action} \Something{general text}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfcolorstack}} - -The command operates on the stack of a given number. If \Something{stack -action} is \Literal{push} keyword, the new value provided as -\Something{general text} is inserted into the top of the graphic stack -and becomes the current stack value. If followed by \Literal{pop}, the -top value is removed from the stack and the new top value becomes the -current. \Literal{set} keyword replaces the current value with -\Something{general text} without changing the stack size. -\Literal{current} keyword instructs just to use the current stack value -without modifying the stack at all. \introduced{1.40.0} - -%*********************************************************************** - -\subsection{Transformations} - -Since the content of \Tex{\pdfliteral} is not interpreted anyhow, any -transformation inserted directly into the content stream, as well as saving -and restoring the current transformation matrix, remains unnoticed by -\PDFTEX\ positioning mechanism. As a consequence, links and other annotations -(that are formed in \PDF\ as different layer then the page content) are not -affected by such user-defined transformations. \PDFTEX\ 1.40.0 solves this -problem with three new primitives. - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfsetmatrix}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfsetmatrix}} - -Afine transformations are normally expressed with six numbers. First -four (no unit) values defining scaling, rotating and skewing, plus two -extra dimensions for shifting. Since the translation is handled by \TeX\ -itself, \Tex{\pdfsetmatrix} primitive expects as an argument a string -containing just the first four numbers of the transformation separated -by a space and assumes two position coordinates to be~0. In example, -\type{\pdfsetmatrix{0.87 -0.5 0.5 0.87}} rotates the current space by 30 -degrees, inserting \type{0.87 -0.5 0.5 0.87 0 0 cm} into the content -stream. \introduced{1.40.0} - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfsave}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfsave}} - -The command saves the current transformation by inserting \type{q} -operator into the content stream. \introduced{1.40.0} - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfrestore}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfrestore}} - -The command restores previously saved transformation by inserting \type{Q} -operator into the content stream. One should keep in mind that \Tex{\pdfsave} -and \Tex{\pdfrestore} pairs should always be properly nested and should start -and end at the same group level. \introduced{1.40.0} - -%*********************************************************************** - -\subsection{Macro programming} - -Expansion-related. - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\tex {expanded} \Something{tokens} - \Whatever{expandable}}} -\bookmark{\tex{expanded}} - -Expands \Something{tokens} in exactly the same way as \type{\message}. -In contrast to \type{\edef}, macro parameter characters do not need to -be doubled. \type{\protected} macros are not expanded. -\introduced{1.40.20} - - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\tex {ifincsname} \Whatever{expandable}}} -\bookmark{\tex{ifincsname}} - -This conditional is true if evaluated inside \type{\csname ... \endcsname}, -and false otherwise. - - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\tex {ifpdfprimitive} \Something{control sequence} - \Whatever{expandable}}} -\bookmark{\tex{ifpdfprimitive}} - -This condition checks if the following control sequence has its -primitive meaning. If it has, \type{\ifpdfprimitive} returns true. In -any other case (redefined, made \type{\undefined}, has never been -primitive) false is returned. \introduced{1.40.0} - - -flapping\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\tex{partokencontext} \Something{number}}} -\bookmark{\tex{partokencontext}} - -The {\em par-token} (i.e., the token with the name given by -\type{\partokenname}, or \type{\par} by default; see -\type{\partokenname}, next) is inserted into the input stream in -different places, according to the \type{\partokencontext} value. This -value can be: - -0: {\em par-token} is inserted at empty lines (more exactly, when a - token category~5 is seen in state~$N$, reading a line); before - \type{\end}, \type{\vskip}, \type{\hrule}, \type{\unvbox}, and - \type{\halign}, if \TeX{} is in horizontal mode when those commands - are seen; and in various error recovery situations. These are the - standard cases, and this is the default value. - -1: {\em par-token} is inserted as above, and also at the end of - \type{\vbox}, \type{\vtop}, and \type{\vcenter}, if \TeX{} is in - horizontal mode at the time. - -2: {\em par-token} is inserted as above, and also at the end of - \type{\insert}, \type{\vadjust}, \type{\output}, \type{\noalign}, and - items of \type{\valign}, again if \TeX{} is in horizontal mode at the - time. - -With the default \type{\partokencontext=0}, \TEX\ behaves in its normal -way: the situations in cases 1 and 2 are processed by a direct call of -{\em end-paragraph} routine, with no emitted {\em par-token}. - -If \type{\partokencontext=1} then \TeX\ inserts the {\em par-token} in -additional cases: when vertical boxes are completed but horizontal mode -is not finished. Since vboxes are not uncommonly inserted directly by -users, with horizontal mode material, this allows macro programmers to -control all such boxes being finished by a {\em par-token}. An example: - -\starttyping -\partokenname\_mypar -\partokencontext=1 -\def\_mypar{Hi there!\endgraf} -\vbox{Vbox text.} -\stoptyping - -This will output ``\type{Hi there!''}\ after ``\type{Vbox text.}''. - -Finally, with \type{\partokencontext=2}, all cases where classical \TeX\ -uses the direct {\em end-paragraph} routine are changed to emit the {\em -par-token} instead. In contrast to case~1, these commands are rarely -invoked directly by users with horizontal mode material. - -The setting of the register \type{\partokencontext} is local. -\introduced{1.40.24} - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\tex{partokenname} \Something{control sequence}}} -\bookmark{\tex{partokenname}} - -\TeX{} internally inserts a control sequence, named \type{\par} by -default, into the input stream at empty lines, the end of vboxes, and -various other places (see \type{\partokencontext}, above). Let's call this -control sequence the {\em par-token}. - -Executing \type{\partokenname}\Something{control-sequence} changes the -name of the {\em par-token} from \type{\par} to the given -\Something{control-sequence}. The setting performed by -\type{\partokenname} is global. - -This makes it possible to release the name \type{\par} to the ``user's -name space'', i.e., after \type{\partokenname}, users can define and use -\type{\par} as they wish without changing the behavior of anything -internal to \TeX{}. For example: - -\starttyping -\catcode`\_=11 -\partokenname\_mypar % use \_mypar at user level -\let\_mypar=\par % make \_mypar equivalent to built-in \par -% -\def\par{some random text} % redefine \par -% -Hello world. - -Goodbye. -\end -\stoptyping - -This will not output ``\type{some random text}'' (the definition of -\type{\par}), due to the \type{\partokenname} setting. - -By default, the meaning of the {\em par-token} is to end a paragraph -(also named as \type{\endgraf} in the plain \TEX\ format). It can be -changed as usual with, for example, \type{\def}. Naturally, it is the -control sequence name given to \type{\partokenname} that must be -redefined. Continuing the previous example (prior to the \type{\end}): - -\starttyping -\def\_mypar{Hi there!\endgraf} -Paragraph one. - -Paragraph two.\let\_mypar=\endgraf -\stoptyping - -This will output ``\type{Hi there!''}\ after ``\type{Paragraph one.}'', -before ending the paragraph. - -Another behavior of the {\em par-token} built into \TEX\ is that macros -not defined as \type{\long} cause the error ``runaway argument'' if the -{\em par-token} is scanned as a parameter. After -\type{\setpartokenname}, it will be the new control sequence name that -triggers this error, not \type{\par}. For example (still continuing the -same example): - -\starttyping -\def\amac#1{} -\amac{long test, no error: \par} -\amac{long test, gives error: \_mypar} -\stoptyping - -\introduced{1.40.24} - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\tex {pdfprimitive} \Something{control sequence}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfprimitive}} - -This command executes the primitive meaning of the following control -sequence, regardless of whether the control sequence has been redefined -or made undefined. If the primitive was expandable, \type{\pdfprimitive} -expands also. On the other hand, if the following control sequence never -was a primitive, nothing happens and no error is raised. (In some -versions of \PDFTEX\ prior to 1.40.19, an error was wrongly given.) -\introduced{1.40.0} - -%*********************************************************************** - -\subsection{Typesetting} - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfinsertht} \Something{integer} - \Whatever{expandable}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfinsertht}} - -If \Something{integer} is the number of an insertion class, this command -returns the height of the corresponding box at the current time. -For instance, the following returns \type{12pt} in plain \TEX: - -\starttyping -Abc\footnote*{Whatever.}\par -\pdfinsertht\footins -\stoptyping - - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdflastxpos} \Whatever{read||only integer}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdflastxpos}} - -This primitive returns an integer number representing the absolute $x$ -coordinate of the last point marked by \type{\pdfsavepos}. The unit is -`scaled points' (sp). - - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdflastypos} \Whatever{read||only integer}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdflastypos}} - -Completely analogous to \type{\pdflastxpos}, returning the $y$ coordinate. - - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfsavepos} \Modelist{h, v, m}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfsavepos}} - -This primitive marks the current absolute ($x,y$) position on the -media, with the reference point in the lower left corner. It is active -only during page shipout, when the page is finally assembled. The -position coordinates can then be retrieved by the \type{\pdflastxpos} -and \type{\pdflastypos} primitives, and \eg\ written out to some -auxiliary file. The coordinates can be used only after the current -\type{\shipout} has been finalized, therefore normally two \PDFTEX\ -runs are required to utilize these primitives. Starting with -\PDFTEX\ 1.40.0, this mechanism can be used also while running -in \DVI\ mode. - - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\quitvmode}}} -\bookmark{\tex{quitvmode}} - -The primitive instructs \PDFTEX\ to quit vertical mode and start -typesetting a paragraph. Thus, \type{\quitvmode} has the same basic -effect as the \type{\leavevmode} macro from \type{plain.tex}. However, -\type{\leavevmode} expands the \type{\everypar} tokens list, which may -or may not be desired. \type{\quitvmode} does not expand -\type{\everypar}. \introduced{1.21a} - - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\vadjust} - \Optional{\Something{pre spec}} - \Something{filler} - \Lbrace \Something{vertical mode material} \Rbrace - \Modelist{h, m} -}} -\bookmark{\tex{vadjust}} - -The \type{\vadjust} implementation of \PDFTEX\ adds an optional -qualifier \Something{pre spec}, which is simply the string \type{pre}, to -the original \TEX\ primitive with the same name. If -no \type{pre} is given, \type{\vadjust} behaves exactly as the original -(see {\em The \TEX book}, p.~281): it appends an adjustment item created -from \Something{vertical mode material} to the current list {\em after} -the line in which \type{\vadjust} appears. In contrast, with the qualifier -\type{pre}, the adjustment item is put {\em before} the line in which -\type{\vadjust pre} appears. - -%*********************************************************************** - -\subsection{Tracing} - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\tracinglostchars} \Whatever{integer}}} -\bookmark{\tex{tracinglostchars}} - -This primitive parameter has always been part of \TEX, and its operation -with values $\le2$ is unchanged. In addition, if its value is -$\ge3$, then \quote{Missing character} reports become full errors -(ordinarily they are only logged), and the character code is reported in -hex. For example: - -\starttyping -\tracinglostchars=3 -\font\x=logo10 \x \char99 \end -\stoptyping - -will result in this error message: -\starttyping -! Missing character: There is no c ("63) in font logo10. -\stoptyping - -(The \type{logo10} font only defines the capital letters used in the -\METAFONT\ and \METAPOST\ logos, so there is no lowercase.) - -This new behavior is essentially the same in all \TeX\ engines except -the original \TEX\ and \eTeX, where the behavior of -\type{\tracinglostchars} remains unchanged. - -\introduced{1.40.22} - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\tracingstacklevels} \Whatever{integer}}} -\bookmark{\tex{tracingstacklevels}} - -If this primitive parameter is $>0$, and \type{\tracingmacros}$\,>0$, -macro expansion logging is truncated at the specified depth. Also, and -more importantly, each relevant log line is given a prefix beginning -with \type{~}, either followed by a \type{.} character for each -expansion level or only another \type{~} if the expansion was truncated. -For example: - -\starttyping -\tracingmacros=1 % so macro expansion is logged at all -\tracingstacklevels=2 % cut off at level 2 -\def\a#1{\relax} % argument to show parameter logging is affected too -\def\b#1{\a{#1}} -\b1 -\stoptyping - -\noindent logs the following: - -\starttyping -~.\b #1->\a {#1} -#1<-1 -~~\a -\stoptyping - -Thus, the expansion of \type{\b} is logged normally, with the addition -of the \type{~.} prefix. The expansion of \type{\a} is truncated -(level~2), hence neither the parameters nor body expansion are shown. - -Furthermore, an \type{\input} file counts as an expansion level, and the -input filename is logged. So, if we add this to our example above: -\starttyping -\input anotherfile -\stoptyping - -where \type{anotherfile.tex} simply contains \type{\b2}, the log will -get: - -\starttyping -~.INPUT anotherfile.tex -~~\b -~~\a -\stoptyping - -Now the \type{\b} expansion is not logged either, since the expansion -depth is higher than the \type{\tracingstacklevels} value. - -The intended use of \type{\tracingstacklevels} is not so much to -truncate logging as to indicate expansion levels for detailed debugging. -Thus normally it would be set to a large number (\type{\maxdimen}, say), -so that everything is fully logged, with the addition of the expansion -level indication with the number of dots in the prefix. - -The behavior is the same in all \TeX\ engines except the original \TEX\ -and \eTeX, where \type{\tracingstacklevels} remains undefined. -\introduced{1.40.22} - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\showstream} \Whatever{integer}}} -\bookmark{\tex{showstream}} - -If this primitive parameter has a value corresponding to an open output -stream (which has been opened with \type{\openout}), then any -\type{\show}, \type{\showthe}, \type{\showbox} or \type{\showlists} -commands do not write output to the terminal, but instead write to the -referenced output stream only, as if they were written with -\type{\immediate\write}. - -For example: -\starttyping -\newwrite\myoutstream -\immediate\openout\myoutstream="infofile" -\showstream=\myoutstream -% From now on, \show... commands are redirected to "infofile.tex". -\show\TeX -% -\showstream=-1 -% -1 is never a open file and therefore restores -% normal \show... behavior. -\immediate\closeout\myoutstream -\stoptyping - -This example would not generate any special output to the terminal or -log file (except for any logging done by \type{\newwrite}. It writes -this text to \type{infofile.tex}, including the initial blank line, -since that is what \type{\show} does: - -\starttyping - -> \TeX=macro: -->T\kern -.1667em\lower .5ex\hbox {E}\kern -.125emX -\stoptyping - -The behavior is the same in all \TeX\ engines except the original \TEX\ -and \eTeX, where \type{\showstream} remains undefined. \introduced{1.40.24} - -%*********************************************************************** - -\subsection{\PDFTEX\ execution environment} - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\tex {pdfdraftmode} \Whatever{integer}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfdraftmode}} - -When set to 1 (or set by the command-line switch \type{-draftmode}) -\PDFTEX\ doesn't write the output \PDF\ file and doesn't actually read any -images but does everything else (including writing auxiliary files), -thus speeding up compilations when you know you need an extra run but -don't care about the output, \eg\ just to get the \BIBTEX\ references -right. If specified, the parameter must appear before any data is -written to the \PDF\ output. -\introduced{1.40.0} - - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfshellescape} \Whatever{read||only integer}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdfshellescape}} - -This primitive is~1 if \type{\write18} is enabled, 2 if its operation is -restricted to known-safe programs, and 0 otherwise. \introduced{1.30.0} - - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdftexbanner} \Whatever{expandable}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdftexbanner}} - -Returns the \PDFTEX\ banner message, \eg\ for the version used here: -{\tt \pdftexbanner}. \introduced{1.20a} - - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdftexrevision} \Whatever{expandable}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdftexrevision}} - -Returns the revision number of \PDFTEX, \eg\ for \PDFTEX\ version -\currentpdftex\ (used to produce this document), it returns the number -{\tt \pdftexrevision}. - - -\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdftexversion} \Whatever{read||only integer}}} -\bookmark{\tex{pdftexversion}} - -Returns the version of \PDFTEX\ multiplied by 100, \eg\ for \PDFTEX\ -version \currentpdftex\ (used to produce this document), it returns {\tt -\number\pdftexversion}. - -%*********************************************************************** - -\section{Graphics} - -\PDFTEX\ supports inclusion of pictures in \PNG, \JPEG, \JBIGTWO, and -\PDF\ format; a few differences between these are discussed below. The -most common technique with \TEX\ |<|the inclusion of \EPS\ figures|>| -is replaced by \PDF\ inclusion. \EPS\ files can be converted to \PDF\ by -\GHOSTSCRIPT, Adobe Distiller or other \POSTSCRIPT||to||\PDF\ converters. - -The \PDF\ format is currently the most versatile source format for -graphics embedding. \PDFTEX\ allows to insert arbitrary pages from -\PDF\ files with their own fonts, graphics, and pixel images into -a document. The cover page of this manual is an example of such an insert, -being a one page document generated by \PDFTEX. - -By default \PDFTEX\ takes the BoundingBox of a \PDF\ file from its CropBox -if available, otherwise from its MediaBox. This can be influenced by -the \Something{pdf box spec} option to the \type{\pdfximage} primitive, -or by setting the \type{\pdfpagebox} or \type{\pdfforcepagebox} primitives to -a value corresponding to the wanted box type. - -To get the right BoundingBox from a \EPS\ file, before converting to \PDF, -it is necessary to transform the \EPS\ file so that the start point is -at the (0,0)~coordinate and the page size is set exactly corresponding -to the BoundingBox. A \PERL\ script (\EPSTOPDF) for this purpose has been -written. The \TEXUTIL\ utility script and the \PSTOPDF\ program that comes -with \GHOSTSCRIPT\ can so a similar job. (Concerning this conversion, -they can handle complete directories, remove some garbage from files, -takes precautions against duplicate conversion, etc.) - -The lossless compressing \PNG\ format is great for embedding crisp pixel -graphics (\eg\ line scans, screen shots). Since \PDFTEX\ 1.30.0 also the -alpha-channel of \PNG\ images is processed if available; this allows -embedding of images with simple transparency. The \PNG\ format does not -support the CMYK color model, which is sometimes required for print media -(this often can be replaced by four component \JPEG\ in high quality or -lossless compression mode). Photos in \PNG\ format have a rather weak -compression; here the \JPEG\ format is preferable. - -Embedding \PNG\ images in the general case requires \PDFTEX\ to uncompress -the pixel array and to re||compress it to the \PDF\ requirements; this -process often takes a noticeable amount of time. Since \PDFTEX\ 1.30.0 -there is now a fast \PNG\ embedding mode that goes without uncompressing; -the image data are directly copied into the \PDF\ stream, resulting in -a much higher embedding speed. However this mode is only activated, if -the image array structure of the \PNG\ file is compatible with the \PDF\ -image structure (\eg\ an interlaced \PNG\ image requires uncompressing to -re||arrange the image lines). Luckily it seems that the most common \PNG\ -files also allow fast copying. The use of gamma correction disables fast -copying, as it requires calculations with individual pixels. Whether the -fast copy mode is used for a \PNG\ image can be seen from the log file, -which then shows the string `(PNG copy)' after the \PNG\ file name. - -The \JPEG\ format is normally used in lossy mode; then it's ideal for -embedding photos. It's not recommended for crisp images from synthetic -sources with a limited amount of colors. Both \JFIF\ and \EXIF\ are -supported for additional information. - -The \JBIGTWO\ format works only for bitonal (black and white) pixel -images like scanned line and text documents, but for these it has -typically a much higher compression ratio than the other two pixel -image formats. The \JBIGTWO\ format is part of the \PDF\ standard since -version 1.5; native \JBIGTWO\ image inclusion is available in \PDFTEX\ -since version 1.40.0. A \JBIGTWO\ file might contain many images, which -gives an even better compression ratio than with a single image per file, -as \JBIGTWO\ encoders can exploit similarities between bit patterns over -several images. Encoders for \JBIGTWO\ can operate in lossy as well as -lossless modes. Only recently a free \JBIGTWO\ encoder has been written -and made available, see \from[jbig2enc]. - -Other options for graphics in \PDFTEX\ are: - -\description {\LATEX\ picture mode} Since this is implemented simply in terms -of font characters, it works in exactly the same way as usual. - -\description {Xy||pic} If the \POSTSCRIPT\ back||end is not requested, Xy||pic -uses its own Type~1 fonts, and needs no special attention. - -\description {tpic} The \quote {tpic} \type{\special} commands (used in some -macro packages) can be redefined to produce literal \PDF, using some macros -written by Hans Hagen. - -\description {\METAPOST} Although the output of \METAPOST\ is -\POSTSCRIPT, it is in a highly simplified form, and a \METAPOST\ to -\PDF\ conversion (\MPTOPDF, available as \type{supp-pdf.tex} and -\type{supp-pdf.mkii}, written by Hans Hagen and Tanmoy Bhattacharya) is -implemented as a set of macros which reads \METAPOST\ output and -supports all of its features. - -The inclusion of raw \POSTSCRIPT\ commands |<|a technique utilized -by for instance the \type{pstricks} package|>| cannot directly be -supported. Although \PDF\ is a direct descendant of \POSTSCRIPT, it -lacks any programming language commands, and cannot deal with arbitrary -\POSTSCRIPT. - -%*********************************************************************** - -\section[sec.addpdfkeys]{Additional \PDF\ keys} - -{\em This section is based on the manual on keys written by Martin -Schr\"oder, one of the maintainers of \PDFTEX.} - -A \PDF\ document should contain only the structures and attributes defined -in the \PDF\ specification. However, the specification allows applications -to insert additional keys, provided they follow certain rules. - -The most important rule is that developers have to register with Adobe -prefixes for the keys they want to insert. Hans Hagen has registered the -prefix \type{PTEX} for \PDFTEX. - -\PDFTEX\ generates an XObject for every included \PDF. The dictionary of -this object contains these additional keys: - -\starttabulate[|lT|l|p|] -\HL -\NC \bf key \NC \bf type \NC meaning \NC \NR -\HL -\NC PTEX.FileName \NC string \NC The name of the included file as seen by - \PDFTEX. \NC \NR -\NC PTEX.InfoDict \NC dictionary \NC The document information dictionary of the included - \PDF\ (an indirect object). \NC \NR -\NC PTEX.PageNumber \NC integer \NC The page number of the included file. \NC \NR -\HL -\stoptabulate - -The \PDFReference\ says: \quotation {Although viewer applications can -store custom metadata in the document information dictionary, it is -inappropriate to store private content or structural information there; -such information should be stored in the document catalog instead.} - -Although it would seem more natural to put this information in the -document information dictionary, we have to obey the rules laid down in -the \PDFReference. The following key ends up in the document catalog. - -\starttabulate[|lT|l|p|] -\HL -\NC \bf key \NC \bf type \NC meaning \NC \NR -\HL -\NC PTEX.Fullbanner \NC string \NC The full version of the \pt binary that -produced the file as displayed by {\tt pdftex \hbox{-{}-version}}, \eg\ -{\tt\pdftexbanner}. This is necessary because the string in the -\type{Producer} key in the info dictionary is rather short, -namely {\tt pdfTeX-\currentpdftex}. \NC \NR -\HL -\stoptabulate - -Any or all of these keys can be suppressed with the -\type{\pdfsuppressptexinfo} primitive, described in -\in{section}[sec.docinfocatalog]. - -%*********************************************************************** - -\section{Character translation} - -Characters that are input to \PDFTEX\ are subject to optional -\TEX\ character translation (\TCX) under control of a \TCX\ file. -The \TCX\ maps the input character codes (\eg\ from \type{\input} or -\type{\read}) to the character codes as seen by \PDFTEX. This mapping -takes place before the characters enter \PDFTEX's `mouth'. If no \TCX\ -file is read, the input characters enter \PDFTEX\ directly; no mapping -is done. - -\TCX\ files consist of lines each containing one or two integer numbers -in the range 0..255, either in decimal or hex notation. -% strtol() C-function -A comment sign \type{%} in a \TCX\ line starts a comment until the -end of line. The first number in each line is for matching the input -character code, the second, optional number is the corresponding \TEX\ -character code. If a line contains only one number, characters with -this code enter \PDFTEX\ unchanged; no mapping is done. - -\TCX\ mapping also influences \PDFTEX\ output streams for \type{\message} and -\type{\write}. Without \TCX\ mapping, only characters that are within -the range 32..126 are flagged as `printable', meaning that these -characters are output directly by \type{\message} and \type{\write} -primitives. Characters outside the range 32..126 are instead output -in escaped form, \eg\ as \type{^^A} for a character with code -\type{0x01}. When a character code is mentioned in the 2nd column of the -\TCX\ file, or as the only value in a line, it is flagged as `printable'. -During \type{\message} and \type{\write}, output characters are mapped -in reverse direction: they are looked up in the 2nd column of the \TCX\ -file and the corresponding values from the 1st column are output. Again, -if a \PDFTEX\ character code is found as the only number in a line, no -mapping is done. Mentioning a character code as the only number on -a line has the sole purpose to flag this code `printable'; remember that -character within the range 32..126 are `printable' anyway. - -The characters output into the \PDF\ file, \eg\ by \type{\pdfliteral} -or \type{\special} primitives, are not subject to \TCX\ output remapping. - -Beware: Character translation interferes with the \ENCTEX\ primitives; to -avoid surprises, don't use \ENCTEX\ and \TCX\ mapping at the same time. -Further details about \TCX\ file loading can be found in the \WEBC\ -manual. - -%*********************************************************************** - -\section{Installation} - -This section describes the steps needed to get \PDFTEX\ running on -a system where \PDFTEX\ is not yet installed. Nowadays essentially all -\TEX\ distributions include \PDFTEX\ already as a component, such as \TEXLIVE, -\MIKTEX, \PROTEXT, and \MACTEX. For example, the -\TEXLIVE\ distribution comes with \PDFTEX\ versions for many \UNIX, -\WIN, and \MACOSX\ systems; more information can be found at -\hbox{\from[texlive].} There are also \WIN-specific distributions which -contain \PDFTEX, under \from[win32]: \MIKTEX\ by Christian Schenk, and -\PROTEXT\ (based on \MIKTEX) by Thomas Feuerstack. When you use any -of these distributions, you don't need to bother with the \PDFTEX\ -installation procedure in the next sections. - -If there is no precompiled \PDFTEX\ binary for your system, or the version -coming with a distribution is not the current one and you would like to -try out a fresh \PDFTEX\ immediately, you will need to build \PDFTEX\ -from sources; read on. You should already have a working \TEX\ system, -\eg\ \TEXLIVE, into which the freshly compiled \PDFTEX\ will -be integrated. Note that the installation description in this manual -is \WEBC||specific. - -\subsection{Getting sources and binaries} - -The latest sources of \PDFTEX\ are distributed for compilation on \UNIX\ -systems (including \GNU/Linux), and \WIN\ systems. The primary home -page is \from[ptex_org], where you also find bug tracking information. -Development sources are at \from[ptex_devel]. Precompiled \PDFTEX\ -binaries for various systems might be available in subdirectories below -\from[ctan_systems], or via \TEX\ distribution web pages. - -%*********************************************************************** - -\subsection{Compiling} - -The compilation is expected to be easy on \UNIX||like systems and -can be described best by example. Assuming that the file \filename -{pdftex.zip} is downloaded to some working directory, \eg\ -\filename {\$HOME/pdftex}, on a \UNIX\ system the following steps are -needed to compile \PDFTEX: - -\startesctyping -cd pdftex.../source -./build-pdftex.sh -\stopesctyping - -The binary \filename{pdftex} is then built in the subdirectory -\filename{build/texk/web2c}. - -The obsolescent binary \filename{pdfetex} is still generated for backward -compatibility, but since version 1.40 it is just a symbolic link to or copy -of the file \filename{pdftex}. - -As well as the main \filename{pdftex} binary, binaries for the utilities -\filename{pdftosrc} and \filename{ttf2afm} are generated. - -Incidentally, for \PDFTEX\ maintains, a sibling script to -\type{build-pdftex.sh} is included, namely \type{sync-pdftex.sh}, which -syncs changes from a \TEXLIVE\ source repository to a \PDFTEX\ source -repository. Read the script before using it. And don't use it unless -you understand what you read. - -%*********************************************************************** - -\subsection{Placing files} - -The next step is to put the freshly compiled \filename{pdftex}, -\filename{pdftosrc}, and \filename{ttf2afm} binaries into the binary -directory (\eg\ for a typical \TEXLIVE\ system, and on the appropriate -platform) \filename{/usr/local/texlive/\rcsyear/bin/x86_64-linux}. - -If you're doing this into a live hierarchy, don't forget to do a -\type{texconfig-sys init} afterwards, so that all formats are -regenerated system-wide with the fresh \filename{pdftex} binary. - -%*********************************************************************** - -\subsection{Setting search paths} - -\WEBC||based programs, including \PDFTEX, use the \WEBC\ run||time -configuration file called \filename {texmf.cnf}. The location -of this file is the appropriate position within the \TDS\ tree -relative to the place of the \PDFTEX\ binary; on a \TEXLIVE\ system, -\filename{texmf.cnf} is typically located either in the directory -\filename{texmf-dist/web2c}. The path to -file \filename{texmf.cnf} can also be set up by the environment variable -\type{TEXMFCNF}. - -The configuration files in the major \TEX\ distributions (such as -\filename{texmf.cnf} in \TEXLIVE) should already be set up for normal -use, so you shouldn't need to edit it. You might still like to read it -to see where the various bits and pieces are going. - -\PDFTEX\ uses the search path variables shown in -\in{table}[tbl:spathvar], among others. - -\startbuffer -\starttabulate[|l|l|] -\HL -\NC \bf used for \NC \bf texmf.cnf \NC\NR -\HL -\NC output files \NC \type{TEXMFOUTPUT} \NC\NR -\NC input files, images \NC \type{TEXINPUTS} \NC\NR -\NC format files \NC \type{TEXFORMATS} \NC\NR -\NC \TeX\ pool files \NC \type{TEXPOOL} \NC\NR -\NC encoding files \NC \type{ENCFONTS} \NC\NR -\NC font map files \NC \type{TEXFONTMAPS} \NC\NR -\NC \TFM\ files \NC \type{TFMFONTS} \NC\NR -\NC virtual fonts \NC \type{VFFONTS} \NC\NR -\NC Type~1 fonts \NC \type{T1FONTS} \NC\NR -\NC TrueType fonts \NC \type{TTFONTS} \NC\NR -\NC OpenType fonts \NC \type{OPENTYPEFONTS} \NC\NR -\NC bitmap fonts \NC \type{PKFONTS} \NC\NR -\HL -\stoptabulate -\stopbuffer - -\placetable[here][tbl:spathvar] - {The principal \WEBC\ variables.} - {\getbuffer} - -\PathDescription {TEXMFOUTPUT} Normally, \PDFTEX\ puts its output files -in the current directory, overridden by the \type{-output-directory} -option. If any output file cannot be opened there, it tries to open it -in the environment variable \type{TEXMFOUTPUT}, if that is set. There is -no default value for that variable. For example, if \type{TEXMFOUTPUT} -has the value \type{/tmp}, and you run \type{pdftex paper} when the -current directory is not writable, \PDFTEX\ attempts to create -\type{/tmp/paper.log} (and \type{/tmp/paper.pdf}, etc.) - -\PathDescription {TEXINPUTS} This variable specifies where \PDFTEX\ finds -its input files. Image files are considered -input files and searched for along this path. - -\PathDescription {TEXFORMATS} Search path for format (\type{.fmt}) files. - -\PathDescription {TEXPOOL} Search path for pool (\type{.pool}) files; no -longer used, since the pool file (program strings) are compiled into -the binary. - -\PathDescription {ENCFONTS} Search path for encoding (\type{.enc}) files. - -\PathDescription {TEXFONTMAPS} Search path for font map (\type{.map}) files. - -\PathDescription {TFMFONTS} Search path for font metric (\type{.tfm}) files. - -\PathDescription {VFFONTS} Search path for virtual font (\type{.vf}) -files. Virtual fonts are fonts made up of other fonts. -Because \PDFTEX\ produces the -final output code, it must consult those files. - -\PathDescription {T1FONTS} Search path for Type~1 font files (\type{.pfa} -and \type{.pfb}). These outline (vector) fonts are to be preferred over -bitmap \PK\ fonts. In most cases Type~1 fonts are used and this variable -tells \PDFTEX\ where to find them. - -\PathDescription {TTFONTS,\hfil\break \hbox{OPENTYPEFONTS}} Search paths -for TrueType (\type{.ttf}) and OpenType (\type{.otf}) font files. Like -Type~1 fonts, TrueType and OpenType fonts are also outlines. - -\PathDescription {PKFONTS} Search path for packed (bitmap) font -(\type{.pk}) files. -Unfortunately bitmap fonts are still displayed poorly by some \PDF\ -viewers, so when possible one should use outline fonts. When no outline -is available, \PDFTEX\ tries to locate a suitable \PK\ font (or invoke -a process that generates it). - -\PathDescription{TEXFONTS} Fallback for all the font paths, so that if -you want to look in a particular directory for fonts on a given run, you -can set that one variable. - -Many more variables may be consulted, and there are many details to -file name lookups. See the Kpathsea manual (\from [kpathsea]). - -%*********************************************************************** - -\subsection[cfg]{The \PDFTEX\ configuration} - -We must keep in mind that, as opposed to \TEX\ with its \DVI\ output, -the \PDFTEX\ program does not have a separate postprocessing stage to -transform the \TEX\ input into final \PDF. As a consequence, all data -needed for building a ready \PDF\ page must be available during the -\PDFTEX\ run, in particular information on media dimensions and offsets, -graphics files for embedding, and font information (font files, -encodings). - -When \TEX\ builds a page, it places items relative to the (1in,1in) -offset from the top left page corner (the \DVI\ reference point). -Separate \DVI\ postprocessors allow specifying the paper size (\eg\ -\quote {A4} or \quote{letter}), so that this reference point is moved to -the correct position on the paper, and the text ends up at the right -place. - -In \PDF, the paper dimensions are part of the page definition, and -\PDFTEX\ therefore requires that they be defined at the beginning of -the \PDFTEX\ run. As with pages described by \POSTSCRIPT, the \PDF\ -reference point is in the lower||left corner. - -Formerly, these dimensions and other \PDFTEX\ parameters were read -in from a configuration file named \filename{pdftex.cfg}, which had -a special (non-\TEX) format, at the start of processing. Nowadays such -a file is ignored by \PDFTEX. Instead, the page dimensions and offsets, -as well as many other parameters, can be set by \PDFTEX\ primitives -during the \PDFTEX\ format building process, so that the settings are -dumped into the fresh format and consequently will be used when \PDFTEX\ -is later called with that format. All settings from the format can -still be overridden during a \PDFTEX\ run by using the same primitives. -This new configuration concept is a more unified approach, as it avoids -the configuration file with a special format. - -A list of \PDFTEX\ primitives relevant to setting up the \PDFTEX\ engine -is given in \in{table}[tbl:configparms]. All primitives are described in -detail within later sections. \in{Figure}[in:pdftexconfig] shows a recent -configuration file (\type{pdftexconfig.tex}) in \TEX\ format, using the -primitives from \in{table}[tbl:configparms], which typically is read -in during the format building process. It enables \PDF\ output, sets paper -dimensions and the default pixel density for \PK\ font inclusion. The default -values are chosen so that \PDFTEX\ often can be used (\eg\ in \type{-ini} mode) -even without setting any parameters. - -\startbuffer -\starttabulate[|l|l|l|l|l|] -\HL -\NC \bf internal name \NC \bf type \NC\bf default\NC\bf comment\NC\NR -\HL -\NC \type{\pdfoutput} \NC integer \NC 0 \NC \DVI \NC\NR -\NC \type{\pdfadjustspacing} \NC integer \NC 0 \NC off \NC\NR -\NC \type{\pdfcompresslevel} \NC integer \NC 9 \NC best \NC\NR -\NC \type{\pdfobjcompresslevel} \NC integer \NC 0 \NC no object streams \NC\NR -\NC \type{\pdfdecimaldigits} \NC integer \NC 4 \NC max. \NC\NR -\NC \type{\pdfimageresolution} \NC integer \NC 72 \NC dpi \NC\NR -\NC \type{\pdfpkresolution} \NC integer \NC 0 \NC 72\,dpi \NC\NR -\NC \type{\pdfpkmode} \NC token reg.\NC empty \NC mode set in \type{mktex.cnf} \NC\NR -\NC \type{\pdfuniqueresname} \NC integer \NC 0 \NC \NC\NR -\NC \type{\pdfprotrudechars} \NC integer \NC 0 \NC \NC\NR -\NC \type{\pdfgentounicode} \NC integer \NC 0 \NC \NC\NR -\NC \type{\pdfmajorversion} \NC integer \NC 1 \NC output \PDF\ 1.4 by default \NC\NR -\NC \type{\pdfminorversion} \NC integer \NC 4 \NC \PDF\ 1.4 \NC\NR -\NC \type{\pdfpagebox} \NC integer \NC 0 \NC \NC\NR -\NC \type{\pdfforcepagebox} \NC integer \NC 0 \NC \NC\NR -\NC \type{\pdfinclusionerrorlevel} \NC integer \NC 0 \NC \NC\NR -%----------------------------------------------------------------------- -\NC \type{\pdfhorigin} \NC dimension \NC 1\,in \NC \NC\NR -\NC \type{\pdfvorigin} \NC dimension \NC 1\,in \NC \NC\NR -\NC \type{\pdfpagewidth} \NC dimension \NC 0\,pt \NC \NC\NR -\NC \type{\pdfpageheight} \NC dimension \NC 0\,pt \NC \NC\NR -%\NC \type{\pdffirstlineheight} \NC dimention \NC -1000\,pt \NC \NC\NR -%\NC \type{\pdflastlinedepth} \NC dimention \NC -1000\,pt \NC \NC\NR -%\NC \type{\pdfeachlineheight} \NC dimention \NC -1000\,pt \NC \NC\NR -%\NC \type{\pdfeachlinedepth} \NC dimention \NC -1000\,pt \NC \NC\NR -\NC \type{\pdflinkmargin} \NC dimension \NC 0\,pt \NC \NC\NR -\NC \type{\pdfdestmargin} \NC dimension \NC 0\,pt \NC \NC\NR -\NC \type{\pdfthreadmargin} \NC dimension \NC 0\,pt \NC \NC\NR -\NC \type{\pdfmapfile} \NC text \NC \filename{pdftex.map} \NC not dumped\NC\NR -\HL -\stoptabulate -\stopbuffer - -\placetable[here][tbl:configparms] - {The set of \PDFTEX\ configuration parameters.} - {\getbuffer} - -\startbuffer -\tx\setupinterlinespace -\startframedtext -\starttyping -% tex-ini-files 2016-04-15: pdftexconfig.tex - -% Load shared (PDF) settings in pdfTeX - -% Enable PDF output -\pdfoutput = 1 - -% Paper size: dimensions given in absolute terms -\pdfpageheight = 11 true in -\pdfpagewidth = 8.5 true in - -% Enable PDF 1.5 output and thus more compression -\pdfminorversion = 5 -\pdfobjcompresslevel = 2 - -% Low-level settings unlikely ever to need to change -\pdfcompresslevel = 9 -\pdfdecimaldigits = 3 -\pdfpkresolution = 600 -\pdfhorigin = 1 true in -\pdfvorigin = 1 true in -\stoptyping -\stopframedtext -\stopbuffer - -\placefigure[here][in:pdftexconfig] - {\PDFTEX\ configuration file for \TEXLIVE\ (\filename{pdftexconfig.tex}).} - {\getbuffer} - -Independent of whether such a configuration file is read or not, the -first action in a \PDFTEX\ run is that the program reads the global -\WEBC\ configuration file (\filename{texmf.cnf}), which is common to all -programs in the \WEBC\ system. This file mainly defines file search -paths, the memory layout (\eg\ string pool and hash size), and a few -other general parameters. - -%*********************************************************************** - -\subsection{Creating format files} - -\startbuffer -\tx\setupinterlinespace -\startframedtext -\starttyping -% Thomas Esser, 1998. public domain. -\input etex.src -\dump -\endinput -\stoptyping -\stopframedtext -\stopbuffer - -\placefigure[here][in:etexini] - {File \type{etex.ini} for the plain \ETEX\ format with \DVI\ output.} - {\getbuffer} - -\startbuffer -\tx\setupinterlinespace -\startframedtext -\starttyping -% Thomas Esser, 1998. public domain. -% This is used for pdftex and pdfetex, which are now identical: -% both with e-TeX extensions, both with pdf (and dvi) output. -\input pdftexconfig.tex -\input etex.src -\input pdftexmagfix.tex -\dump -\endinput -\stoptyping -\stopframedtext -\stopbuffer - -\placefigure[here][in:pdfetexini] - {File \type{pdfetex.ini} for plain \ETEX\ with \PDF\ output.} - {\getbuffer} - -\startbuffer -\tx\setupinterlinespace -\startframedtext -\starttyping -% Thomas Esser, 1998. public domain. -\input pdftexconfig.tex -\scrollmode -\input latex.ltx -\endinput -\stoptyping -\stopframedtext -\stopbuffer - -\placefigure[here][in:pdflatexini] - {File \type{pdflatex.ini} for the \LATEX\ format with \PDF\ output.} - {\getbuffer} - -The \PDFTEX\ engine supports building formats for \DVI\ and \PDF\ output -in the same way as the classical \TEX\ engine does for \DVI. Format -generation (and other \type{initex} features) is enabled by the -\type{-ini} option. The default mode (\DVI\ or \PDF) can be chosen -either on the command line by setting the option \type{-output-format} -to \type{dvi} or \type{pdf}, or by setting the \type{\pdfoutput} -parameter. The format file then inherits this setting, so that a later -invocation of \PDFTEX\ with this format starts in the preselected mode -(which still can be overridden). A format file can be read in only by -the engine that has generated it; a format incompatible with an engine -leads to a fatal error. - -It is customary to package the configuration and macro file input -into a \type{.ini} file. \Eg, the file \type{etex.ini} in -\in{figure}[in:etexini] is for generating an \ETEX\ format with \DVI\ -output. It has been traditional for many years to generate -\type{etex.fmt} with \PDFTEX\ rather than the original \ETEX, because -\PDFTEX\ contains a few additional programming and other -non-\PDF-related features on which people have come to rely. - -The \type{pdfetex.ini} file \in{figure}[in:etexini] shows the -corresponding format with \PDF\ output by default; this is what creates -the format file read when \type{pdftex} is normally invoked. - -Finally, \type{pdflatex.ini} \in{figure}[in:pdflatexini] shows how the -\LATEX\ format with \PDF\ output by default is generated. - -The corresponding \PDFTEX\ calls for format generation are: - -\starttyping -pdftex -ini *etex.ini -pdftex -ini *pdfetex.ini -pdftex -ini *pdflatex.ini -\stoptyping - -These calls produce format files \filename{etex.fmt}, -\filename{pdfetex.fmt}, and \filename{pdflatex.fmt}, as the default -format file name is taken from the input file name. You can override -this with the \type{-jobname} option. The asterisk \type{*} before the -file name is an unusual flag, only used in \type{-ini} mode, which -causes the \PDFTEX\ engine to enable \ETEX's features. - -Incidentally, as of \PDFTEX\ 1.40.21 (\TEX\ Live 2020), \filename{.fmt} -files are compressed with \type{zlib}. This makes for a considerable -savings in space, and consequently in time. - -\subsection{Testing the installation} - -When everything is set up, you can test the installation. A simple test -of plain \PDFTEX\ is: - -\starttyping -pdftex story \\end -\stoptyping - -This should typeset the famous one-page short story by A.U. Thor. - -A more thorough and descriptive test is the plain \TEX\ test file -\filename{samplepdf.tex}, available in the distribution in the -\type{samplepdftex/} directory. Process this file by typing: - -\starttyping -pdftex samplepdf -\stoptyping - -If the installation is ok, this should produce a file called -\filename{samplepdf.pdf}. The file \filename {samplepdf.tex} is a good -place to look for examples of how to use \PDFTEX's primitives. - -%*********************************************************************** - -\subsection{Common problems} - -The most common problem with installations is that \PDFTEX\ complains -that something cannot be found. In such cases make sure that -\type{TEXMFCNF} is set correctly, so \PDFTEX\ can find \filename -{texmf.cnf}. The next best place to look|/|edit is the file -\type{texmf.cnf}. When still in deep trouble, set -\type{KPATHSEA_DEBUG=255} before running \PDFTEX\ or use the option -\type{-kpathsea-debug 255}. This will cause \PDFTEX\ to write a lot of -debugging information that can be useful to trace problems. More options -can be found in the \WEBC\ documentation. - -Variables in \filename {texmf.cnf} can be overwritten by environment -variables. Here are some of the most common problems you can encounter when -getting started: - -\startitemize - -\head \type{I can't find the format file `pdftex.fmt'!} \crlf - \type{I can't find the format file `pdflatex.fmt'!} - - The format file is not created (see above how to do that) or - is not properly placed. Make sure that \type{TEXFORMATS} in - \filename {texmf.cnf} contains the path to \filename {pdftex.fmt} - or \filename {pdflatex.fmt}. - -\head \type{Fatal format file error; I'm stymied} - - This appears \eg\ if you forgot to regenerate the \type{.fmt} - files after installing a new version of the \PDFTEX\ binary. - The first line tells by which engine the offending format was generated. - -\head \PDFTEX\ cannot find one or more map files (\type{*.map}), - encoding vectors (\type{*.enc}), virtual fonts, Type~1 fonts, - TrueType or OpenType fonts, or some image file. - - Make sure that the required file exists and the corresponding variable - in \filename {texmf.cnf} contains a path to the file. See above which - variables \PDFTEX\ needs apart from the ones \TEX\ uses. - - When you have installed new fonts, and your \PDF\ viewer complains - about missing fonts, you should take a look at the log file produced - by \PDFTEX. Missing fonts, map files, encoding vectors as well as - missing characters (glyphs) are reported there. - -\stopitemize - -Normally the page content takes one object. This means that one seldom -finds more than a few hundred objects in a simple file. This \PDFTEX\ -manual for instance uses approx.~750 objects. In more complex applications -this number can grow quite rapidly, especially when one uses a lot of -widget annotations, shared annotations or other shared things. In any -case \PDFTEX's internal object table size will automatically grow to the -required size (the parameter \type{obj_tab_size} for manual control of -the object table size is now obsolete and ignored). - -%*********************************************************************** - -\stopbodymatter - -%D Only abbreviations actually used will end up in the following list. - -\startbackmatter - -\writebetweenlist[section]{\blank[line]} - -\section{Abbreviations} - -In this document we use numerous abbreviations. For convenience we give -their meanings here. - -\placelistofabbreviations - -%*********************************************************************** - -\start \setupalign[nothanging,nohz] - -\section{Examples of HZ and protruding} - -In the following sections we will demonstrate \PDFTEX's protruding and -\HZ\ features, using a text from E.~Tufte. This sample text has a lot -of punctuation and often needs hyphenation. Former \PDFTEX\ versions -had sometimes problems with combining these features, but from version -1.21a on it should be ok. If you still encounter problems, please try -to prepare a small test file that demonstrates the problem and send it -to one of the maintainers. - -\startbuffer - \input tufte - \blank[big] - \startcolumns - \input tufte - \stopcolumns -\stopbuffer - -\subsection{Normal} \start \getbuffer \stop -\subsection{HZ} \start \setupalign[hz] \getbuffer \stop -\subsection{Protruding} \start \setupalign[hanging] \getbuffer \stop -\subsection{Both} \start \setupalign[hz,hanging] \getbuffer \stop - -\stop - -%*********************************************************************** - -\section{Colophon} - -This manual is typeset in \CONTEXT. One can generate an A4 version from -the source code by typing: - -\starttyping -texexec --result=pdftex-a.pdf pdftex-t -\stoptyping - -Or for letter size: - -\starttyping -texexec --mode=letter --result=pdftex-l.pdf pdftex-t -\stoptyping - -Given that the A4 version is typeset, one can generate an A5 booklet by -typing: - -\starttyping -texexec --pdfarrange --paper=a5a4 --print=up --addempty=1,2 - --result=pdftex-b.pdf pdftex-a -\stoptyping - -Odd and even page sets for non-duplex printers can be generated using -\type{-}\type{-pages=odd} and \type{-}\type{-pages=even} options -(which might require some disciplined shuffling of sheet). - -%*********************************************************************** - -\page - -\definehead[gnusection][subsection] -\definehead[gnusubject][subsubject] - -\setuphead[gnusection,gnusubject][style=\bfa,before=\blank,after=\blank,align={right,broad,nothyphenated}] - -\setuphead[gnusection][ownnumber=yes] - -\section{GNU Free Documentation License} - -\startnotmode[screen] - \switchtobodyfont[6.4pt] % squeeze everything onto two pages} - \setuplayout[grid=yes] - \setupcolumns[n=7] -\stopnotmode - -\startmode[screen] - \setupcolumns[n=2] -\stopmode - -\startcolumns[tolerance=verytolerant,distance=10pt] \widowpenalty10000 \clubpenalty10000 - -\startlines -Version 1.2, November 2002 -Copyright \copyright\ 2000, 2001, 2002 -Free Software Foundation, Inc. -59 Temple Place, Suite 330, -Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA -\stoplines - -Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies -of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. - -\gnusubject{Preamble} - -The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other -functional and useful document ``free'' in the sense of freedom: to -assure everyone the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it, -with or without modifying it, either commercially or noncommercially. -Secondarily, this License preserves for the author and publisher a way -to get credit for their work, while not being considered responsible -for modifications made by others. - -This License is a kind of ``copyleft'', which means that derivative -works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense. It -complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft -license designed for free software. - -We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for free -software, because free software needs free documentation: a free -program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms that the -software does. But this License is not limited to software manuals; -it can be used for any textual work, regardless of subject matter or -whether it is published as a printed book. We recommend this License -principally for works whose purpose is instruction or reference. - -\gnusection{1}{APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS} - -This License applies to any manual or other work, in any medium, that -contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can be -distributed under the terms of this License. Such a notice grants -a world-wide, royalty-free license, unlimited in duration, to use that -work under the conditions stated herein. The {\bf ``Document''}, below, -refers to any such manual or work. Any member of the public is -a licensee, and is addressed as {\bf ``you''}. You accept the license if you -copy, modify or distribute the work in a way requiring permission -under copyright law. - -A {\bf ``Modified Version''} of the Document means any work containing the -Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with -modifications and/or translated into another language. - -A {\bf ``Secondary Section''} is a named appendix or a front-matter section of -the Document that deals exclusively with the relationship of the -publishers or authors of the Document to the Document's overall subject -(or to related matters) and contains nothing that could fall directly -within that overall subject. (Thus, if the Document is in part -a textbook of mathematics, a Secondary Section may not explain any -mathematics.) The relationship could be a matter of historical -connection with the subject or with related matters, or of legal, -commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position regarding -them. - -The {\bf ``Invariant Sections''} are certain Secondary Sections whose titles -are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in the notice -that says that the Document is released under this License. If -a section does not fit the above definition of Secondary then it is not -allowed to be designated as Invariant. The Document may contain zero -Invariant Sections. If the Document does not identify any Invariant -Sections then there are none. - -The {\bf ``Cover Texts''} are certain short passages of text that are listed, -as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that says that -the Document is released under this License. A Front-Cover Text may -be at most 5 words, and a Back-Cover Text may be at most 25 words. - -A {\bf ``Transparent''} copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy, -represented in a format whose specification is available to the -general public, that is suitable for revising the document -straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images composed of -pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some widely available -drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text formatters or -for automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for input -to text formatters. A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file -format whose markup, or absence of markup, has been arranged to thwart -or discourage subsequent modification by PDF viewers is not Transparent. -An image format is not Transparent if used for any substantial amount -of text. A copy that is not ``Transparent'' is called {\bf ``Opaque''}. - -Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain -ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format, SGML -or XML using a publicly available DTD, and standard-conforming simple -HTML, \POSTSCRIPT\ or PDF designed for human modification. Examples of -transparent image formats include PNG, XCF and JPG. Opaque formats -include proprietary formats that can be read and edited only by -proprietary word processors, SGML or XML for which the DTD and/or -processing tools are not generally available, and the -machine-generated HTML, \POSTSCRIPT\ or PDF produced by some word -processors for output purposes only. - -The {\bf ''Title Page''} means, for a printed book, the title page itself, -plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the material -this License requires to appear in the title page. For works in -formats which do not have any title page as such, ``Title Page'' means -the text near the most prominent appearance of the work's title, -preceding the beginning of the body of the text. - -A section {\bf ``Entitled XYZ''} means a named subunit of the Document whose -title either is precisely XYZ or contains XYZ in parentheses following -text that translates XYZ in another language. (Here XYZ stands for -a specific section name mentioned below, such as {\bf ``Acknowledgements''}, -{\bf ``Dedications''}, {\bf ``Endorsements''}, or {\bf ``History''}.) -To {\bf ``Preserve the Title''} -of such a section when you modify the Document means that it remains -a section ``Entitled XYZ'' according to this definition. - -The Document may include Warranty Disclaimers next to the notice which -states that this License applies to the Document. These Warranty -Disclaimers are considered to be included by reference in this -License, but only as regards disclaiming warranties: any other -implication that these Warranty Disclaimers may have is void and has -no effect on the meaning of this License. - - -\gnusection{2}{VERBATIM COPYING} - -You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either -commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the -copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License applies -to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you add no other -conditions whatsoever to those of this License. You may not use -technical measures to obstruct or control the reading or further -copying of the copies you make or distribute. However, you may accept -compensation in exchange for copies. If you distribute a large enough -number of copies you must also follow the conditions in section 3. - -You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above, and -you may publicly display copies. - - -\gnusection{3}{COPYING IN QUANTITY} - -If you publish printed copies (or copies in media that commonly have -printed covers) of the Document, numbering more than 100, and the -Document's license notice requires Cover Texts, you must enclose the -copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these Cover -Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts on -the back cover. Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify -you as the publisher of these copies. The front cover must present -the full title with all words of the title equally prominent and -visible. You may add other material on the covers in addition. -Copying with changes limited to the covers, as long as they preserve -the title of the Document and satisfy these conditions, can be treated -as verbatim copying in other respects. - -If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit -legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit -reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto adjacent -pages. - -If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document numbering -more than 100, you must either include a machine-readable Transparent -copy along with each Opaque copy, or state in or with each Opaque copy -a computer-network location from which the general network-using -public has access to download using public-standard network protocols -a complete Transparent copy of the Document, free of added material. -If you use the latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps, -when you begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure -that this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated -location until at least one year after the last time you distribute an -Opaque copy (directly or through your agents or retailers) of that -edition to the public. - -It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of the -Document well before redistributing any large number of copies, to give -them a chance to provide you with an updated version of the Document. - - -\gnusection{4}{MODIFICATIONS} - -You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document under -the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above, provided that you release -the Modified Version under precisely this License, with the Modified -Version filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution -and modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy -of it. In addition, you must do these things in the Modified Version: - -\startitemize[A,packed] -\item - Use in the Title Page (and on the covers, if any) a title distinct - from that of the Document, and from those of previous versions - (which should, if there were any, be listed in the History section - of the Document). You may use the same title as a previous version - if the original publisher of that version gives permission. - -\item - List on the Title Page, as authors, one or more persons or entities - responsible for authorship of the modifications in the Modified - Version, together with at least five of the principal authors of the - Document (all of its principal authors, if it has fewer than five), - unless they release you from this requirement. - -\item - State on the Title page the name of the publisher of the - Modified Version, as the publisher. - -\item - Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document. - -\item - Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications - adjacent to the other copyright notices. - -\item - Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license notice - giving the public permission to use the Modified Version under the - terms of this License, in the form shown in the Addendum below. - -\item - Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant Sections - and required Cover Texts given in the Document's license notice. - -\item - Include an unaltered copy of this License. - -\item - Preserve the section Entitled ``History'', Preserve its Title, and add - to it an item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and - publisher of the Modified Version as given on the Title Page. If - there is no section Entitled ``History'' in the Document, create one - stating the title, year, authors, and publisher of the Document as - given on its Title Page, then add an item describing the Modified - Version as stated in the previous sentence. - -\item - Preserve the network location, if any, given in the Document for - public access to a Transparent copy of the Document, and likewise - the network locations given in the Document for previous versions - it was based on. These may be placed in the ``History'' section. - You may omit a network location for a work that was published at - least four years before the Document itself, or if the original - publisher of the version it refers to gives permission. - -\item - For any section Entitled ``Acknowledgements'' or ``Dedications'', - Preserve the Title of the section, and preserve in the section all - the substance and tone of each of the contributor acknowledgements - and/or dedications given therein. - -\item - Preserve all the Invariant Sections of the Document, - unaltered in their text and in their titles. Section numbers - or the equivalent are not considered part of the section titles. - -\item - Delete any section Entitled ``Endorsements''. Such a section - may not be included in the Modified Version. - -\item - Do not retitle any existing section to be Entitled ``Endorsements'' - or to conflict in title with any Invariant Section. - -\item - Preserve any Warranty Disclaimers. -\stopitemize - -If the Modified Version includes new front-matter sections or -appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no material -copied from the Document, you may at your option designate some or all -of these sections as invariant. To do this, add their titles to the -list of Invariant Sections in the Modified Version's license notice. -These titles must be distinct from any other section titles. - -You may add a section Entitled ``Endorsements'', provided it contains -nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various -parties---for example, statements of peer review or that the text has -been approved by an organization as the authoritative definition of -a standard. - -You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text, and -a passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end of the list -of Cover Texts in the Modified Version. Only one passage of -Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be added by (or -through arrangements made by) any one entity. If the Document already -includes a cover text for the same cover, previously added by you or -by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on behalf of, -you may not add another; but you may replace the old one, on explicit -permission from the previous publisher that added the old one. - -The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this License -give permission to use their names for publicity for or to assert or -imply endorsement of any Modified Version. - -\gnusection{5}{COMBINING DOCUMENTS} - -You may combine the Document with other documents released under this -License, under the terms defined in section 4 above for modified -versions, provided that you include in the combination all of the -Invariant Sections of all of the original documents, unmodified, and -list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined work in its -license notice, and that you preserve all their Warranty Disclaimers. - -The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and -multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single -copy. If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name but -different contents, make the title of each such section unique by -adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the original -author or publisher of that section if known, or else a unique number. -Make the same adjustment to the section titles in the list of -Invariant Sections in the license notice of the combined work. - -In the combination, you must combine any sections Entitled ``History'' -in the various original documents, forming one section Entitled -``History''; likewise combine any sections Entitled ``Acknowledgements'', -and any sections Entitled ``Dedications''. You must delete all sections -Entitled ``Endorsements''. - -\gnusection{6}{COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS} - -You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other documents -released under this License, and replace the individual copies of this -License in the various documents with a single copy that is included in -the collection, provided that you follow the rules of this License for -verbatim copying of each of the documents in all other respects. - -You may extract a single document from such a collection, and distribute -it individually under this License, provided you insert a copy of this -License into the extracted document, and follow this License in all -other respects regarding verbatim copying of that document. - -\gnusection{7}{AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS} - -A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other separate -and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of a storage or -distribution medium, is called an ``aggregate'' if the copyright -resulting from the compilation is not used to limit the legal rights -of the compilation's users beyond what the individual works permit. -When the Document is included in an aggregate, this License does not -apply to the other works in the aggregate which are not themselves -derivative works of the Document. - -If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these -copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one half of -the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be placed on -covers that bracket the Document within the aggregate, or the -electronic equivalent of covers if the Document is in electronic form. -Otherwise they must appear on printed covers that bracket the whole -aggregate. - -\gnusection{8}{TRANSLATION} - -Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may -distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section 4. -Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special -permission from their copyright holders, but you may include -translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the -original versions of these Invariant Sections. You may include -a translation of this License, and all the license notices in the -Document, and any Warranty Disclaimers, provided that you also include -the original English version of this License and the original versions -of those notices and disclaimers. In case of a disagreement between -the translation and the original version of this License or a notice -or disclaimer, the original version will prevail. - -If a section in the Document is Entitled ``Acknowledgements'', -``Dedications'', or ``History'', the requirement (section 4) to Preserve -its Title (section~1) will typically require changing the actual -title. - -\gnusection{9}{TERMINATION} - -You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document except -as expressly provided for under this License. Any other attempt to -copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Document is void, and will -automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, -parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this -License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such -parties remain in full compliance. - -\gnusection{10}{FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE} - -The Free Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions -of the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time. Such new -versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may -differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. See -https:/\!/gnu.org/copyleft/. - -Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number. -If the Document specifies that a particular numbered version of this -License ``or any later version'' applies to it, you have the option of -following the terms and conditions either of that specified version or -of any later version that has been published (not as a draft) by the -Free Software Foundation. If the Document does not specify a version -number of this License, you may choose any version ever published (not -as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. -\stopcolumns - -%*********************************************************************** - -\stopbackmatter - -%D And then we're done. - -% Evidently ConTeXt somewhere sets \pdfgentounicode=1. Or something. -% So insert the mappings. Seems like a good thing anyway. -\input glyphtounicode -\stoptext diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual/pdftex.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual/pdftex.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..2ca532568ba --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual/pdftex.tex @@ -0,0 +1,4354 @@ +% pdfTeX manual, rewritten in LaTeX from the ConTeXt original, +% Karl Berry, 2023. Content not significantly changed. +% Released under the GFDL v1.2+, same as the ConTeXt version. +% +% Not quite tagging-ready, numerous warnings like: +% Package tagpdf Warning: The structure Sect can not be closed. +% and ends with: +% ./pdftex.tex:4336: Package tagpdf Error: The number of automatic begin +% (1351) and end (1352) ... +% +%\DocumentMetadata{testphase={phase-III,table}} +\documentclass{pdftexmanual} +\svnscan $Id: pdftex.tex 921 2024-02-02 02:14:32Z karl $ + +% +\title{The pdf\TeX\ user manual} +\author{\THANH\ and others} +\date{\PDFTEX\ \currentpdftex\\ + \hspace*{1em}\\ \today\\ + \hspace*{1em}\\ \url{https://pdftex.org} + } + +\begin{document} +\hypersetup{pageanchor=false} % avoid hyperref duplicate page.1 warning +\maketitle +\hypersetup{pageanchor=true} % https://tex.stackexchange.com/questions/18924 +\setcounter{page}{2} + +\tableofcontents + +\chapter{Introduction} + +The main purpose of the \PDFTEX\ project is to create and maintain an +extension of \TEX\ that can produce \PDF\ output directly from \TEX\ +source files and improve\slash enhance the result of \TEX\ typesetting +with the help of \PDF\ output. When \PDF\ output is not selected, +\PDFTEX\ produces standard \DVI\ output. An important aspect of the +project is to investigate alternative justification algorithms; notably, +the margin kerning and font expansion algorithms following the \HZ\ +micro\hyph typography algorithm by Prof.~Hermann Zapf. + +\PDFTEX\ is maintained by \THANH, the original author, and others. The +\PDFTEX\ home page is \useurl{ptexorg}. Please send bug reports, +suggestions, etc., to the mailing list (\useurl{ptexbugs}). + +\PDFTEX\ is based on the original \TEX\ sources and \WEBC, and has been +successfully compiled on \UNIX, \WIN\ and many other systems. It is +actively maintained, with great care taken to keep new \PDFTEX\ versions +backward\hyph compatible with earlier ones. + +A conservative successor to \TEX, named \ETEX, was developed in the +1990s. Since \PDFTEX\ version 1.40, the \ETEX\ extensions are compiled +as part of the \PDFTEX\ engine and thus always available. For +documentation on the \ETEX\ extensions, see \useurl{etexctan}. + +Furthermore, \PDFTEX\ itself has acquired plenty of extensions over the +years which are not related specifically to \PDF\ output, generally new +primitives for various features that are inconvenient or impossible to +implement at the \TEX\ level. Many of these extensions have been adopted +across all engines (sometimes with different primitive names or variant +functionality), and some are required by \LATEX. Therefore, in most +distributions \type{etex} is a link to \type{pdftex}; the difference +being whether \DVI\ or \PDF\ output is generated by default. + +Other extensions are \MLTEX\ and \ENCTEX; these are also included in the +\PDFTEX\ implementation, although they are rarely used for new documents. + +\PDFTEX\ does not natively support \UTFEIGHT\ input text, +Unicode-encoded fonts, or anything else related to Unicode, as it was +written long before Unicode became widespread. Making those changes to +the engine now would necessarily create unacceptable incompatibilities, +so there are no plans to do so. Thus, when using \PDFTEX, \LaTeX\ and +other formats handle \UTFEIGHT\ (and other) input at the \TEX\ macro +level, which works well enough in practice for most documents. It is +also possible to use TrueType and OpenType fonts with \PDFTEX, if you +choose an 8-bit subset to be encoded. + +If you need a \TeX\ engine with native support for Unicode input, +TrueType fonts, OpenType fonts, please look into \LUATEX\ +(\useurl{luatex}) or \XETEX\ (\useurl{xetex}). + +\section{About this manual} + +This manual revision (\rcsrevision) covers \PDFTEX\ development up to +version \currentpdftex. The primary repository for both the manual and +the \PDFTEX\ sources is \useurl{ptexdevel}. The typeset manual in \PDF\ +format can be found on \CTAN\ in \useurl{ptexctan}. + +Thanks to the many people who have contributed to the manual. +Improvements are always possible, and bugs not unlikely. +Please send questions or suggestions via email at \useurl{ptexbugs}. + +\section{Legal notice} + +Copyright \copyright\ 1996--2024 \THANH. +Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document +under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.2 +or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; +with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. +A copy of the license is included in the section entitled ``GNU +Free Documentation License''. + +\section{About \PDF} + +Let's start with a very brief introduction to \PDF\ format. For our +example, the bit of \TeX\ source below (figure~\ref{fig.titlesource}) +generates the nearly-minimal \PDF\ file shown on the next page +(figure~\ref{fig.titleout}). Since compression is disabled, such a +\PDF\ file is rather verbose and readable. The first line +(\texttt{\%PDF-1.4}) specifies the \PDF\ version used. \PDF\ viewers are +supposed to silently skip over all elements they cannot handle. + +\begin{figure}[b] +\bigskip +\hrule +\medskip +\begin{verbatim} + \pdfoutput=1 + \pdfcompresslevel=0 + \pdfobjcompresslevel=0 + \pdfmapline{ptmr8r Times-Roman 2 <8r.enc} + \font\tenrm=ptmr8r + \tenrm + Welcome to pdf\TeX! + \end +\end{verbatim} +\vspace{-\baselineskip} +\caption{This plain \TeX\ source generates \PDF\ output shown in + figure~\ref{fig.titleout}.} +\label{fig.titlesource} +\end{figure} + +\begin{figure}[p] +% Why isn't \vsize enough? +\includegraphics[height=1.27\vsize,alt={small PDF file}] + {incl/pdfmin-crop.pdf} +\caption{The \PDF\ output for the \TeX\ source in figure~\ref{fig.titlesource}.} +\label{fig.titleout} +\end{figure} + +A \PDF\ file consists of objects. These objects can be recognized by their +number and keywords. For example, over in the second column, we can see +(modulo editorial line breaks): + +\begin{verbatim} +9 0 obj << /Type /Catalog /Pages 5 0 R >> endobj +\end{verbatim} + +Here \verb|9 0 obj ... endobj| is the object capsule. The first number +is the object number (no.~9). The sequence \verb|5 0 R| is an object +reference, that is, a pointer to another object (no.~5). The second +number (here a zero) is currently not used in \PDFTEX; it is the version +number of the object. It is, for instance, used by \PDF\ editors, when +they replace objects by new ones. + +When a viewer opens a \PDF\ file, it goes to the end of the file, +looking for the keyword \type{startxref}. The number after +\type{startxref} gives the absolute position (byte offset from the file +start) of the so\hyph called ``object cross-reference table'' that +begins with the keyword \type{xref}. This table in turn tells the byte +offsets of all objects that make up the \PDF\ file, providing fast +random access to the individual objects (here the \type{xref} table +shows 11~objects, numbered from~0 to~10; object no.~0 is always unused). +The actual starting point of the file's object structure is defined +after the \type{trailer}: the \type{/Root} entry points to the +\type{/Catalog} object (no.~9). In this object the viewer can find the +pointer \type{/Pages} to the page list object (no.~5). In our example we +have only one page. The trailer also usually holds an \type{/Info} +entry, which points to an object (no.~10) with a bit more about the +document. We can follow the thread: + +\begin{quote} +\type{/Root} $\longrightarrow$ object~9 $\longrightarrow$ +\type{/Pages} $\longrightarrow$ object~5 $\longrightarrow$ +\type{/Kids} $\longrightarrow$ object~2 $\longrightarrow$ +\type{/Contents} $\longrightarrow$ object~3 +\end{quote} + +As soon as we add annotations, a fancy word for hyperlinks and the like, +some more entries will be present in the catalog. We invite users to +take a look at the \PDF\ code of this file to get an impression of that. + +The page content is a stream of drawing operations. Such a stream can be +compressed, where the level of compression can be set with +\cs{pdfcompresslevel} (compression is switched off for the title page). +Let's take a closer look at this stream in object~3. Often (but not in +our example) there is a transformation matrix, six numbers followed by +\type{cm}. As in \POSTSCRIPT, the operator comes after the operands. +Between \type{BT} and \type{ET} comes the text. A font is selected by a +\type{Tf} operator, which is given a font resource name \type{/F..} and +the font size. The actual text goes into parentheses \type{()} so that +it creates a \POSTSCRIPT\ string. The numbers in bracket pairs provide +horizontal movements like spaces and fine glyph positioning (kerning). +When one analyzes a file produced by a less sophisticated typesetting +engine, whole sequences of words can be recognized. In \PDF\ files +generated by \PDFTEX\ however, many words come out rather fragmented, +mainly because a lot of kerning takes place; in our example the +\type{80} moves the text \type{(elcome)} left towards the letter +\type{(W)} by 80/1000 of the font size. \PDF\ viewers in search mode +simply ignore the kerning information in these text streams. When a +document is searched, the search engine reconstructs the text from these +(string) snippets. + +Every \type{/Page} object points also to a \type{/Resources} object +(no.~1) that gives all ingredients needed to assemble the page. In our +example only a \type{/Font} object (no.~4) is referenced, which in turn +tells that the text is typeset in \type{/Font} \type{/Times-Roman}. The +\type{/Font} object points also to a \type{/Widths} array (object no.~7) +that tells for each character by how much the viewer must move forward +horizontally after typesetting a glyph. + +More details about the font can be found in the \type{/FontDescriptor} +object (no.~8); if a font file is embedded, this object points to the +font program stream. But as the Times-Roman font used for our example is +one of the 14 so\hyph called standard fonts that should always be present in +any \PDF\ viewer and therefore need not be embedded in the \PDF\ file, +it is left out here for brevity. However, when we use for instance a +Computer Modern Roman font, we have to make sure that this font is later +available to the \PDF\ viewer, and the best way to do this is to embed +the font. It's highly recommended nowadays to embed even the standard +fonts; you can't know how it looks exactly at the viewer side unless you +embed every font. + +In this simple file we don't specify in what way the file should be +opened, for instance full screen or clipped. A closer look at the page +object no.~2 (\type{/Type/Page}) shows that a mediabox +(\type{/MediaBox}) is part of the page description. A mediabox acts like +the (high-resolution) bounding box in a \POSTSCRIPT\ file. \PDFTEX\ +users can add dictionary entries to page objects with the +\cs{pdfpageattr} primitive. + +Although in most cases macro packages will shield users from these +internals, \PDFTEX\ provides access to many of the entries described +here, either automatically by translating the \TEX\ data structures into +\PDF\ ones, or manually by pushing entries to the catalog, page, info or +self-created objects. One can for instance create an object by using +\cs{pdfobj}, after which \cs{pdflastobj} returns its number. So + +\begin{verbatim} +\pdfobj { << /Type/ExtGState /LW 2 >> } +\end{verbatim} + +\noindent inserts an object into the \PDF\ file (it creates a ``graphics +state'' object setting the line width to 2~units), and \cs{pdflastobj} +now returns the number \PDFTEX\ assigned to this object. Unless objects +are referenced by others, they will just end up as isolated entities, +not doing any real harm but bloating the \PDF\ file. + +In general this rather direct way of pushing objects in the \PDF\ files +by primitives like \cs{pdfobj} is not very useful, and only makes +sense when implementing, say, fill\hyph in field support or annotation +content reuse. We will come to that later. + +Of course, this is just the barest introduction to \PDF\ format. For +those who want to learn more about technical \PDF\ details, the best bet +is to read the \PDFReference\ (\useurl{pdfreference}). + +We turn now to the specifics of \PDFTEX. + +\chapter{Invoking \PDFTEX} + +\PDFTEX\ has many command line options and can use many environment +variables and configuration file settings. Except for the simple and +rarely-used \type{-draftmode} and \type{-output-format} options, they +are all inherited from the common framework for \TeX\ engines as +implemented in \WEBC\ and Kpathsea. Their documentation is available at +\useurl{webc} and \useurl{kpathsea}. + +Two additional environment variables need more description here: first, +\type{SOURCE_DATE_EPOCH} (introduced in version 1.40.17, 2016). If this +is set, it must be a positive integer (with one trivial exception: if it +is set but empty, that is equivalent to 0). Non-integer values cause a +fatal error. The value is used as the current time in seconds since the +usual Unix ``epoch'': the beginning of 1970-01-01, UTC. Thus, a value of +\type{32} would result in a \type{/CreationDate} and \type{/ModDate} +values of \type{19700101000032Z}. This is useful for reproducible builds +of documents. (See also \cs{pdfinfoomitdate}, \cs{pdfsuppressptexinfo}, +et al.) + +The second, related, environment variable is \type{FORCE_SOURCE_DATE}. +If this is set to~\type{1}, \TEX's time-related primitives are also +initialized from the value of \type{SOURCE_DATE_EPOCH}. These primitives +are \cs{year}, \cs{month}, \cs{day}, and \cs{time}. If +\type{SOURCE_DATE_EPOCH} is not set, setting \type{FORCE_SOURCE_DATE} +has no effect. If \type{FORCE_SOURCE_DATE} is unset, set to the empty +string, or set to~\type{0}, the primitives reflect the current time as +usual. Any other value elicits a warning, and the current time is used. +This is useful if one wants to make reproducible \PDF{}s for a set +of documents without changing them in any way, \eg\ an operating system +distribution with manuals that use \cs{today}. Except in such unusual +circumstances, it is better not to set this, and let the \TEX\ +primitives retain the meaning they have always had. + +In addition, if both \type{SOURCE_DATE_EPOCH} and +\type{FORCE_SOURCE_DATE} are set, \cs{pdffilemoddate} returns a value +in UTC, ending in \type{Z}. (The values of the environment variables are +irrelevant in this case.) + +Finally, just to have the list of options and basic invocation at hand, +here is a verbatim listing of the \type{--help} and \type{--version} +output. All options can be specified with one or two dashes and +unambiguously abbreviated. + +\myverbatiminput{incl/pdftex-help.txt} + +\section{Macro packages supporting \PDFTEX} + +Currently all mainstream macro packages offer \PDFTEX\ support, with +automatic detection of \PDFTEX\ as engine. So there is normally no need +to turn on \PDFTEX\ support explicitly. + +\begin{itemize} +\item For \LATEX\ users, the \type {hyperref} package (originally + written by Sebastian Rahtz and Heiko Oberdiek; now maintained by + the \LaTeX\ team, has substantial support for \PDFTEX\ and + provides access to most of its features. In the simplest and most + common case, the user merely needs to load \type{hyperref}, and + all cross\hyph references will be converted to \PDF\ hypertext + links. \PDF\ output is automatically selected, compression is + turned on, and the \PDF\ page size is set up correctly. Bookmarks + are created to match the table of contents. + +\item The standard \LATEX\ packages \type{graphics}, \type{graphicx}, and + \type{color} also have built-in \PDFTEX\ support, which allows + use of color, text rotation, and graphics inclusion commands. + +\item The \CONTEXT\ MkII system by Hans Hagen has full support + for \PDFTEX\ in its generalized hypertext features. + The latest \CONTEXT\ supports advanced \PDF\ output, but + uses a engine (\LMTX). + +\item \PDF\ from \GNU\ \TEXINFO\ documents can be created by running + \PDFTEX\ on the \TEXINFO\ file, instead of \TEX. Alternatively, + run the shell command \type{texi2pdf} instead of \type{texi2dvi}. + +\item For plain \TEX\ users, the \filename{miniltx.tex} file from the + \type{graphics-pln} package allows loading \type{graphics}, + \type{graphicx}, and \type{color}. \EPLAIN\ provides additional + support for hyperlinks. + +\item A modification of \filename {webmac.tex}, named \filename + {pdfwebmac.tex}, allows production of hyperlinked \PDF\ versions + of the literate source code written in \WEB, such as \PDFTEX. + +\end{itemize} + +For \TeX\ developers: as \PDFTEX\ generates the final \PDF\ output +without help of a postprocessor, macro packages that take care of these +\PDF\ features have to be set up properly. Tasks include handling color, +graphics, hyperlink support, threading, fonts, page imposition and +manipulation. All of these \PDF\hyph specific tasks can be controlled by +\PDFTEX's own primitives (a few also by a \PDFTEX\hyph specific +\verb|\special{pdf: ...}|). Any other \cs{special} commands, like the +ones defined for various \DVI\ postprocessors, are simply ignored by +\PDFTEX\ when in \PDF\ output mode; a warning is given for non\hyph +empty \cs{special} commands. + +When a macro package written for classical \TEX\ with \DVI\ output is to +be modified for use with \PDFTEX, it is helpful to get some insight to +what extent \PDFTEX\hyph specific support is needed. This info can be +gathered, for instance, by outputting the various \cs{special} commands +via \cs{message}. as in: + +\begin{verbatim} +\pdfoutput=1 \let\special\message +\end{verbatim} + +or, if this leads to confusion, + +\begin{verbatim} +\pdfoutput=1 \def\special#1{\write16{special: #1}} +\end{verbatim} + +and see what happens. As soon as one \type{special:} message turns up, +one knows for sure that some kind of \PDFTEX\hyph specific support is +needed, and often the message itself gives a indication of what is +needed. + +\chapter{Setting up fonts} + +\PDFTEX\ can work with Type~1 and TrueType fonts (and to a small extent +also with OpenType fonts). Font files should be available and embedded +for all fonts used in the generated \PDF. It is possible to use +\METAFONT\hyph generated fonts in \PDFTEX---but it is strongly +recommended not to use these fonts if an equivalent is available in +Type~1 or TrueType format, if only because bitmap Type~3 fonts render +poorly under enlargement. + +\section{Map files} +\label{sec.mapfile} + +Font map files provide the connection between \TEX\ \TFM\ font files +and outline font file names. They contain also information about +re\hyph encoding arrays, partial font embedding (``subsetting''), and +character transformation parameters (like SlantFont and ExtendFont). Those +map files were first created for \DVI\ postprocessors. But, as \PDFTEX\ +in \PDF\ output mode includes all \PDF\ processing steps, it also needs +to know about font mapping, and therefore reads in one or more map files. +Map files are not read in when \PDFTEX\ is in \DVI\ mode. Bitmap fonts +can (and normally should) be used without being listed in the map file. + +By default, \PDFTEX\ reads the map file \filename{pdftex.map}. In \WEBC, +map files are searched for using the \type{TEXFONTMAPS} config file value +and environment variable. By default, the current directory and various +system directories are searched. + +Within the map file, each font is listed on a single line. The syntax of +each line is upward\hyph compatible with \type{dvips} map files and can contain +the following fields (some are optional; explanations follow): + +\begin{quote} +\varname{tfmname psname fontflags special encodingfile fontfile} +\end{quote} + +Here are two (real-world) examples. All the values are explained in +detail in the following. + +{\small \begin{verbatim} +cmr10 CMR10 <cmr10.pfb +ptmr8y NimbusRomNo9L-Regu " TeXnANSIEncoding ReEncodeFont " <texnansi.enc <utmr8a.pfb +\end{verbatim} +\par % needed for tagging; alternative: \begin{small}...\end{small} + % another alternative: \AddToHookNext{env/verbatim/begin}{\small} +} + +It is mandatory that \varname{tfmname} is the first field. If a +\varname{psname} is given, it must be the second field. Similarly if +\varname{fontflags} is given it must be the third field (if +\varname{psname} is present) or the second field (if \varname{psname} is +left out). The positions of \varname{special}, \varname{encodingfile}, +and \varname{fontfile} can be mixed. + +\subsection{Map lines: \varname{tfmname}} +\label{sec.map-tfmname} + +The \varname{tfmname} field specifies the name of the \TFM\ file for a +font---the file name given in a \TEX\ \cs{font} command. This name must +always be given, with no extension. Examples: \type{cmr10}, +\type{ptmr8y}. + +\subsection{Map lines: \varname{psname}} + +The \varname{psname} field specifies the \POSTSCRIPT\ (or other outline) +font name, as defined within the outline font file. Examples: +\type{CMR10}, \type{NimbusRomNo9L-Regu}. It is highly recommended to use +the \varname{psname} field, but strictly speaking it is optional. It has +two main uses. + +First, when a \PDF\ file is embedded by \cs{pdfximage}, the +\type{/BaseFont} names in the font dictionaries of Type~1 and Type~1C +(CFF) fonts from the embedded \PDF\ file are checked against this {\em +psname} field. If names match, the glyphs of that font will not be +copied from the embedded \PDF\ file, but instead a local font is opened, +and all needed glyphs will be taken from the Type~1 font file that is +mentioned in the map line (see \varname{fontfile} below). By this +collecting mechanism Type~1 glyphs can be shared between several +embedded \PDF\ files and with text that is typeset by \PDFTEX, which +helps keep the resulting \PDF\ file size smaller, if many files with +similar Type~1(C) fonts are embedded. Replacing Type~1 fonts from +embedded \PDF\ files requires that also a Type~1 font file name is in +the \varname{fontfile} field (see below). + +Second, if a font file is not to be embedded into the \PDF\ output +(\varname{fontfile} field missing), then the \varname{psname} field will +be copied to the \type{/BaseFont} and \type{/FontName} dictionary +entries in the \PDF\ file, so that the \POSTSCRIPT\ font name will be +known to viewers and other \PDF-reading applications. + +\subsection{Map lines: \emph{fontflags}} + +The \emph{fontflags} field optionally specifies various characteristics +of the font. The following description of these flags is taken, with +slight modification, from the \PDFReference\ (the section on font +descriptor flags). Viewers may adapt their rendering to these flags, +especially when they substitute for a non-embedded font. + +The value of the flags key in a font descriptor is a 32-bit integer that +contains a collection of boolean attributes. These attributes are true +if the corresponding bit is set to~1. The following table specifies the +meanings of the bits, with bit~1 being the least significant. Reserved +bits must be set to zero. + +\begin{smalltable} +\begin{tabular}{cl} +\bf bit position & \bf semantics \cr +1 & Fixed-width font \cr +2 & Serif font \cr +3 & Symbolic font \cr +4 & Script font \cr +5 & Reserved \cr +6 & Uses the Adobe Standard Roman character set \cr +7 & Italic \cr +8--16 & Reserved \cr +17 & All-capitals font \cr +18 & Small-capitals font \cr +19 & Force bold at small text sizes \cr +20--32 & Reserved \cr +\end{tabular} +\end{smalltable} + +The first several bits specify the general type of font. All characters +in a \emph{fixed-width} font (a.k.a.\ monospaced, typewriter) have the +same width, while characters in a proportional font have different +widths. Characters in a \emph{serif font} have short strokes drawn at an +angle on the top and bottom of character stems, while sans serif fonts +do not have such strokes. A \emph{symbolic font} contains symbols rather +than letters and numbers. Characters in a \emph{script font} resemble +cursive handwriting. An \emph{all-capitals} font, which is typically +used for display purposes such as titles or headlines, contains no +lowercase letters. It differs from a \emph{small-capitals} font in that +characters in the latter, while also capital letters, have been sized +and their proportions adjusted so that they have the same size and +stroke weight as lowercase characters in the same typeface family. + +Bit~6 in the flags field indicates that the font's character set +conforms to the Adobe Standard Roman Character Set, or a subset of that, +and that it uses the standard names for those characters. + +Finally, bit~19 is used to determine whether or not bold characters are +drawn with extra pixels even at very small text sizes. Typically, when +characters are drawn at small sizes on very low resolution devices such +as display screens, features of bold characters may appear only one pixel +wide. Because this is the minimum feature width on a pixel\hyph based device, +ordinary non\hyph bold characters also appear with one\hyph pixel wide features, +and thus cannot be distinguished from bold characters. If bit~19 is set, +features of bold characters may be thickened at small text sizes. + +If the \varname{fontflags} field is not given, and the font is embedded, +\PDFTEX\ treats it as the value~4 (decimal, that is, bit position 3 is +set), a symbolic font. For non-embedded fonts, the default value is +\type{0x22}, a non-symbolic serif font. If you do not know the correct +value, it is best not to specify it at all, as specifying a bad value of +font flags may cause trouble in viewers. On the other hand this option +is not absolutely useless because it provides backward compatibility +with older map files (see the \varname{fontfile} description below). + +\subsection{Map lines: \varname{special}} + +The \varname{special} field specifies font manipulations in the same way +as \type{dvips}. Currently only the keywords \type{SlantFont} and +\type{ExtendFont} are interpreted; other instructions (notably +\type{ReEncodeFont} and its parameters, see \varname{encoding} below) +are ignored. The permitted \type{SlantFont} range is $-1..1$; for +\type{ExtendFont} it's $-2..2$. The text of the \varname{special} field +must be enclosed by ASCII double quote characters: \type{"}. + +\subsection{Map lines: \varname{encodingfile}} + +The \varname{encodingfile} field specifies the name of the file +containing the external encoding vector to be used for the font. The +encoding file name must have the extension \type{.enc}, and the file +name including extension must be given with either a preceding~\type{<} +character or a preceding~\type{<[}. The format of the encoding vector is +identical to that used by \type{dvips}. If no encoding is specified, the +font's built\hyph in default encoding is used. The +\varname{encodingfile} field may be omitted if you are sure that the +font resource has the correct built-in encoding. In general this option +is highly recommended, and it is required when subsetting a TrueType +font. + +Starting with \PDFTEX\ version 1.40.19, an encoding file can also be +specified for bitmap \PK\ fonts. In this case, it assigns the glyph +names from the given encoding vector, which can be used with the +\cs{pdfglyphtounicode} primitive (q.v.). For example: + +\begin{verbatim} +\pdfglyphtounicode{ffi}{0066 0066 0069} % normally: \input glyphtounicode +\pdfgentounicode=1 +\pdfmapline{cmb10 <7t.enc} +\font\cmb=cmb10 \cmb ffi +\end{verbatim} + +The result is a \PDF\ file with a correctly-labeled \type{/ffi} +character instead of the numeric character position in \type{cmb10.tfm} +(decimal 14). + +\subsection{Map lines: \varname{fontfile}} + +The \varname{fontfile} field sets the name of the font file to be +embedded into the \PDF\ output for a given \TeX\ font; the +\varname{tfmname}~$\leftrightarrow$~\varname{fontfile} mapping is the +most prominent use of the \filename{pdftex.map} file. + +The font file name must refer to a Type~1 or TrueType font file. If the +\varname{fontfile} field is missing, no font embedding can take place; a +warning will be given, unless the \varname{psname} field contain one of +the 14 standard font names. Not embedding all fonts in a \PDF\ file is +troublesome, as this forces the \PDF\ viewer to use or synthesize a +replacement, typically with awful results. + +The font file name should be preceded by one or two special characters, +specifying how to handle the font file: + +\begin{itemize} +\item If the font file name is preceded by a \type{<} character + (as in \type{<cmr10.pfb}), the font file will be only partially + embedded in the \PDF\ output (``subsetted''), meaning that only + used glyphs are written to the \PDF\ file. This is the most + common use and is \emph{strongly recommended} for any font, as it + ensures the portability and reduces the size of the \PDF\ output. + Subsetted fonts are included in such a way that name and cache + clashes are minimized. + +\item If the font file name is preceded by a double \type{<<}, the font + file will be included entirely---all glyphs of the font are + embedded, including even those not used in the document. Apart + from increasing the \PDF\ output size, this option may cause + troubles with TrueType fonts, so it is normally not recommended + for Type~1 or TrueType fonts. But this is currently the only mode + that allows the use of OpenType fonts. This mode might also be + useful in case the font is atypical and cannot be subsetted well + by \PDFTEX. {\em Beware: proprietary font vendors typically + forbid full font inclusion.} + +\item As of \PDFTEX\ version 1.40.0, if no special character precedes + the font file name, it is ignored, with a warning. You achieve + exactly the same \PDF\ result if you just remove the font file + name from the map entry. Then the glyph widths that go into the + \PDF~file are extracted from the \TFM~file, and a font descriptor + object is created that contains approximations of the font + metrics for the selected font. + +\item Specifying the {\em psname} and no font file name is only useful + as a last-ditch fallback when you do not want to embed the font + (\eg\ due to font license restrictions), but wish to use the font + metrics and let the \PDF\ viewer generate instances that look + close to the used font, in case the font resource is not + installed on the system where the \PDF\ output will be viewed or + printed. To use this feature, the font flags {\em must} be + specified, and it must have the bit~6 set on, which means that + only fonts with the Adobe Standard Roman character set can be + simulated. The only exception is the case of a symbolic font. + In these days of Unicode, these font approximations are not + likely to be useful. +\end{itemize} + +If you encounter problematic lookups, for instance if \PDFTEX\ tries +to open a \type{.pfa} file instead of a \type{.pfb}, you can add +the suffix to the filename. In this respect, \PDFTEX\ completely relies +on the Kpathsea library. + +For Type~1 and TrueType fonts, the font file will be included only once +in the \PDF\ output, regardless of how many \TeX\ \cs{font} instances +are used in the document. For instance, given + +\begin{verbatim} +\font\a = cmr12 +\font\b = cmr12 at 11pt +\end{verbatim} + +the outline file \type{cmr12.pfb} will only be included once in the +\PDF, and merely scaled down to create the instance for \cs{b}. + +If a used font is not present in the map files, \PDFTEX\ will try to use +\PK~fonts as most \DVI\ drivers do, creating \PK~fonts on-the-fly if +needed. This is the normal, and recommended, way to use bitmap fonts. + +\subsection{Map lines: summary} + +To summarize this rather complex story, let's look at some more example +map lines. The most common way is to embed only a subset of glyphs from +a font for a particular desired encoding, here~\type{8r}: + +\begin{verbatim} +ptmri8r Times-Italic <8r.enc <ptmri8a.pfb +\end{verbatim} + +Without re-encoding it looks like this: + +\begin{verbatim} +cmr10 CMR10 <cmr10.pfb +\end{verbatim} + +\type{SlantFont} and \type{ExtendFont} fields are specified as with +\type{dvips}: + +\begin{verbatim} +psyro StandardSymL ".167 SlantFont" <usyr.pfb +pcrr8rn Courier ".85 ExtendFont" <8r.enc <pcrr8a.pfb +\end{verbatim} + +Entirely embed a font into the \PDF\ file without and with re-encoding +(not typically useful): + +\begin{verbatim} +fmvr8x MarVoSym <<marvosym.pfb +pgsr8r GillSans <8r.enc <<pgsr8a.pfb +\end{verbatim} + +A TrueType font can be used in the same way as a Type~1 font: + +\begin{verbatim} +verdana8r Verdana <8r.enc <verdana.ttf +\end{verbatim} + +Finally, a few cases with non-embedded fonts. If the font file is +missing, the viewer application will have to use its own approximation +of the missing font (with and without re-encoding): + +\begin{verbatim} +ptmr8r Times-Roman <8r.enc +psyr Symbol +\end{verbatim} + +In the final example the numerical font flags (bit position 6) specify +using the Adobe Standard Roman character set, so the viewer might try an +approximation: + +\begin{verbatim} +pgsr8r GillSans 32 +\end{verbatim} + +Not embedding fonts is rather risky and should generally be avoided. The +recommendation these days is to embed all fonts, even the 14 standard +ones. + +\section{Helper tools for TrueType fonts: \texttt{ttf2afm}} + +As mentioned above, \PDFTEX\ can work with TrueType fonts. Defining +TrueType fonts is similar to Type~1. The only extra thing to do with +TrueType is to create a \TFM\ file. There is a program called +\type{ttf2afm} in the \PDFTEX\ distribution which can be used to extract +\AFM\ from TrueType fonts (another conversion program is +\type{ttf2pt1}). Basic usage of \type{ttf2afm}: + +\begin{verbatim} +ttf2afm -e encfile.enc -o output.afm input.ttf +\end{verbatim} + +A TrueType file can be recognized by its suffix \filename{ttf}. +If no \type{-o} option is given, \type{ttf2afm} writes the output \AFM\ +to standard output. + +The optional \varname{encfile} specifies the encoding, which is the same +as the encoding vector used in map files for \PDFTEX\ and \type{dvips}. +That is, it must be an 8-bit encoding, not Unicode. If the encoding is +not given, all the glyphs of the \AFM\ output will be mapped to +\type{/.notdef}. If we need to know which glyphs are available in the +font, we can run \type{ttf2afm} without any \type{-e} to get all glyph +names. The resulting \AFM\ file can be used to generate a \TFM\ by +applying the \filename {afm2tfm} utility. + +To use a new TrueType font the minimal steps may look like below, supposing +that a map file \filename {test.map} is used. + +\begin{verbatim} +ttf2afm -e 8r.enc -o times.afm times.ttf +afm2tfm times.afm -T 8r.enc +echo "times TimesNewRomanPSMT <8r.enc <times.ttf" >>test.map +\end{verbatim} + +There are a limitations with TrueType fonts in comparison with +Type~1 fonts: + +\begin{itemize} +\item The special effects SlantFont\slash ExtendFont did not work + before version 1.40.0. +\item To subset a TrueType font, the font must be specified as re\hyph + encoded, therefore an encoding vector must be given. +\item TrueType fonts used in embedded \PDF\ files are kept + untouched; they are not replaced or merged with the same font + used in the document, as happens with Type~1. +\end{itemize} + +For much more about \PDFTEX\ and TrueType fonts, including many details +on handling glyph names, see ``A closer look at TrueType fonts and +\PDFTEX'', \titleref{TUGboat} 30:1 (2009), pp.~32\hyph 34, +\useurl{thanhtruetypetub}. + +\chapter{\PDFTEX\ primitives} +\label{sec.primitives} + +Here follows a description of the primitives added by \PDFTEX\ to the +original \TEX\ engine (other extensions by \ETEX, \MLTEX\ and \ENCTEX\ +are not described). Many of these primitives are described further in +the \filename {samplepdf.tex} file in the \PDFTEX\ distribution (q.v.). + +If the output is \DVI, then the \PDFTEX-specific dimension parameters +are not used at all. However, some \PDFTEX\ integer parameters can +affect \DVI\ as well as \PDF\ output (specifically, \cs{pdfoutput} and +\cs{pdfadjustspacing}). + +A warning to macro writers: if you define macros whose names start with +\cs{pdf}, you risk name clashes with new primitives that may be +introduced in future versions of \PDFTEX. + +General warning: many of these new primitives, for example \cs{pdfdest} +and \cs{pdfoutline}, write their arguments directly to the \PDF\ output +file (when producing \PDF), as \PDF\ string constants. This means that +\emph{you} (or, more likely, the macros you write) must escape +characters as necessary (namely \cs{}, \type{(}, and \type{)}. +Otherwise, an invalid \PDF\ file may result. The \type{hyperref} and +\TEXINFO\ packages have code which may serve as a starting point for +implementing this, although it will certainly need to be adapted to any +particular situation. + +\section{Document setup} + +\subsection{\cs{pdfoutput}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfoutput} \Whatever{integer}}} + +This parameter specifies whether the output format should be \DVI\ or +\PDF. A positive value means \PDF\ output, otherwise (default 0) one +gets \DVI\ output. This primitive is the only one that must be set to +produce \PDF\ output (the command-line option \type{-output-format=pdf} +may alternatively be used); all other primitives are optional. This +parameter cannot be specified \emph{after} shipping out the first page. +In other words, to get \PDF\ output, we have to set \cs{pdfoutput} +before \PDFTEX\ the first page. + +A simple way of making macros aware of \PDFTEX\ in both \PDF\ or \DVI\ +mode is: + +\begin{verbatim} +\ifx\pdfoutput\undefined \csname newcount\endcsname\pdfoutput \fi +\ifcase\pdfoutput DVI CODE \else PDF CODE \fi +\end{verbatim} + +Using the \type{ifpdf.sty} file, which works with both \LATEX\ and plain +\TeX, is a cleaner way of doing this. Originally, the simple test +\verb|\ifx\pdfoutput\undefined| sufficed; but for many years, the +\PDFTEX\ engine is used in distributions also for non-\PDF\ formats +(\eg\ \LATEX), so \cs{pdfoutput} may be defined even when the output +format is \DVI. + +\subsection{\cs{pdfmajorversion}, \cs{pdfminorversion}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfmajorversion} \Whatever{integer}}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfminorversion} \Whatever{integer}}} + +Together, these two primitives specify the \PDF\ version for generated \PDF\ +output. The defaults compiled into the \PDFTEX\ program are +\cs{pdfmajorversion=1} and \cs{pdfminorversion=4}, thus \PDF~1.4 +is generated by default. + +However, distributions typically alter the engine's compiled default +minor version of~4 when building formats. For example, as of 2010, +\TEXLIVE\ sets \cs{pdfminorversion=5} when formats are built. This is +so object compression can be enabled (see \cs{pdfobjcompress} below). + +This value also defines the highest \PDF\ version for included \PDF{}s +to be allowed without error, by default (see +\cs{pdfinclusionerrorlevel}). + +The values for both must be $\ge1$ but are not checked further. +Furthermore, they are set independently; setting only +\cs{pdfmajorversion=2} would result in \PDF~2.4 output; it's +necessary to additionally set \cs{pdfminorversion}. + +If specified, these primitives must appear before any data is written to +the generated \PDF\ file. The \cs{pdfmajorversion} primitive was +introduced in \PDFTEX\ 1.40.21. \cs{pdfminorversion} was originally a +synonym of the \cs{pdfoptionpdfminorversion} command, which is now +obsolete. \introduced{1.30.0} + +\subsection{\cs{pdfcompresslevel}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfcompresslevel} \Whatever{integer}}} + +This integer parameter specifies the level of stream compression. Zero +means no compression, 1~means fastest, 9~means best, $2..8$ means +something in between. A value outside this range will be adjusted to the +nearest meaningful value. This parameter is read each time \PDFTEX\ +starts a stream. + +This compression applies to text, inline graphics, and embedded \PNG\ +images (but only if they are un- and re-compressed during the embedding +process). It is implemented by the \type{zlib} library). + +Setting \cs{pdfcompresslevel=0} is useful for \PDF\ stream debugging. + +\subsection{\cs{pdfobjcompresslevel}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfobjcompresslevel} \Whatever{integer}}} + +This integer parameter controls the compression of non-stream objects. +If specified, the parameter must appear before any data is written to +the \PDF\ output. \introduced{1.40.0} + +In the \PDF-1.4 specification, non-stream objects had to be written in +the \PDF\ file as clear text, uncompressed. The \PDF-1.5 specification +allows collecting non-stream objects as ``compressed objects'' into +``object stream'' objects (\type{/Type/ObjStm}, see the \PDFReference, +5th~ed., \S3.4.6). At the end of the \PDF\ file, an \type{/XRef} +cross-reference stream is then written out instead of the object table. +This can result in a considerably smaller \PDF\ file, particularly if +lots of annotations and links are used. + +The writing of compressed objects is enabled by setting +\cs{pdfobjcompresslevel} to a value between~1 and~3; it's disabled if~0 +(default). Object compression also requires +$\cs{pdfminorversion}\ge5$ (or $\cs{pdfmajorversion}\ge2$), else +a warning is given and the compression is disabled. The value of +\cs{pdfobjcompresslevel} is clipped to the range $0..3$, but using +values outside this range is not recommended (for future extension). + +Values for \cs{pdfobjcompresslevel} have the following effects: + +\begin{itemize} +\item When set to~0, no object streams are generated at all. + +\item When set to~1, +all non-stream objects are compressed with the exception of any objects +coming with embedded \PDF\ files (``paranoid'' mode, to avoid yet unknown +problems), and also the \type{/Info} dictionary is not compressed for +clear-text legibility. + +\item When set to~2, also all non-stream objects coming +with embedded \PDF\ files are compressed, but the \type{/Info} dictionary +is still not compressed. + +\item Finally, when set to~3, all non-stream objects +are compressed, including the \type{/Info} dictionary (this means that +the \type{/Info} can't be read as clear text any more). If object streams +are to be used, currently \cs{pdfobjcompresslevel=2} is recommended, +and is so specified in some distributions, including \TEXLIVE~2010 and later. +\end{itemize} + +\emph{Compatibility caveats:} \PDF\ files generated with object +streams enabled can't be read with (sufficiently old) \PDF\ viewers that +don't understand \PDF-1.5 files. For widest distribution and unknown +audience, don't activate object stream writing. The \PDF-1.5 standard +describes also a hybrid object compression mode that gives some backward +compatibility, but this is currently not implemented, as \PDF-1.5 was +rather quickly adopted by modern \PDF\ viewers. Also not implemented is +the optional \type{/Extends} key. + +\subsection{\cs{pdfdecimaldigits}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfdecimaldigits} \Whatever{integer}}} + +This integer parameter specifies the numeric accuracy of real +coordinates as written to the \PDF\ file. It gives the maximal number of +decimal digits after the decimal point. Valid values are in the range +$0..4$. A higher value means more precise output, but also results in a +larger file size and more time to display or print. In most cases the +optimal value is~2. This parameter does not influence the precision of +numbers used in raw \PDF\ code, like that used in \cs{pdfliteral} and +annotation action specifications; also multiplication items (\eg\ +scaling factors) are not affected and are always output with best +precision. This parameter is read when \PDFTEX\ writes a real number to +the \PDF\ output. + +When including huge \METAPOST\ images using \filename {supp-pdf.tex}, one can +limit the accuracy to two digits with \cs{twodigitMPoutput}. + +\subsection{\cs{pdfhorigin}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfhorigin} \Whatever{dimen}}} + +This parameter can be used to set the horizontal offset of the output +box from the top left corner of the page. A value of 1~inch corresponds +to the normal \TEX\ offset. This parameter is read when \PDFTEX\ starts +shipping out a page to the \PDF\ output. + +For all normal purposes, this parameter should always be kept at 1~true +inch. If you want to shift text on the page, use \TEX's own \cs{hoffset} +primitive. To avoid surprises, after global magnification has been +changed by the \cs{mag} primitive, the \cs{pdfhorigin} parameter should +still be 1~true inch, \eg\ by setting \cs{pdfhorigin=1 true in} after +the \cs{mag} setting. Or, you can preadjust the \cs{pdfhorigin} value +before typing \cs{mag}, so that its value after the \cs{mag} command +ends up at 1~true inch again. + +\subsection{\cs{pdfvorigin}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfvorigin} \Whatever{dimen}}} + +This parameter is the vertical companion of \cs{pdfhorigin}, and the +notes above regarding \cs{mag} and true dimensions apply. Also keep +in mind that the \TEX\ coordinate system starts in the top left corner +(downward), while \PDF\ coordinates start at the bottom left corner +(upward). + +\subsection{\cs{pdfpagewidth}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfpagewidth} \Whatever{dimen}}} + +This dimension parameter specifies the page width of the \PDF\ output +(the screen, the paper, etc.). \PDFTEX\ reads this parameter when it +starts shipping out a page. If magnification has been changed by the +\cs{mag} primitive, check that this parameter reflects the desired true +page width. When part of the page falls off the paper or screen, it's +quite possible that this parameter is set wrong. + +If the value is set to zero, the page width is calculated as + +\[ +\hbox{\textit{width}}_{\hbox{\scriptsize box being shipped out}} ++ 2 \times (\cs{horigin} + \hbox{\cs{hoffset}}). +\] +It is not wise to rely on this default calculation, since box widths may +vary unexpectedly. + +\subsection{\cs{pdfpageheight}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfpageheight} \Whatever{dimen}}} + +Similar to the previous item, this dimension parameter specifies the +page height of the \PDF\ output; the notes above apply. If set to zero, +the page height will be calculated analogously to the above. + +\section{Document info and catalog} +\label{sec.docinfocatalog} + +\subsection{\cs{pdfomitinfodict}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfomitinfodict} \Whatever{integer}}} + +If nonzero, omit the \type{/Info} dictionary completely, as required by +the \PDF\ A-4 standard. \introduced{1.40.25} + +\subsection{\cs{pdfinfo}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfinfo} \Something{general text}}} + +This primitive allows the user to specify information for the document +info dictionary. Provided information can be extracted from the output +\PDF\ by, for instance, the \type{pdfinfo} program. + +The \Something{general text} is a collection of key\hyph value\hyph +pairs. The key names are preceded by a \type{/}, and the values, being +strings, are given between parentheses. All keys, and the primitive +itself, are optional. Possible +keys are:\newline +\type{/Title},\newline +\type{/Author},\newline +\type{/Subject},\newline +\type{/Keywords},\newline +\type{/Producer} (defaults to \hbox{\tt pdfTeX-\currentpdftex}),\newline +\type{/Creator} (defaults to \type{TeX}),\newline +\type{/CreationDate} (defaults to current date and time, with time zone),\newline +\type{/ModDate} (same default),\newline +\type{/Trapped} (defaults to \type{/False},\newline +\type{/PTEX.Fullbanner} (defaults to the \cs{pdftexbanner} string, q.v.). + +\type{/CreationDate} and \type{/ModDate} are expressed in the form +\type{D:YYYYMMDDhhmmssTZ}, where `\type{D:}' is a constant string +prefix, \type{YYYY} is the year, \type{MM} is the month, \type{DD} is +the day, \type{hh} is the hour, \type{mm} is the minutes, \type{ss} is +the seconds, and \type{TZ} is an optional string denoting the time zone, +\type{Z} for universal time. For example, this is the Unix epoch, the +beginning of 1970-01-01 UTC, in this format: \type{D:19700101000000Z}. +If the time zone is not UTC, it is given as \type{+HH'mm'} or +\type{-HH'mm'}, indicating an offset of the given hours and minutes from +UTC, with the given either later (\type{+}) or earlier (\type{-}) than +UTC. For more details, see the \PDFReference, \S7.9.4. + +Multiple appearances of \cs{pdfinfo} are concatenated. Usually if a key +is given more than once, the first appearance will be used, but this is +viewer\hyph dependent. Except for standard \TeX\ macro expansion, +\PDFTEX\ does not perform any further operations in the +\Something{general text} provided by the user. + +Here is an example of using \cs{pdfinfo} to include the +information not supplied by \PDFTEX: + +\begin{verbatim} +\pdfinfo { + /Title (example.pdf) + /Author (Tom and Jerry) + /Subject (Example) + /Keywords (mouse, cat) +} +\end{verbatim} + +\subsection{\cs{pdfinfoomitdate}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfinfoomitdate} \Whatever{integer}}} + +If nonzero, omit the \type{/CreationDate} and \type{/ModDate} keys from +the document info dictionary described above. This can be useful in +making reproducible \PDF{}s. \introduced{1.40.17} + +\subsection{\cs{pdfsuppressptexinfo}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfsuppressptexinfo} \Whatever{integer}}} + +This value is treated as a bit mask, specifying which \type{PTEX.*} keys +to omit from the output: + +\begin{smalltable} +\begin{tabular}{cl} +\bf value & \bf suppresses \cr + 1 & \type{PTEX.Fullbanner} \cr + 2 & \type{PTEX.FileName} \cr + 4 & \type{PTEX.PageNumber} \cr + 8 & \type{PTEX.InfoDict} \cr +\end{tabular} +\end{smalltable} + +\noindent Thus, the value \type{-1}, setting all the bits, suppresses +everything. + +\type{PTEX.Fullbanner} is included by default in the general document +info dictionary, as mentioned under \cs{pdfinfo} above. The other +\type{PTEX.*} keys are included when a \PDF\ is included in the document +(and not otherwise), as described in section~\ref{sec.addpdfkeys}. + +This conditional suppression can be useful in making reproducible +\PDF{}s. \introduced{1.40.17} + +\subsection{\cs{pdfcatalog}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfcatalog} \Something{general text} + \Optional{\Literal{openaction} \Something{action spec}}}} + +Similar to the document info section is the document catalog, where +possible keys are \type{/URI}, which specifies the base \URL\ of the +document, and \type {/PageMode}, which determines how the \PDF\ viewer +displays the document on startup. The possibilities for the latter are +given in this table: + +\begin{smalltable} +\begin{tabular}{ll} +\bf value & \bf meaning \cr +\tt /UseNone & neither outline nor thumbnails visible \cr +\tt /UseOutlines & outline visible \cr +\tt /UseThumbs & thumbnails visible \cr +\tt /FullScreen & full\hyph screen mode \cr +\end{tabular} +\end{smalltable} + +The default \type{/PageMode} setting is \type{/UseNone}. In full\hyph +screen mode, there is no menu bar, window controls, nor any other window +present. + +After the \Something{general text} of the catalog, a construct +\Literal{openaction} \Something{action spec} can be given, where +\Literal{openaction} is a \PDFTEX\ keyword, and \Something{action spec} +specifies the action to be taken when opening the document. This +\Something{action spec} is the same as for internal links; see +section~\ref{sec.linking}. + +Several settings can be made in one \cs{pdfcatalog} call, for +example: + +\begin{verbatim} +\pdfcatalog { + /PageMode /FullScreen +} openaction goto page 2 {/Fit} +\end{verbatim} + +\subsection{\cs{pdfcreationdate}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfcreationdate} \Whatever{expandable}}} + +Expands to the date string \PDFTEX\ uses in the info dictionary of the +document, \eg\ for this file: {\tt\pdfcreationdate}. \introduced{1.30.0} + +\subsection{\cs{pdfnames}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfnames} \Something{general text}}} + +This primitive inserts the \Something{general text} to the \type{/Names} +array. The text must conform to the specifications as laid down in the +\PDFReference, or the document may be invalid. + +\subsection{\cs{pdftrailer}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdftrailer} \Something{general text}}} + +This command puts its argument text verbatim into the file trailer +dictionary. Example: \verb|\pdftrailer{/mytrlrkey /mytrlrval}|. +\introduced{1.11a} + +\subsection{\cs{pdftrailerid}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdftrailerid} \Something{general text}}} + +Use the \Something{general text} to seed the \type{/ID} value in the +trailer, instead of the default combination of the input file +name and starting time. If the argument is empty, the \type{/ID} is +omitted entirely. Example: \verb|\pdftrailerid{}|. This can be useful +in making reproducible \PDF{}s. \introduced{1.40.17} + +\section{Fonts} + +\subsection{\cs{pdfadjustspacing}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfadjustspacing} \Whatever{integer}}} + +This primitive controls whether font expansion happens (this operation +is described in detail at \cs{pdffontexpand}). By default, +\cs{pdfadjustspacing} is set to~0; then font expansion is disabled, so +that the \PDFTEX\ output is identical to that from the original \TEX\ +engine. + +Font expansion can be activated in two modes. When \cs{pdfadjustspacing} +is set to~1, font expansion is applied \emph{after} \TEX's normal +paragraph breaking routines have broken the paragraph into lines. In +this case, line breaks are identical to standard \TEX\ behavior. + +When set to~2, the width changes that are the result of stretching and +shrinking are taken into account \emph{while} the paragraph is broken +into lines. In this case, line breaks are likely to be different from +those of standard \TEX. Paragraphs may well become longer or shorter. + +Both alternatives require a collection of \TFM\ files that are +related to the \Something{stretch} and \Something{shrink} settings +for the \cs{pdffontexpand} primitive, unless this is given with the +\type{autoexpand} option. + +\subsection{\cs{pdffontexpand}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdffontexpand} + \Something{font} \Something{stretch} \Something{shrink} + \Something{step} \Optional{\Literal{autoexpand}}}} + +This extension to \TEX's font definitions controls a major \PDFTEX\ +feature called \emph{font expansion}. To enable font expansion, +\cs{pdfadjustspacing} must be set to a value greater than zero. We +describe the basic process with an example: + +\begin{verbatim} +\font\somefont=sometfm at 10pt +\pdffontexpand\somefont 30 20 10 autoexpand +\pdfadjustspacing=2 +\end{verbatim} + +The \verb|30 20 10| means this: ``hey \TEX, when line breaking is going +badly, you may stretch the glyphs from this font as much as 3\% or +shrink them as much as 2\%.'' For practical reasons \PDFTEX\ uses +discrete expansion steps, in this example, 1\%. + +Roughly speaking, the idea is as follows: When \TEX\ cannot break a line +in the appropriate way, the unbreakable parts of the last word may stick +into the margin. When \PDFTEX\ sees this, it will try to scale (shrink) +the glyphs in that line using fixed steps, until the line fits. When +lines are too spacey, the opposite happens: \PDFTEX\ starts scaling +(stretching) the glyphs until the white space gaps are acceptable. This +glyph stretching and shrinking is called \emph{font expansion}. + +There are two different modes for font expansion, depending on whether +\type{autoexpand} is specified: + +\begin{enumerate} +\item If the \type{autoexpand} keyword is given---this is +recommended mode---only a single map entry is needed for all expanded +font versions, using the name of the unexpanded \TFM\ file +(\varname{tfmname} in section~\ref{sec.map-tfmname}). No expanded +\varname{tfmname} versions need be mentioned (indeed, they are ignored), +as \PDFTEX\ generates expanded instances of the unexpanded \TFM\ data +structures and keeps them in its memory. As of \PDFTEX~1.40.0, the +\type{autoexpand} work is done within the page stream by modification of +the text matrix (\PDF\ operator ``\type{Tm}''), and not at the font file +level, giving the advantage that it now works not only with Type~1 but +also with TrueType and OpenType fonts (and even without embedding a font +file; but that's not recommended). In this mode \PDFTEX\ requires only +unexpanded font files. + +\item Second, if the \type{autoexpand} keyword is not given, setting up +font expansion requires considerably more work, as there must be map +entries for \TFM\ files in all required expansion values. The expanded +\varname{tfmname} variants are constructed by adding the font expansion +value to the \varname{tfmname} of the base font, \eg\ there must be a +map entry with \varname{tfmname} \type{sometfm+10} for 1\% stretch or +\type{sometfm-15} for 1.5\% shrink. This also means that for each +expanded font variant a \TFM\ file with properly expanded metrics must +exist. In addition to the \TFM\ file, it is necessary to provide, for +each expansion value, an individually crafted font file with the +expanded glyphs. Thus, this allows the absolute best possible output, +controlling the glyphs for every expanded variant of the font. It is a +rare document indeed for this to be worth the trouble. + +One technical drawback of non-\type{autoexpand} mode is that all needed +individual font files need to be embedded in the \PDF\ output for each +expanded font, leading to significantly larger \PDF\ files than in +\type{autoexpand} mode. + +Another caveat for non-\type{autoexpand} mode: when \cs{pdffontexpand} +is executed, \PDFTEX\ immediately loads two fonts, at the maximum +stretch and shrink; in our example, \type{sometfm+30} and +\type{sometfm-20}. (If they aren't available, \type{mktextfm} may be +uselessly called, and then an error message issued.) This happens even +if those fonts never end up being used, which is arguably undesirable, +but hard to change. It is not a problem when using \type{autoexpand}. +\end{enumerate} + +The font expansion mechanism is inspired by an optimization first +introduced by Prof.~Hermann Zapf, which in itself goes back to +optimizations used in the early days of typesetting: use different +glyphs to optimize the grayness of a page. So, there are many, slightly +different~a's, e's, etc. For practical reasons \PDFTEX\ does not use +such huge glyph collections; it uses horizontal scaling instead. This is +sub\hyph optimal, and possibly offensive to the design, though the +expansions are tiny. It is up to the user to decide whether such +slightly remastered fonts are acceptable. As an example, this +document is typeset with font expansion and margin kerning activated +(via the \texttt{microtype} \LaTeX\ package). + +\subsection{\cs{efcode}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{efcode} \Something{font} + \Something{8-bit number} \Whatever{integer}}} + +We haven't yet told the whole story. One can imagine that some glyphs +are visually more sensitive to stretching or shrinking than others. Then +the \cs{efcode} primitive can be used to influence the expandability of +individual glyphs within a given font, as a factor applied to the +expansion setting from the \cs{pdffontexpand} primitive. The syntax is +similar to \cs{sfcode} (but with the \Something{font} required), and it +defaults to~1000, meaning 100\% expandability. The given integer value +is clipped to the range $0..1000$, corresponding to a usable +expandability range of $0..100$\%. Examples: + +\begin{verbatim} +\efcode\somefont`A=800 +\efcode\somefont`O=0 +\end{verbatim} + +Here the A in \cs{somefont} may only stretch or shrink by up to 80\% of +the current expansion value for that font, and expansion for the~O is +disabled. The actual expansion is still bound to the steps as defined by +\cs{pdffontexpand} primitive. + +Changes to this table are global, \ie\ ignore \TeX's usual grouping, +and apply only to the given \Something{font}. + +\subsection{\cs{pdfprotrudechars}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfprotrudechars} \Whatever{integer}}} + +Yet another way of optimizing paragraph breaking is to let certain +characters move into the margin (`character protrusion'). Character +protrusion is disabled when \cs{pdfprotrudechars=0} or negative. + +When \cs{pdfprotrudechars=1}, the glyphs qualified as such will make +this move when applicable, without changing the line-breaking. When +\cs{pdfprotrudechars=2} (or greater), character protrusion will be taken +into account while considering breakpoints, so line-breaking might be +changed. This qualification and the amount of shift are set by the +primitives \cs{rpcode} and \cs{lpcode}. + +If you want to protrude an item other than a character (\eg\ an +\cs{hbox}), you can do so by padding the item with an invisible +zero\hyph width character for which protrusion is activated. + +\subsection{\cs{rpcode}, \cs{lpcode}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{rpcode} \Something{font} + \Something{8-bit number} \Whatever{integer}}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{lpcode} \Something{font} + \Something{8-bit number} \Whatever{integer}}} + +The amount that a character from a given font may shift into the right +margin (`character protrusion') is set by the primitive \cs{rpcode}. The +protrusion distance is the integer value given to \cs{rpcode}, +multiplied by 0.001em from the current font. The given integer value is +clipped to the range $-1000..1000$, corresponding to a usable protrusion +range of $-$1em..1em. \cs{lpcode} is exactly analogous to \cs{rpcode}, +but affects the amount by which characters may protrude into the left +margin. + +Examples: + +\begin{verbatim} +\rpcode\somefont`,=200 +\rpcode\somefont`-=150 +\end{verbatim} + +Here the comma may shift by 0.2em into the margin and the hyphen by +0.15em. All these small bits and pieces will help \PDFTEX\ to give +you better paragraphs (use \cs{rpcode} judiciously; don't overdo it). + +Remark: old versions of \PDFTEX\ use the character width as measure. This +was changed to a proportion of the em-width after \THANH\ finished his +master's thesis. + +Changes to these tables are global, \ie\ ignore \TeX's usual grouping, +and apply only to the given \Something{font}. + +\subsection{\cs{leftmarginkern}, \cs{rightmarginkern}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{leftmarginkern} \Something{box number} + \Whatever{expandable}}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{rightmarginkern} \Something{box number} + \Whatever{expandable}}} + +The \cs{leftmarginkern} \Something{box number} primitive expands to the +width of the margin kern at the left side of the horizontal list stored +in \cs{box} \Something{box number}. The expansion string includes the +unit \type{pt}. \Eg\ when the left margin kern of \cs{box0} amounts to +$-$10pt, \cs{leftmarginkern0} will expand to \type{-10pt}. The primitive +\cs{rightmarginkern} works analogously for the right margin. +\introducedplural{1.30.0} + +These are auxiliary primitives to make character protrusion more +versatile. When using the \TEX\ primitives \cs{unhbox} or \cs{unhcopy}, +the margin kerns at either end of the unpackaged hbox will be removed +(\eg\ to avoid weird effects if several hboxes are unpackaged behind +each other into the same horizontal list). These \cs{unhbox} or +\cs{unhcopy} commands are often used together with \cs{vsplit} for dis- +and re\hyph assembling of paragraphs, \eg\ to add line numbers. +Paragraphs treated like this do not show character protrusion by +default, as the margin kerns have been removed during the unpacking +process. + +The \cs{leftmarginkern} and \cs{rightmarginkern} primitives allow +access to the margin kerns and store them away before unpackaging the +hbox. \Eg\ the following code snippet restores margin kerning of +a horizontal list stored in \cs{box}\cs{testline}, resulting in a hbox with +the original margin kerning, now inserted by ordinary kerns. + +\begin{verbatim} +\dimen0=\leftmarginkern\testline +\dimen1=\rightmarginkern\testline +\hbox to\hsize{\kern\dimen0\unhcopy\testline\kern\dimen1} +\end{verbatim} + +\subsection{\cs{letterspacefont}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{letterspacefont} \Something{control sequence} + \Something{font} \Something{integer}}} + +This primitive creates an instance of \Something{font} with the widths +of all glyphs increased by \Something{integer} thousandths of an em (as +defined by \Something{font}). The effect is letter spacing, but the +glyphs are actually wider, as the sidebearings are increased, so a +single glyph will take more space. For instance, the following creates a +font \cs{lsfont} whose glyphs are all 1.2pt larger than those of +\cs{normalfont}: + +\begin{verbatim} +\font\normalfont=myfont at 12pt +\letterspacefont\lsfont\normalfont 100 +\end{verbatim} + +Negative values are allowed for \Something{integer}. +Letter spacing works natively in \PDF\ mode only, unless special fonts are +devised (in our example, a \type{myfont+100ls} font), as with font expansion. + +\subsection{\cs{pdfcopyfont}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfcopyfont} \Something{control sequence} + \Something{font}}} + +This primitive defines \Something{control sequence} as a synonym for +\Something{font}. + +\subsection{\cs{pdffakespace}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdffakespace}}} + +Always insert a fake interword space in the output (PDF only; this +primitive is an error in DVI mode), regardless of the values of +\cs{pdfinterwordspaceon} and \cs{pdfinterwordspaceoff} (q.v.). Example: + +\begin{verbatim} +Text with a fake interword \pdffakespace space. +\end{verbatim} +\introduced{1.40.15} + +\subsection{\cs{pdffontattr}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdffontattr} \Something{font} + \Something{general text}}} + +This primitive inserts the \Something{general text} into the +\type{/Font} dictionary. The text must conform to the specifications as +laid down in the \PDFReference, or the document may be invalid. For +examples, see the \type{cmap} and \type{CJK} packages. + +\subsection{\cs{pdffontname}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdffontname} \Something{font} + \Whatever{expandable}}} + +In \PDF\ files produced by \PDFTEX\ one can recognize a font resource +by the prefix~\type{/F} followed by a number, for instance \type{/F12} +or \type{/F54}. For a given \TEX\ \Something{font}, this primitive +expands to the number from the corresponding font resource name. +\Eg\ if \type{/F12} corresponds to some \TEX\ font \cs{foo}, then +\cs{pdffontname}\cs{foo} expands to the number~\type{12}. + +In the current implementation, when \cs{pdfuniqueresname} (see below) +is set to a positive value, the \cs{pdffontname} still returns only the +number from the font resource name, without the appended random string. + +\subsection{\cs{pdffontobjnum}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdffontobjnum} \Something{font} + \Whatever{expandable}}} + +This command is similar to \cs{pdffontname}, but it returns the \PDF\ +object number of the font dictionary instead of the number from the font +resource name. \Eg\ if the font dictionary (\type{/Type/Font}) in \PDF\ +object~3 corresponds to some \TEX\ font \cs{foo}, then +\cs{pdffontobjnum}\cs{foo} gives the number~\type{3}. + +Use of \cs{pdffontname} and \cs{pdffontobjnum} allows users full +access to all the font resources used in a document. + +\subsection{\cs{pdffontsize}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdffontsize} \Something{font} + \Whatever{expandable}}} + +This primitive expands to the font size of the given font, with unit +\type{pt}. \Eg\ when using the plain \TeX\ macro package, the call +\cs{pdffontsize}\cs{tenrm} expands to \type{10.0pt}. + +\subsection{\cs{pdfgentounicode}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfgentounicode} \Whatever{integer}}} + +By default, \PDFTEX\ does not include a \type{/ToUnicode} resource when +including fonts in the output. Such a resource (also called a CMap +resource) maps glyph names to Unicode characters in a \PDF\ file. +Lacking such a resource, it is the \PDF\ reader which determines how and +whether searching in the \PDF\ file works. In practice, searching for +basic \ASCII\ characters generally works, but searching for anything +beyond those, including ligatures such as `fi', is likely to fail. + +If \cs{pdfgentounicode} is set to \type{1} when the job ends, the +\type{/ToUnicode} resource will be included in the output, with mappings +for Type~1 fonts used---unless \cs{pdfnobuiltintounicode} (q.v.) is set +for a given font. + +The mapping is created as follows: for each glyph in the font, look for +its \type{ToUnicode} value in a global hash table. By default that +global hash table is empty, in which case \PDFTEX\ merely emits a +warning. Entries are added to the table using the command +\cs{pdfglyphtounicode}, described next. + +\subsection{\cs{pdfglyphtounicode}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfglyphtounicode} \Something{general text} + \Something{general text}}} + +The first argument is the name of a glyph, the second is a string of Unicode +numeric values denoting characters, separated by spaces. For instance: + +\begin{verbatim} +\pdfgentounicode=1 +\pdfglyphtounicode{ff}{0066 0066} +\end{verbatim} + +\noindent maps the \type{ff} ligature to a pair of \type{f} characters +(whose code is \type{U+0066}, that is, \ASCII\ \type{0x66}). + +Once a single \cs{pdfglyphtounicode} definition is made, whether it is +used or not, another feature comes into play: all glyph names of the +form \type{uniXXXX} or \type{uXXXX} are mapped to the natural +\type{U+XXXX}. Many fonts use this style of naming. + +In addition, the \type{glyphtounicode.tex} file (distributed with +\PDFTEX\ and other software) contains thousands of such definitions, +covering most common glyph names. So, for practical purposes, one would +probably want: + +\begin{verbatim} +\input glyphtounicode +\pdfgentounicode=1 +\end{verbatim} + +\noindent (\LATEX\ users could load the \type{cmap} package to achieve +the same effect.) + +By default, these glyph name-to-unicode mappings are global. Thus, + +\begin{verbatim} +\pdfglyphtounicode{abc}{1234} +\end{verbatim} + +\noindent would map the glyph named \type{abc} to \type{U+1234} for +every font. However, it's possible to make a mapping for a single font +using a \type{tfm:} prefix: + +\begin{verbatim} +\pdfglyphtounicode{tfm:foo/abc}{5678} +\end{verbatim} + +\noindent means that for the font \type{foo.tfm}, only, the glyph +\type{abc} is mapped to \type{U+5678}. + +Glyph names sometimes contain a dot, as in \type{somechar.sc}. \PDFTEX\ +simply strips the dot and everything after it before looking up the +name, so in this case it would look for \type{somechar} (even if +\type{somechar.sc} exists in the mappings, it will not be used). This +behavior could be made smarter if there is a demand for it. + +\subsection{\cs{pdfincludechars}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfincludechars} \Something{font} + \Something{general text} \Whatever{expandable}}} + +This command causes \PDFTEX\ to treat the characters in \Something{general +text} as if they were used with \Something{font}, which means that the +corresponding glyphs will be embedded into the font resources in the \PDF\ +output. Nothing is appended to the list being built. + +\subsection{\cs{pdfinterwordspaceon}, \cs{pdfinterwordspaceoff}, + \cs{pdfspacefont}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfinterwordspaceon}}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfinterwordspaceoff}}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfspacefont} \Something{general text}}} + +The first two commands insert corresponding whatsit nodes which turn +on/off generation of faked interword spaces in the \PDF\ output (they +cause errors in \DVI\ output). This allows for better reflowing of text +on the fly by \PDF\ readers, better extraction of textual content, and +is required by \PDF/A. It does not affect the normal \TeX\ justification +with glue of the typeset output. + +This works roughly as follows: with \cs{pdfinterwordspaceon}, +\PDFTEX\ will guess when an interword space should be inserted, based on +movement within some limits in horizontal direction. When found, +\PDFTEX\ inserts a true space character into the \PDF\ page description +for the viewers, and adjusts the next movement so that the next +character will be in the expected position, according to normal \TEX\ +behavior. + +Where does that ``true space character'' come from? +There are two possibilities. + +\begin{itemize} +\item If the current font has a real space character, it is used. +\PDFTEX\ considers a font to have such a space character if 1)~the font +has an encoding vector (\type{.enc} file) specified in its map entry, +and 2)~the encoding has a glyph named \type{space} (that is, the +PostScript name \type{/space}) at slot 32. For example, the font +\type{texnansi-lmr10} uses the encoding file \type{lm-texnansi.enc}, +which has such an entry. + +\item +If the current font does not have such a space character (this is the +case for most traditional \TEX\ fonts, such as \type{cmr10} and +\type{ec-lmr10}), \PDFTEX\ will use the space character from a special +fallback font named (by default) \type{pdftexspace}[\type{.tfm}]. +\PDFTEX\ automatically defines a map entry for this font which looks +like this: + +\begin{verbatim} +\pdfmapline{=pdftexspace PdfTeX-Space <pdftexspace.pfb} +\end{verbatim} + +The \type{pdftexspace.tfm} and \type{pdftexspace.pfb} files are expected +to be available to \PDFTEX\ just like any other font. (They are +distributed with \PDFTEX.) The \type{pdftexspace} font was constructed +by hand; it has a space character that is .333em (and no other +characters). + +A different fallback font for the space character can be given via +\verb|\pdfspacefont{myfont}|. This is most likely to be useful for +testing and debugging. In this case, \PDFTEX\ assumes that the given font +has a real space character at slot 32, and that any necessary +corresponding map entry exists. For example: + +\begin{verbatim} +\pdfspacefont{texnansi-lmr10} % use space char from this font if + % current font has no space char +\end{verbatim} +\end{itemize} + +History: Before \PDFTEX\ version 1.40.25, no check was made for a +\type{space} character in the current font, the fallback font was named +\type{dummy-space}, and its space character was tiny, 0.001em. It turned +out that \PDF\ viewers were unhappy with this tiny space, especially +with tagged \PDF. + +Example of usage (see also the \type{fake-interword-space.tex} test file): + +\begin{verbatim} +Text with no interword spaces. + +\pdfglyphtounicode{space}{0020} +\pdfinterwordspaceon + +Switch to text with faked interword spaces. + +\pdfinterwordspaceoff + +Back to text with no interword spaces. +\end{verbatim} +\introducedplural{1.40.15, 1.40.25} + +\subsection{\cs{pdfmapfile}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfmapfile} \Something{map filename}}} + +This primitive is used for reading a font map file consisting of one or +more font map lines. The name of the map file is given in the +\Something{map filename} together with an optional leading modifier +character, as explained below. If your map file isn't in the current +directory or a standard system directory, you will need to set the +\type{TEXFONTMAPS} variable (in \WEBC) or give an explicit path so that +it will be found. + +If no \cs{pdfmapfile} primitive is given, the default map file +\filename{pdftex.map} will be read by \PDFTEX. Normally there is no need +for a \PDFTEX\ user to bother about the \cs{pdfmapfile} or +\cs{pdfmapline} primitives, as the main \TEX\ distributions provide +helper tools to automatically assemble the default \type{pdftex.map}. +(In \TEXLIVE, these tools are \type{updmap} and \type{updmap-sys}.) + +There is a companion primitive \cs{pdfmapline} that allows scanning +single map lines; its map line argument has the same syntax as the map +lines from a map file. Both primitives can be used concurrently. The +\cs{pdfmapfile} primitive is fast for reading external bulk font map +information (many map lines collected in a map file), whereas the +\cs{pdfmapline} allows putting the font map information for individual +\TeX\ fonts directly in the \TeX\ source or a style file. With both +primitives, the map line information is scanned by \PDFTEX\ identically. +In the most common case, the data are put into a fresh internal map +entry data structure, which is then consulted when a font is used. + +When a \cs{pdfmapfile} or \cs{pdfmapline} primitive is executed by +\PDFTEX, the argument (map file or map line) will be processed +immediately, and the internal map entry database updated. The operation +mode of the \cs{pdfmapfile} and \cs{pdfmapline} primitives is selected +by an optional modifier character, one of \type{+}, \type{=}, \type{-}, +in front of the \varname{tfmname} field. This modifier defines how the +individual map lines are going to be handled, and how a collision +between an already registered map entry and a newer one is resolved: +either by ignoring a later entry, or replacing or deleting an existing +entry. In any case, map entries of fonts already in use are kept +untouched. Here are two examples: + +\begin{verbatim} +\pdfmapfile{+myfont.map} +\pdfmapline{+ptmri8r Times-Italic <8r.enc <ptmri8a.pfb} +\end{verbatim} + +When no modifier character is given (\eg\ \verb|\pdfmapfile{foo.map}| +or\newline \verb|\pdfmapline{helv Helvetica}|) and there has been no +previous call to one of these primitives, then the default map file +\filename{pdftex.map} will \emph{not} be read. Apart from this case, the +given map file will be processed as with the \type{+} modifier: +duplicate later map entries within the file are ignored and a warning is +issued. Thus, you can block reading of the default map file also with an +empty \verb|\pdfmapfile{}| or \verb|\pdfmapline{}| early in the \TeX\ +file. Since the default map file is typically large, if you don't need +it, these command variants might considerably speed up \PDFTEX\ startup. + +If a modifier is given, before reading the items given as arguments to +the present \cs{pdfmapfile} or \cs{pdfmapline}, the default map file +will be read first---if this hasn't already been done or been prevented +by the above blocking cases. The meaning of the modifiers: + +\begin{itemize} +\item \verb|\pdfmapfile{+foo.map}| reads the file \filename{foo.map}; +duplicate later map entries within the file are ignored and a warning is +issued. + +\item \verb|\pdfmapfile{=foo.map}| reads the file \filename{foo.map}; +matching map entries in the database are replaced by new entries from +\filename{foo.map}, if they haven't already been used. + +\item \verb|\pdfmapfile{-foo.map}| reads the file \filename{foo.map}; +matching map entries are deleted from the database, if they haven't +already been used. +\end{itemize} + +In short, if you want to add support for a new font through an +additional font map file while keeping all the existing mappings, use +\verb|\pdfmapfile{+myfont.map}| or \verb|\pdfmapfile{=myfont.map}|. + +If you want to use a base map file name other than \type{pdftex.map}, or +change its processing options through a \PDFTEX\ format, you can do this +by appending the \cs{pdfmapfile} command to the \cs{everyjob} token list +for the \type{-ini} run, as in: + +\begin{verbatim} +\everyjob=\expandafter{\the\everyjob\pdfmapfile{+myspecial.map}} +\dump +\end{verbatim} + +This would always read the file \type{myspecial.map} after the default +\type{pdftex.map} file. + +\subsection{\cs{pdfmapline}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfmapline} \Something{map spec}}} + +Similar to \cs{pdfmapfile}, but here you give a single map line (exactly +like the ones in map files) as an argument. The optional modifiers +(\type{+-=}) have the same effect as with \cs{pdfmapfile}; see also the +description above. Example: + +\begin{verbatim} +\pdfmapline{+ptmri8r Times-Italic <8r.enc <ptmri8a.pfb} +\end{verbatim} + +This primitive, especially the \verb|\pdfmapline{=...}| form, is useful +for temporary quick checks of a new font map entry during development, +before finally putting it into a map file. + +As explained above, \verb|\pdfmapline{}|, like \verb|\pdfmapfile{}|, +blocks reading of the default map file, if it comes early enough in the +\TeX\ input. \introduced{1.20a} + +\subsection{\cs{pdfmovechars}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfmovechars} \Whatever{integer}}} + +Since \PDFTEX\ version 1.30.0 the primitive \cs{pdfmovechars} is +obsolete, and its use merely leads to a warning. (This primitive +specified whether \PDFTEX\ should try to move characters in range 0..31 +to higher slots; its sole purpose was to remedy certain bugs of early +\PDF\ viewers.) + +\subsection{\cs{pdfnobuiltintounicode}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfnobuiltintounicode} \Something{font}}} + +The purpose of this command is to prevent \PDFTEX\ from generating the +\type{ToUnicode}/CMap resource for the given font when +\cs{pdfgentounicode=1}, most likely because the CMap resource is already +generated by some other method. For instance, the \LATEX\ \type{cmap} +package uses \cs{pdffontattr} to generate CMap resources. + +Minimal example: +\begin{verbatim} +\font\f=cmb10 +\pdfnobuiltintounicode\f +\f No unicode mappings for this output. +\end{verbatim} +\introduced{1.40.11} + +\subsection{\cs{pdfnoligatures}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfnoligatures} \Something{font}}} + +This disables all ligatures in the loaded font \Something{font}. +\introduced{1.30.0} + +\subsection{\cs{pdfomitcharset}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfomitcharset} \Whatever{integer}}} + +If this primitive parameter is zero (the default), the \type{/CharSet} +entry is included as usual for fonts in the \PDF\ output; if it is set +to 1, then \type{/CharSet} is omitted. Other values may have other +meanings in the future, so do not rely on them. + +Explanation: This parameter was created because the \PDFA-1 standard +requires \type{/CharSet}, whereas \PDFA-2 and \PDFA-3 allow it to be +omitted but have extraordinary requirements, which \PDFTEX\ does not +currently meet, if it is included.\introduced{1.40.20} + +\subsection{\cs{pdfpkmode}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfpkmode} \Whatever{tokens}}} + +The \cs{pdfpkmode} is a token register that sets the \METAFONT\ mode for +pixel font generation. The contents of this register is dumped into the +format, so one can (optionally) preset it. \introduced{1.30.0} + +\subsection{\cs{pdfpkresolution}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfpkresolution} \Whatever{integer}}} + +This integer parameter specifies the default resolution of embedded \PK\ +fonts and is read when \PDFTEX\ embeds a \PK\ font during finishing the +\PDF\ output. As bitmap fonts may be rendered poorly, and in any case +cannot be arbitrarily magnified, it is best to use outline fonts if +possible. + +\subsection{\cs{pdfsuppresswarningdupmap}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfsuppresswarningdupmap} \Whatever{integer}}} + +Ordinarily, \PDFTEX\ gives a warning when a duplicate map entry for a +given font is read, whatever the mechanism. However, sometimes it is +useful to include map information within the document, using +\cs{pdfmapfile} or \cs{pdfmapline}, even for fonts that happen to be +installed on the system. Then seeing the warnings on every run is just +noise; it can be suppressed by setting this parameter to a positive +number. \introduced{1.40.13} + +\subsection{\cs{pdftracingfonts}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdftracingfonts} \Whatever{integer}}} + +This integer parameter specifies the level of verbosity for the +information about expanded fonts given in the log, \eg\ when +\cs{tracingoutput=1}. If \cs{pdftracingfonts=0}, which is the default, +the log shows the actual nonzero signed expansion value for each +expanded letter within brackets, as in: + +\begin{verbatim} +...\xivtt (+20) t +\end{verbatim} + +If \cs{pdftracingfonts=1}, the name of the \TFM\ file is also listed, +together with the font size: + +\begin{verbatim} +...\xivtt (cmtt10+20@14.0pt) t +\end{verbatim} + +Setting \cs{pdftracingfonts} to a value other than~0 or~1 is not +recommended, to allow for future extensions. \introduced{1.30.0} + +\subsection{\cs{pdfuniqueresname}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfuniqueresname} \Whatever{integer}}} + +When this primitive is assigned a positive number, \PDF\ resource names +will be made reasonably unique by appending a random string consisting +of six \ASCII\ characters. + +\subsection{\cs{tagcode}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{tagcode} \Something{font} + \Something{8-bit number} \Whatever{integer}}} + +This primitive accesses a character's \type{char_tag} info. It is meant +to delete \type{lig_tag} (the character's ligature/kerning program), +\type{list_tag} (which indicates that the character belongs to a chain of +ascending sizes) and/or \type{ext_tag} (which indicates that the character +is extensible), with the following options: assigning \type{-7} or less +clears all tags, \type{-6} clears \type{ext_tag} and \type{list_tag}, +\type{-5} clears \type{ext_tag} and \type{lig_tag}, \type{-4} clears +\type{ext_tag}, \type{-3} clears \type{list_tag} and \type{lig_tag}, +\type{-2} clears \type{list_tag}, \type{-1} clears \type{lig_tag}, +and \type{0} or larger does nothing. Changes are irreversible and global. + +Conversely, when queried, the primitive returns \type{0} if the tag's +value is \type{no_tag}, \type{1} if \type{lig_tag} is set, \type{2} if +\type{list_tag} is set or \type{4} (not~3) if \type{ext_tag} is set. + +\section{Spacing} + +Controlling spacing before and after characters was introduced in +version 1.30, mostly to handle punctuation rules in different +languages. The \cs{...code} tables here, like those in the previous +section, operate globally, \ie\ ignore \TeX's usual grouping, and apply +only to the given \Something{font}, not other instances of the +underlying font. + +\subsection{\cs{pdfadjustinterwordglue}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfadjustinterwordglue} \Whatever{integer}}} + +If positive, adjustment of interword glue is enabled and controlled by the +following three primitives. + +\subsection{\cs{knbscode}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{knbscode} \Something{font} + \Something{8-bit number} \Whatever{integer}}} + +The amount of space, in thousandths of an em, added to the natural width +of the glue following a character (the name stands for ``kern before +space'', although technically it is looking at glue items, not kern +items). This amounts is clipped to the range $-1000..1000$. For +instance, in the following example, glue after periods in the current +font will be increased by .2em. + +\begin{verbatim} +\pdfadjustinterwordglue=1 +\knsbcode\font`\.=200 +\end{verbatim} + +\subsection{\cs{stbscode}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{stbscode} \Something{font} + \Something{8-bit number} \Whatever{integer}}} + +This works like \cs{knbscode}, but applies to the stretch component of +the following glue. + +\subsection{\cs{shbscode}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{shbscode} \Something{font} + \Something{8-bit number} \Whatever{integer}}} + +Like \cs{stbscode}, but for the shrink component. + +\subsection{\cs{pdfprependkern}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfprependkern} \Whatever{integer}}} + +If positive, automatic insertion of kerns before characters is enabled. + +\subsection{\cs{knbccode}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{knbccode} \Something{font} + \Something{8-bit number} \Whatever{integer}}} + +The width of the kern, in thousandths of an em, inserted before a +character. It is clipped to the range $-1000..1000$. For instance, with +the following code, a .15em-kern will be inserted before all question +marks in the current font (possibly useful for \eg\ French punctuation): + +\begin{verbatim} +\pdfprependkern=1 +\knbccode\font`\?=150 +\end{verbatim} + +\subsection{\cs{pdfappendkern}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfappendkern} \Whatever{integer}}} + +Same as \cs{pdfprependkern}, but for kerns inserted after characters. + +\subsection{\cs{knaccode}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{knaccode} \Something{font} + \Something{8-bit number} \Whatever{integer}}} + +Same as \cs{knbccode}, except the kern is inserted after the +character. Such a kern is required for instance after a left guillemet +in French punctuation. + +\section{Vertical adjustments} + +\subsection{\cs{pdfignoreddimen}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfignoreddimen} \Whatever{dimen}}} + +This specifies the dimension value which must be assigned to the +following four primitives so they are ignored. Default is +\type{-1000pt}, and it should be modified with care since it also +influences when a previous paragraph's depth is ignored (for instance, +the plain \TEX\ macro \cs{nointerlineskip} should be modified +accordingly). + +\subsection{\cs{pdffirstlineheight}, \cs{pdflastlinedepth}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdffirstlineheight} \Whatever{dimen}}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdflastlinedepth} \Whatever{dimen}}} + +These parameters specify the height of the first, resp.\ depth of the +last, line of a paragraph, regardless of its content. They are read when +the paragraph builder is called, and ignored when set to +\cs{pdfignoreddimen}. By default, they are set to \type{-1000pt}, so +they are ignored as long as the value of \cs{pdfignoreddimen} is not +changed. + +\subsection{\cs{pdfeachlineheight}, \cs{pdfeachlinedepth}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfeachlineheight} \Whatever{dimen}}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfeachlinedepth} \Whatever{dimen}}} + +\cs{pdfeachlineheight} is similar to \cs{pdffirstlineheight}, but for +all lines of a paragraph, including the first one, unless +\cs{pdffirstlineheight} is specified. + +\cs{pdfeachlinedepth} is the same, but for the depth. + +\section{\PDF\ objects} + +\subsection{\cs{pdfobj}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfobj} \Something{object type spec} + \Modelist{h, v, m}}} + +This command creates a raw \PDF\ object that is written to the \PDF\ +file as \verb|1 0 obj| \ldots\ \type{endobj}. + +When \Something{object type spec} is not given, \PDFTEX\ no longer +creates a dictionary object with contents \Something{general text}, as +it did in the past. + +When \Something{object type spec} is given as \Something{attr +spec} \Literal{stream}, the object will be created as a stream with +contents \Something{general text} and additional attributes in +\Something{attr spec}. + +When \Something{object type spec} is given as \Something{attr spec} +\Literal{file}, then the \Something{general text} will be treated as a file +name and its contents will be copied into the stream contents. + +When \Something{object type spec} is given as \type{reserveobjnum}, just +a new object number is reserved. The number of the reserved object is +accessible via \cs{pdflastobj}. The object can later be filled with +contents by \Syntax{\cs{pdfobj} \Literal{useobjnum} \Something{number} +\Lbrace\Something{balanced text}\Rbrace}. But the reserved object number +can be used by other objects before it is defined, which provides a +forward\hyph referencing mechanism. + +The object is kept in memory and will be written to the \PDF\ output only +when its number is referred to by \cs{pdfrefobj} or when \cs{pdfobj} +is preceded by \cs{immediate}. Nothing is appended to the list being +built. The number of the most recently created object is accessible via +\cs{pdflastobj}. + +\subsection{\cs{pdflastobj}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdflastobj} \Whatever{read-only integer}}} + +This command returns the object number of the last object created by \type +{\pdfobj}. + +\subsection{\cs{pdfrefobj}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfrefobj} \Something{object number} + \Modelist{h, v, m}}} + +This command appends a whatsit node to the list being built. When the whatsit +node is searched at shipout time, \PDFTEX\ will write the object +\Something{object number} +to the \PDF\ output if it has not been written yet. + +\subsection{\cs{pdfretval}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfretval} \Whatever{read-only integer}}} + +Set to $-1$ if \cs{pdfobj} ignores an invalid object number. Perhaps +this will be used to store the error status of other primitives in the +future. + +\section{Page and pages objects} + +\subsection{\cs{pdfpagesattr}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfpagesattr} \Whatever{tokens}}} + +\PDFTEX\ expands this token list when it finishes the \PDF\ output and +adds the resulting character stream to the root \type{Pages} +object. When defined, these are applied to all pages in the +document. Some examples of attributes are \type{/CropBox}, the rectangle +specifying the region of the page being displayed and printed, and +\type{/Rotate}, the number of degrees (in multiples of 90) the page +should be rotated clockwise when it is displayed or printed. + +% /MediaBox is not a good example, since it will never take effect. +\begin{verbatim} +\pdfpagesattr + { /Rotate 90 % rotate all pages by 90 degrees + /CropBox [0 0 612 792] } % the crop size of all pages (in bp) +\end{verbatim} + +\subsection{\cs{pdfpageattr}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfpageattr} \Whatever{tokens}}} + +This is similar to \cs{pdfpagesattr}, but has priority over it. +It can be used to override any attribute given by \cs{pdfpagesattr} +for an individual page. The token list is expanded when \PDFTEX\ ships out +a page. The contents are added to the attributes of the current page. + +If the \cs{pdfpageattr} value contains the string \type{/MediaBox}, +then \PDFTEX\ omits outputting its own \type{/MediaBox} value (which is +\verb|[0 0 |\Something{\it page\_width} \Something{\it +page\_height}\type{]}). (This behavior was introduced in version +1.40.18.) + +\subsection{\cs{pdfomitprocset}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfomitprocset} \Whatever{integer}}} + +If this parameter is zero (the default), the \type{/ProcSet} array is +included if \cs{pdfmajorversion} is~1, and omitted if +$\cs{pdfmajorversion}\ge2$. If this parameter is $>0$, \type{/ProcSet} +is always omitted; if it is $<0$, \type{/ProcSet} is always +included. For information about what \type{/ProcSet} is, see the +\PDFReference\ or other documentation. + +\cs{ProcSet} was considered obsolete as of \PDF~1.4, but conforming +writers should continue to output it. It was formally deprecated in +\PDF~2.0.\introduced{1.40.25} + +\subsection{\cs{pdfpageref}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfpageref} \Something{page number} + \Whatever{expandable}}} + +This primitive expands to the number of the page object that contains +the dictionary for page \Something{page number}. If the page +\Something{page number} does not exist, a warning will be issued, +a fresh unused \PDF\ object will be generated, and \cs{pdfpageref} +will expand to that object number. + +\Eg\ if the dictionary for page~5 of the \TEX\ document is contained in +\PDF\ object no.~18, \cs{pdfpageref5} expands to the number 18. + +\subsection{\cs{pdfpageresources}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfpageresources} \Whatever{tokens}}} + +These tokens are added to the resource dictionary for all pages, before +the font, XObject, and ProcSet resources. For example: + +\begin{verbatim} +\pdfpageresources{/MyPageResourceAttribute /MyValue} +\end{verbatim} + +\section{Form XObjects} + +The next three primitives support a \PDF\ feature called ``object +reuse'' in \PDFTEX. The idea is first to create a `form XObject'. The +content of this object corresponds to the content of a \TEX\ box; it can +contain pictures and references to other form XObjects as well. After +creation, the form XObject can be used multiple times by simply +referring to its object number. This feature can be useful for large +documents with many similar elements, to reduce the duplication of +identical objects. + +These commands behave similarly to \cs{pdfobj}, \cs{pdfrefobj} and +\cs{pdflastobj} (described in the previous section), but instead of +taking raw \PDF\ code, they handle text typeset by \TEX. + +\subsection{\cs{pdfxform}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfxform} \Optional{\Something{attr spec}} + \Optional{\Something{resources spec}} \Something{box number} + \Modelist{h, v, m}}} + +This command creates a form XObject corresponding to the contents of the +box \Something{box number}. The box can contain other raw objects, form +XObjects, or images as well. However, it cannot contain annotations +because those are laid out on a separate layer, are positioned +absolutely, and have dedicated housekeeping. \cs{pdfxform} makes box +\Something{box number} void, as \cs{box} does. + +When \Something{attr spec} is given, the text will be written +as additional attribute into the form XObject dictionary. The +\Something{resources spec} is similar, but the text will be added +to the resources dictionary of the form XObject. The text given by +\Something{attr spec} or \Something{resources spec} is written before +other entries of the form dictionary and\slash or the resources dictionary +and takes priority over later ones. + +\subsection{\cs{pdfrefxform}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfrefxform} \Something{object number} + \Modelist{h, v, m}}} + +The form XObject is kept in memory and will be written to the \PDF\ +output only when its object number is referred to by \cs{pdfrefxform} +or when \cs{pdfxform} is preceded by \cs{immediate}. Nothing is +appended to the list being built. The number of the most recently created +form XObject is accessible via \cs{pdflastxform}. + +When issued, \cs{pdfrefxform} appends a whatsit node to the list being +built. When the whatsit node is searched at shipout time, \PDFTEX\ will +write the form \Something{object number} to the \PDF\ output if it is +not written yet. + +\subsection{\cs{pdflastxform}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdflastxform} \Whatever{read-only integer}}} + +The object number of the most recently created form XObject is accessible +via \cs{pdflastxform}. + +As said, this feature can be used for reusing information. This mechanism +also plays a role in typesetting fill\hyph in forms. Such widgets sometimes +have visuals that show up on user request, but are hidden otherwise. + +\subsection{\cs{pdfxformname}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfxformname} \Something{object number} + \Whatever{expandable}}} + +In \PDF\ files produced by \PDFTEX\ one can recognize a form XObject by +the prefix~\type{/Fm} followed by a number, for instance \type{/Fm2}. +For a given form XObject number, this primitive expands to the number in +the corresponding form XObject name. \Eg\ if \type{/Fm2} corresponds to +some form XObject with object number 7, the \cs{pdfxformname7} +expands to the number~\type{2}. \introduced{1.30.0} + +\section{Graphics inclusion} + +\PDF\ provides a mechanism for embedding graphic and textual objects: +form XObjects. In \PDFTEX\ this mechanism is accessed by means of +\cs{pdfxform}, \cs{pdflastxform} and \cs{pdfrefxform} (described in the +previous section). A special kind of XObjects are bitmap graphics and +for manipulating them similar commands are provided. + +\subsection{\cs{pdfximage}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfximage} + \Optional{\Something{rule spec}} + \Optional{\Something{attr spec}} + \Optional{\Something{page spec}} + \Optional{\Something{pdf box spec}} + \Optional{\Something{colorspace spec}} + \Next + \Something{general text} + \Modelist{h, v, m} +}} + +This command creates an image object from the filename given in +\Something{general text}, \ie\ enclosed in braces. + +The image is kept in memory when this command is executed. It is written +to the \PDF\ output only when either 1)~the \cs{pdfximage} command is +preceded by \cs{immediate}, or 2)~its number is referred to by +\cs{pdfrefximage} (q.v.). + +The dimensions of the image can be controlled via \Something{rule spec}. +The default values are zero for depth and ``running'' for height and +width. If all of them are given, the image will be scaled to fit the +specified values. If some (but not all) are given, the rest will be set +to a value corresponding to the remaining ones so as to make the image +size to yield the same proportion of $width : (height+depth)$ as the +original image size, where depth is treated as zero. If none are given +then the image will have its natural size. + +An image inserted at its natural size often has a resolution of +\type{\pdfimageresolution} (see below) given in dots per inch in the +output file, but some images may contain data specifying the image +resolution, and in such a case the image will be scaled accordingly. The +dimensions of an image can be accessed by putting the \cs{pdfrefximage} +command in a box and checking the box's dimensions: + +\begin{verbatim} +\setbox0=\hbox{\pdfximage{somefile.png}\pdfrefximage\pdflastximage} +\end{verbatim} + +Now we can use \cs{wd0} and \cs{ht0} to find the natural size of the +image as determined by \PDFTEX. + +The image type is specified by the extension of the given file name: +\type{.png} stands for \PNG\ image, \type{.jpg} (or \type{.jpeg}) for +\JPEG, \type{.jbig2} (preferred, but \type{.jb2} works also) for +\JBIGTWO, and \type{.pdf} for \PDF\ file. But once \PDFTEX\ has opened +the file, it checks the file type first by checking the magic number at +the file start, which gets precedence over the file name extension. This +gives a certain degree of fault tolerance, if the file name extension is +stated wrongly. + +Similarly to \cs{pdfxform}, the optional text given by \Something{attr +spec} will be written as additional attributes of the image before other +keys of the image dictionary. When using this, be aware that slightly +different types of \PDF\ objects are created while including \PNG, +\JPEG, or \JBIG2\ bitmaps and \PDF\ images. + +While working with \PDF\ or \JBIG2\ images, \Something{page spec} allows +to specify which page of the document is to be included; the +\Something{page spec} is irrelevant for the other two image formats. + +Starting with \PDFTEX\ 1.11, in the \PDF\ image case, you may also +choose which page box of the image is to be treated as a final bounding +box. If \Something{pdf box spec} is present, it overrides the default +behavior specified by the \cs{pdfpagebox} parameter, and is overridden +by the (obsolete) \cs{pdfforcepagebox} parameter. This option is +irrelevant for non\hyph \PDF\ inclusions. + +Starting with \PDFTEX\ 1.21, \cs{pdfximage} supports a \type{colorspace} +keyword followed by an object number (user\hyph defined colorspace for +the image being included). This feature works for \JPEG\ images only. +\PNG\ images use \RGB\ palettes, \JBIG2 bi-tonal, and \PDF\ images have +self\hyph contained color space information. + +\subsection{\cs{pdfrefximage}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfrefximage} \Something{object number}}} + +\cs{pdfrefximage} appends a whatsit node to the list being built. When +the whatsit node is searched at shipout time, \PDFTEX\ will write the image +with number \Something{object number} to the \PDF\ output if it has not been +written yet. + +\subsection{\cs{pdflastximage}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdflastximage} \Whatever{read-only integer}}} + +\type{\pdflastximage} is the number of the most recently created XObject +image. + +\subsection{\cs{pdfximagebbox}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfximagebbox} \Something{integer} + \Something{integer} \Whatever{expandable}}} + +The dimensions of the bounding box of a \PDF\ image loaded with +\cs{pdfximage} are stored in a table. This primitive returns those +dimensions as follows: + +\begin{verbatim} +\pdfximage{afile.pdf} +\pdfximagebbox\pdflastximage 1 % Returns lower-left x +\pdfximagebbox\pdflastximage 2 % Returns lower-left y +\pdfximagebbox\pdflastximage 3 % Returns upper-right x +\pdfximagebbox\pdflastximage 4 % Returns upper-right y +\end{verbatim} + +\subsection{\cs{pdflastximagecolordepth}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdflastximagecolordepth} + \Whatever{read-only integer}}} + +The color depth (\type{1} for 1-bit images, \type{2} for 2-bit images, +and so on) of the last image accessed with \cs{pdfximage}. + +\subsection{\cs{pdflastximagepages}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdflastximagepages} + \Whatever{read-only integer}}} + +This read-only register returns the highest page number from a file +previously accessed via the \cs{pdfximage} command. +This is useful only for \PDF\ files; it always returns \type{1} +for \PNG, \JPEG, or \JBIGTWO\ files. + +\subsection{\cs{pdfimageresolution}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfimageresolution} \Whatever{integer}}} + +The integer \cs{pdfimageresolution} parameter (given in dots per inch, +dpi) is a last resort value, used only for bitmap (\JPEG, \PNG, +\JBIGTWO) images, but not for \PDF{}s. The priorities are as follows: +Often one image dimension (\type{width} or \type{height}) is stated +explicitly in the \TEX\ file. Then the image is properly scaled so that +the aspect ratio is kept. If both image dimensions are given, the image +will be stretched accordingly, whereby the aspect ratio might get +distorted. If no image dimensions are given in the \TEX\ file, the image +size will be calculated from its width and height in pixels, using the +$x$ and $y$ resolution values normally contained in the image file. If +one of these resolution values is missing or weird (either $<$~0 or +$>$~65535), the \cs{pdfimageresolution} value will be used for both $x$ +and $y$ resolution when calculating the image size. And if the +\cs{pdfimageresolution} is zero, a final fallback resolution of 72dpi is +used. + +The \cs{pdfimageresolution} is read when \PDFTEX\ creates an image via +\cs{pdfximage}. The given value is clipped to the range $0..65535$ +(dpi). + +Currently this parameter is used particularly for calculating the +dimensions of \JPEG\ images with \EXIF\ information (unless at least one +dimension is stated explicitly); the resolution values included in +\EXIF\ data are ignored. + +\subsection{\cs{pdfpagebox}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfpagebox} \Whatever{integer}}} + +When \PDF\ files are included, the command \cs{pdfximage} allows the +selection of which \PDF\ page box to use in the optional +\Something{image attr spec}. If the option isn't present, the page box +defaults to the value of \cs{pdfpagebox} as follows: (1)~media box, +(2)~crop box, (3)~bleed box, (4)~trim box, and (5)~artbox. + +\subsection{\cs{pdfforcepagebox}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfforcepagebox} \Whatever{integer}}} + +%- It is now possible to specify the pdf page box to use when including pdfs. +% The syntax has been extended: +% \pdfximage [<image attr spec>] <general text> (h, v, m) +% <image attr spec> --> [<rule spec>] [<attr spec>] [<page spec>] [<pdf box spec>] +% <pdf box spec> --> mediabox|cropbox|bleedbox|trimbox|artbox +% The default is cropbox (which defaults to mediabox), to be compatible with +% previous versions of pdfTeX. +% The page box specified at \pdfximage can be globally overridden with the +% config parameter always_use_pdfpagebox and the command +% \pdfoptionalwaysusepdfpagebox <integer>, where 0 is the default (use +% whatever is specified with \pdfximage), 1 is media, 2 is crop, 3 is +% bleed, 4 is trim and 5 is artbox. This can only be set once per +% object, i.e., the value used at \pdfximage is remembered. +% See the PDF Reference for an explanation of the boxes. + +The integer primitive \cs{pdfforcepagebox} allows globally overriding +the choice of the page box used with \cs{pdfximage}. It takes the same +values as \cs{pdfpagebox}. The command is available starting with +\PDFTEX\ 1.30.0, as a shortened synonym of obsolete +\cs{pdfoptionalwaysusepdfpagebox} instruction, but is itself now +considered obsolete---a combination of \cs{pdfpagebox} and +\Something{image attr spec} is better. + +\subsection{\cs{pdfinclusionerrorlevel}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfinclusionerrorlevel} \Whatever{integer}}} + +This controls the behavior of \PDFTEX\ when a \PDF\ file is included +which has a newer \PDF\ version than the one specified by +\cs{pdfmajorversion} and \cs{pdfminorversion}. If +\cs{pdfinclusionerrorlevel} is set to~0 (the default), \PDFTEX\ gives a +warning; if 1, \PDFTEX\ raises an error; if negative, no diagnostic at +all is given. + +It was originally a shortened synonym of +\cs{pdfoptionpdfinclusionerrorlevel}, which is now obsolete. +\introduced{1.30.0} + +\subsection{\cs{pdfimagehicolor}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfimagehicolor} \Whatever{integer}}} + +This parameter, when set to~1, enables embedding of \PNG\ images with +16~bit wide color channels at their full color resolution. This +embedding mode is defined only from \PDF\ version~1.5 onwards, so the +\cs{pdfimagehicolor} functionality is automatically disabled in \PDFTEX\ +if $\cs{pdfminorversion}<5$ and $\cs{pdfmajorversion}=1$; in this case, +each 16~bit color channel is reduced to a width of 8~bits by stripping +the lower 8~bits before embedding. The same stripping happens when +\cs{pdfimagehicolor} is set to~0. If $\cs{pdfmajorversion}=1$ and +$\cs{pdfminorversion}\ge5$, or $\cs{pdfmajorversion}\ge2$, the default +value of \cs{pdfimagehicolor} is~1. + +If specified, the parameter must appear before any data is written to +the \PDF\ output. \introduced{1.30.0} + +\subsection{\cs{pdfimageapplygamma}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfimageapplygamma} \Whatever{integer}}} + +This primitive, when set to~1, enables gamma correction while embedding +\PNG\ images, taking the value of the primitive \cs{pdfgamma} as +well as the gamma value embedded in the \PNG\ image into account. When +\cs{pdfimageapplygamma} is set to~0, no gamma correction is +performed. + +If specified, the parameter must appear before any data is written to +the \PDF\ output. \introduced{1.30.0} + +\subsection{\cs{pdfgamma}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfgamma} \Whatever{integer}}} + +This primitive defines the `device gamma' for \PDFTEX. Values are in +promilles (same as \cs{mag}). The default value of this primitive +is~1000, defining a device gamma value of~1.0. + +If \cs{pdfimageapplygamma} is set to~1, then whenever a \PNG\ image is +included, \PDFTEX\ applies a gamma correction. This correction is based +on the value of the \cs{pdfgamma} primitive and the `assumed device +gamma' that is derived from the value embedded in the actual image. If +no embedded value can be found in the \PNG\ image, then the value of +\cs{pdfimagegamma} is used instead. + +If specified, the parameter must appear before any data is written to +the \PDF\ output. \introduced{1.30.0} + +\subsection{\cs{pdfimagegamma}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfimagegamma} \Whatever{integer}}} + +This primitive gives a default `assumed gamma' value for \PNG\ images. +Values are in promilles (same as for \cs{pdfamma}). The default value +of this primitive is~2200, implying an assumed gamma value of~2.2. + +When \PDFTEX\ is applying gamma corrections, images that do not have an +embedded `assumed gamma' value are assumed to have been created for a +device with a gamma of 2.2. Experiments show that this default setting +is correct for a large number of images; however, if your images come +out too dark, you probably want to set \cs{pdfimagegamma} to a lower +value, like~1000. + +If specified, the parameter must appear before any data is written to +the \PDF\ output. \introduced{1.30.0} + +\subsection{\cs{pdfpxdimen}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfpxdimen} \Whatever{dimen}}} + +While working with bitmap graphics or typesetting electronic documents, +it might be convenient to base dimensions on pixels rather than \TeX's +standard units like \type{pt} or \type{em}. For this purpose, \PDFTEX\ +provides an extra unit named \type{px} that takes the dimension given to +the \cs{pdfpxdimen} primitive. For example, to make the unit \type{px} +corresponding to 96dpi pixel density (then $\mbox{1px}=72/96$bp), one +can do the following calculation: + +\begin{verbatim} +\pdfpxdimen=1in % 1 dpi +\divide\pdfpxdimen by 96 % 96 dpi +\hsize=1200px +\end{verbatim} + +Then \cs{hsize} amounts to 1200~pixels in 96dpi, which is exactly +903.375pt, which \TeX\ rounds to 903.36914pt. + +The default value of \cs{pdfpxdimen} is 1.00001bp (for historical +reasons), corresponding to a pixel density of (a few sp off from) 72dpi. +The \LUATEX\ default is 1bp (also a few sp off from 72dpi), so to get +precisely the same behavior in \PDFTEX\ and \LUATEX, set +\cs{pdfpxdimen}\texttt{=1bp}. + +This primitive is completely independent of the +\cs{pdfimageresolution} and \cs{pdfpkresolution} parameters. + +\introduced{1.30.0} It used to be an integer register that gave the +dimension 1px as number of scaled points, defaulting to 65536 (1px equal +to $\mbox{65536sp}=1$pt). Starting with \PDFTEX\ 1.40.0, \cs{pdfpxdimen} +is now a real dimension parameter. + +\subsection{\cs{pdfinclusioncopyfonts}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfinclusioncopyfonts} \Whatever{integer}}} + +If positive, this parameter tells \PDFTEX\ to include fonts that are +embedded in a \PDF\ file loaded with \cs{pdfximage}, even if those fonts +are also available on disk. Bigger files might be created, but included +\PDF\ files are sure to be embedded with the correct fonts; indeed, the +fonts on disk might be different from the embedded ones, and glyphs +might be missing. + +\subsection{\cs{pdfsuppresswarningpagegroup}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfsuppresswarningpagegroup} + \Whatever{integer}}} + +Ordinarily, \PDFTEX\ gives a warning when more than one included \PDF\ +file has a so-called ``page group object'' (\type{/Group}), because only +one can ``win''---that is, be propagated to the page level. Usually +the page groups are identical, but when they are not, the result is +unpredictable. It would be ideal if \PDFTEX\ in fact detected whether +the page groups were the same and only gave the warning in the +problematic case; unfortunately, this is not easy (a patch would be +welcome). Nevertheless, often one observes that there is no actual +problem. Then seeing the warnings on every run is just noise, and can +be suppressed by setting this parameter to a positive number. +\introduced{1.40.15} + +\section{Annotations} + +\PDF\ 1.4 provides four basic kinds of annotations: + +\begin{itemize} +\item hyperlinks, general navigation +\item text clips (notes) +\item movies +\item sound fragments +\end{itemize} + +The first type differs from the other three in that there is a +designated area involved on which one can click, or when moved over some +action occurs. \PDFTEX\ is able to calculate this area, as we will see +later. All annotations can be supported using the next two general +annotation primitives. + +\subsection{\cs{pdfannot}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfannot} \Something{annot type spec} + \Modelist{h, v, m}}} + +This command appends a whatsit node corresponding to an annotation to +the list being built. The dimensions of the annotation can be controlled +via the \Something{rule spec}. The default values are ``running'' for +all width, height and depth. When an annotation is written out, running +dimensions will take the corresponding values from the box containing +the whatsit node representing the annotation. The \Something{general +text} is inserted as raw \PDF\ code to the contents of annotation. The +annotation is written only if the corresponding whatsit node is searched +at shipout time. + +\subsection{\cs{pdflastannot}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdflastannot} \Whatever{read-only integer}}} + +This primitive returns the object number of the last annotation created by +\cs{pdfannot}. These two primitives allow users to create any annotation +that cannot be created by \cs{pdfstartlink} (see below). + +\section{Destinations and links} +\label{sec.linking} + +The first type of annotation (hyperlinks and navigation), mentioned +above, is implemented by three primitives. The first one is used to +define a specific location as being referred to. This location is tied +to the page, not the exact location on the page. The main reason for +this is that \PDFTEX\ maintains a dedicated list of these annotations, +and more when optimized, for the sole purpose of speed. + +\subsection{\cs{pdfdest}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfdest} \Something{dest spec} + \Modelist{h, v, m}}} + +This primitive appends a whatsit node which establishes a destination +for links and bookmark outlines; the link is identified by either a +number or a symbolic name, and the way the viewer is to display the page +is specified in \Something{dest spec}, which must be one of those +mentioned in the table below. + +\begin{smalltable} +\begin{tabular}{ll} +\bf keyword & \bf meaning \cr +\tt fit & fit the page in the window \cr +\tt fith & fit the width of the page \cr +\tt fitv & fit the height of the page \cr +\tt fitb & fit the \type{BoundingBox} of the page \cr +\tt fitbh & fit the width of \type{BoundingBox} of the page \cr +\tt fitbv & fit the height of \type{BoundingBox} of the page \cr +\tt fitr \Something{\rm rule spec} + & fit according to \Something{\rm rule spec} \cr +\tt xyz \Optional{zoom \Something{\rm number}} + & goto the current position (see below) \cr +\tt struct \Optional{\Something{\rm number}} + & create structure destination (see below) \cr +\end{tabular} +\end{smalltable} + +The \Literal{xyz} keyword can optionally be followed by \Literal{zoom} +\Something{integer} to provide a fixed zoom\hyph in. The +\Something{integer} is used like the \TEX\ magnification value, \ie\ +1000 is the normal page view. When \Literal{zoom} \Something{integer} is +given, the zoom factor changes to 0.001 of the \Something{integer} +value, otherwise the current zoom factor is kept unchanged. + +If \Literal{struct} \Something{number} is used, a structure destination +is created instead of a regular destination, referring to the structure +element defined in object \Something{number}. Structure destinations use +a separate namespace and therefore may have the same identifiers as a +regular destination. + +The destination is written out only if the corresponding whatsit node is +searched at shipout time. + +\subsection{\cs{pdfstartlink}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfstartlink} + \Optional{\Something{rule spec}} + \Optional{\Something{attr spec}} + \Something{action spec} + \Modelist{h, m} +}} + +This primitive is used along with \cs{pdfendlink} and appends +a whatsit node corresponding to the start of a hyperlink. The whatsit +node representing the end of the hyperlink is created by +\cs{pdfendlink}. The dimensions of the link are handled in the +similar way as in \cs{pdfannot}. Both \cs{pdfstartlink} and +\cs{pdfendlink} must be in the same level of box nesting. A hyperlink +with running width can be multi\hyph line or even multi\hyph page, in which case +all horizontal boxes with the same nesting level as the boxes containing +\cs{pdfstartlink} and \cs{pdfendlink} will be treated as part of +the hyperlink. The hyperlink is written out only if the corresponding +whatsit node is searched at shipout time. + +Additional attributes, which are explained in great detail in the +\PDFReference, can be given via \Something{attr spec}. Typically, the +attributes specify the color and thickness of any border around the +link. As a simple example, \verb|/C [0.9 0 0] /Border [0 0 2]| specifies +a color (in \RGB) of dark red, and a border thickness of 2~points. + +While all graphics and text in a \PDF\ document have relative positions, +annotations have internally hard\hyph coded absolute positions. Again +this is for the sake of speed optimization. The main disadvantage is +that these annotations do \emph{not} obey transformations issued by +\type{\pdfliteral}. + +The \Something{action spec} specifies the action that should be +performed when the hyperlink is activated, one of (see the syntax +rules): \Literal{user} \Something{user-action spec}, +\Literal{goto} \Something{goto-action spec}, +\Literal{thread} \Something{thread-action spec}. + +\begin{itemize} +\item A \Something{user-action spec} (\type{user{...}}) performs a +user\hyph defined action. Examples: +a \URL, as in \verb|/S /URI /URI (https://tug.org/)|; +a named action, as in \verb|/S /Named /N /NextPage|. + +\item A \Something{goto-action spec} (\type{goto...}) performs various +goto actions, and is by far the most complex action. Here is a copy of +the syntax, for easier reference: + +\Syntax{\small +\Something{goto-action spec} \Means % + \Optional{\Something{goto-action struct spec}} \Something{numid} + \Or \Next \Optional{\Something{file spec}} \Optional{\Something{goto-action struct spec}} \Something{nameid} + \Or \Next \Optional{\Something{file spec}} \Optional{\Something{goto-action struct spec}} \Optional{\Something{page spec}} \Something{general text} + \Or \Next \Something{file spec} \Optional{\Something{goto-action struct spec}} \Something{nameid} \Something{newwindow spec} + \Or \Next \Something{file spec} \Optional{\Something{goto-action struct spec}} \Optional{\Something{page spec}} \Something{general text} \Something{newwindow spec} +} + +\begin{itemize} +\item The \Something {numid} and \Something{nameid} alternatives specify a +destination identifier. + +\item The \Something{page spec} alternative specifies a page number for the +destination. In this case, the zoom factor is given by +\Something{general text}. + +\item The default behavior of \Something{newwindow spec} depends on the +browser setting. + +\item A destination in another \PDF\ file can be given with +\Something{file spec}, in which case \Something{newwindow spec} +specifies whether the file should be opened in a new window. A +\Something{file spec} can be either a \type{(}\Something{string}\type{)} +or a \type{<<}\Something{dictionary}\type{>>}. + +\item If a \Something{goto-action spec} contains a +\Something{goto-action struct spec}, then a structure destination is +referenced in addition to the regular destination. The form with +\Something{general text} is used if and only if a \Something{file spec} +is present; then the \Something{general text} should expand to a literal +\PDF\ dictionary describing a structure destination. Otherwise, the +\Something{numid} or \Something{nameid} directly after the +\Literal{struct} keyword identify a destination which must have been +created with \cs{pdfdest} \Literal{struct}\unskip. + +\end{itemize} + +\item A \Something{thread-action spec} (\type{thread...}) performs +article thread reading. The thread identifier, \Something{numid} or +\Something{nameid}, is similar to the destination identifier. A thread +in another \PDF\ file can be referenced by specifying a \Something{file +spec}. + +\end{itemize} + +\subsection{\cs{pdfendlink}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfendlink} \Modelist{h, m}}} + +This primitive ends a link started with \cs{pdfstartlink}. All text +between \cs{pdfstartlink} and \cs{pdfendlink} will be treated as part +of this link. \PDFTEX\ may break the result across lines (or pages), in which +case it will make several links with the same content. + +\subsection{\cs{pdflastlink}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdflastlink} \Whatever{read-only integer}}} + +This primitive returns the object number of the last link created by +\cs{pdfstartlink} (analogous to \cs{pdflastannot}). +\introduced{1.40.0} + +\subsection{\cs{pdflinkmargin}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdflinkmargin} \Whatever{dimen}}} + +This dimension parameter specifies the margin of the box representing +a hyperlink and is read when a page containing hyperlinks is shipped out. + +\subsection{\cs{pdfdestmargin}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfdestmargin} \Whatever{dimen}}} + +Margin added to the dimensions of the rectangle around the destinations. + +\subsection{\cs{pdfsuppresswarningdupdest}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfsuppresswarningdupdest} \Whatever{integer}}} + +Ordinarily, \PDFTEX\ gives a warning when the same destination is used +more than once. However, due to problematic macro packages, sometimes a +document may end up producing the warning through no fault of its own, +and fixing the macros may not be feasible. Then seeing the warnings on +every run is just noise, and can be suppressed by setting this parameter +to a positive number. \introduced{1.40.13} + +\subsection{\cs{pdfrunninglinkon}, \cs{pdfrunninglinkoff}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfrunninglinkoff}}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfrunninglinkon}}} + +These commands create corresponding whatsit nodes which turn off/on +generation of running links. Their typical usage is to turn off +generation of running links in the header or footer of a page. +Generation of running links is on when the shipout routine begins. + +The generation of running links works roughly like this: \PDFTEX\ keeps +a stack of links created by \cs{pdfstartlink}, called +\type{pdf_link_stack}. When writing out an hbox to \PDF, \PDFTEX\ checks +if the nesting level of the box is the same as the nesting level of the +top entry in \type{pdf_link_stack}; if so, that box would become a link, +too. + +The whatsit nodes created by the above primitives turn off/on a flag +which controls if a hbox being shipped can become a link, in addition to +the previous condition. + +Thus, the commands must be inserted before the hbox in question. For example: + +\begin{verbatim} +% (1) good: +\hbox{\pdfrunninglinkoff + \hbox{text that would become a link otherwise} +} + +% (2) bad: +\hbox{\pdfrunninglinkoff text that would become a link otherwise} +% too late; \pdfrunninglinkoff must be inserted before the box +\end{verbatim} + +\section{Bookmarks} + +\subsection{\cs{pdfoutline}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfoutline} + \Optional{\Something{attr spec}} + \Something{action spec} + \Optional{\Literal{count} \Something{integer}} + \Something{general text} + \Modelist{h, v, m} +}} + +This primitive creates an outline (or bookmark) entry. The first +parameter, \Something{attr spec}, specifies the action to be taken, and +is the same as that allowed for \type{\pdfstartlink}. + +The \Literal{count} \Something{integer} specifies the number of direct +subentries under this entry; specify~0 or omit the clause if this entry +has no subentries. If the \Something{integer} is negative, then all +subentries will be closed and the absolute value of this number +specifies the number of subentries. + +The \Something{general text} is what will be shown in the outline +window. The outline is written to the \PDF\ output immediately. + +\section{Article threads} + +\subsection{\cs{pdfthread}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfthread} \Optional{\Something{rule spec}} + \Optional{\Something{attr spec}} \Something{id spec} \Modelist{h, v, m}}} + +Defines a bead within an article thread. Thread beads with same +identifiers (spread across the document) will be joined together. + +\subsection{\cs{pdfstartthread}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdftstartthread} + \Optional{\Something{rule spec}} + \Optional{\Something{attr spec}} + \Something{id spec} \Modelist{v, m}}} + +This uses the same syntax as \cs{pdfthread}, apart that it must be +followed by a \cs{pdfendthread}. \cs{pdfstartthread} and the +corresponding \cs{pdfendthread} must end up in vboxes with the same +nesting level; all vboxes between them will be added into the thread. + +In the output routine, if there are other newly created boxes which have +the same nesting level as the vbox(es) containing \cs{pdfstartthread} +and \cs{pdfendthread}, they will be also added into the thread, which is +probably not what you want. To avoid such undesired behavior, it's often +enough to wrap boxes that shouldn't belong to the thread by a box to +change their box nesting level. + +\subsection{\cs{pdfendthread}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfendthread} \Modelist{v, m}}} + +This ends an article thread started before by \cs{pdfstartthread}. + +\subsection{\cs{pdfthreadmargin}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfthreadmargin} \Whatever{dimen}}} + +Specifies a margin to be added to the dimensions of a bead within +an article thread. + +\section{Literals and specials} + +\subsection{\cs{pdfliteral}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfliteral} + \Optional{\Literal{shipout}} + \Optional{\Literal{direct} \Or \Literal{page}} + \Something{general text} + \Modelist{h, v, m} + }} + +Analogous to \cs{special} in the original \TEX, this command inserts +raw \PDF\ code into the output, appending a whatsit node to the list +being built. This allows support of color and text transformation, among +other things. + +By default, \Something{general text} is expanded immediately, when the +whatsit node is created, as with \cs{special}. Starting with \PDFTEX\ +1.40.25, the optional keyword \Literal{shipout} can be used to delay +expansion of \Something{general text} until the whatsit node is shipped +out, as with non-\cs{immediate} \cs{write}. + +Normally, \PDFTEX\ ends a text section in the \PDF\ output and sets the +transformation matrix to the current location on the page before +inserting \Something{general text}; this can be turned off by +giving the optional keyword \Literal{direct}. + +Starting with version 1.30.0, \PDFTEX\ supports the keyword \type{page} +in addition to \type{direct}. Both modify the default behavior of +\cs{pdfliteral}, avoiding translation of the coordinate space before +inserting the literal code. The difference is that the \type{page} +keyword instructs \PDFTEX\ to close a \type{BT...ET} text block before +inserting anything. This means that the literal code inserted refers to +the \PDF\ origin (lower-left corner of the page) and can be safely +enclosed with \type{q...Q}. In contrast, using \type{q...Q} operators +inside \cs{pdfliteral} with the \type{direct} keyword will produce +corrupted \PDF\ output, as the \PDF\ standard doesn't allow doing +anything like this within a \type{BT...ET} block. + +\subsection{\cs{special}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{special} \Lbrace\Literal{pdf:} + \Something{text}\Rbrace}} + +This is equivalent to \Syntax{\cs{pdfliteral} +\Lbrace\Something{text}\Rbrace}. + +\subsection{\cs{special\ direct}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{special} \Lbrace\Literal{pdf:direct:} + \Something{text}\Rbrace}} + +This is equivalent to \Syntax{\cs{pdfliteral} \Literal{direct} +\Lbrace\Something{text}\Rbrace}. + +\subsection{\cs{special\ page}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{special} \Lbrace\Literal{pdf:page:} + \Something{text}\Rbrace}} + +This is equivalent to \Syntax{\cs{pdfliteral} \Literal{page} +\Lbrace\Something{text}\Rbrace}. + +\subsection{\cs{special\ shipout}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{special} \Optional{\Literal{shipout}} + \Lbrace\Something{text}\Rbrace}} + +Starting with version 1.40.25, \PDFTEX\ extends the \cs{special} +primitive to support the optional keyword \Literal{shipout}. This delays +expansion of \Something{text} until the page is shipped out, as with +non-\cs{immediate} \cs{write}. By default, \Something{text} is expanded +immediately. + +\Syntax{\cs{special} \Literal{shipout} \Lbrace \Literal{pdf:} +\Something{text}\Rbrace} is equivalent to \Syntax{\cs{pdfliteral} +\Literal{shipout} \Lbrace \Something{text}\Rbrace}. + +\section{Strings} + +\subsection{\cs{pdfescapestring}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfescapestring} \Something{general text} + \Whatever{expandable}}} + +Starting with version 1.30.0, \PDFTEX\ provides a mechanism for +converting a general text into \PDF\ string. Many characters that may be +needed inside such a text (notably parentheses), have a special meaning +inside a \PDF\ string object and thus, can't be used literally. The +primitive replaces each special \PDF\ character by its literal +representation by inserting a backslash before that character. Some +characters (\eg\ space) are also converted into 3\hyph digit octal +number. For example, \verb|\pdfescapestring{Text (1)}| will be expanded +to \type{Text\040\(1\)}. This ensures a literal interpretation of the +text by the \PDF\ viewer. \introduced{1.30.0} + +\subsection{\cs{pdfescapename}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfescapename} \Something{general text} + \Whatever{expandable}}} + +Analogous to \cs{pdfescapestring}, \cs{pdfescapename} replaces each +special \PDF\ character inside the general text by its hexadecimal +representation preceded by a \type{#} character. This ensures the proper +interpretation of the text if used as a \PDF\ name object. In example, +\verb|Text (1)| will be replaced by \type{Text#20#281#29}. +\introduced{1.30.0} + +\subsection{\cs{pdfescapehex}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfescapehex} \Something{general text} + \Whatever{expandable}}} + +This command converts each character of \Something{general text} into its +hexadecimal representation. Each character of the argument becomes a pair of +hexadecimal digits. \introduced{1.30.0} + +\subsection{\cs{pdfunescapehex}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfunescapehex} \Something{general text} + \Whatever{expandable}}} + +This command treats each character pair of \Something{general text} as +a hexadecimal number and returns the corresponding characters. +\introduced{1.30.0} + +\subsection{\cs{pdfstrcmp}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfstrcmp} \Something{general text} + \Something{general text} \Whatever{expandable}}} + +This command compares two strings and expands to \type{0} if the strings +are equal, to \type{-1} if the first string ranks before the second, and +to \type{1} otherwise. \introduced{1.30.0} + +\subsection{\cs{pdfmatch}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfmatch} \Optional{\Literal{icase}} + \Optional{\Literal{subcount} \Something{integer}} \Something{general text} + \Something{general text} \Whatever{expandable}}} + +This command implements pattern matching, using \POSIX\ extended regular +expression syntax. The first \Something{general text} is a pattern and +the second is a string. The command expands to \type{-1} if the pattern +is invalid, to \type{0} if no match is found, and to \type{1} if a match +is found. With the \type{icase} option, the matching is +case-insensitive. The \type{subcount} option sets the size of the table +storing the found (sub)patterns; its default is 10. \introduced{1.30.0} + +\subsection{\cs{pdflastmatch}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdflastmatch} \Something{integer} + \Whatever{expandable}}} + +The matches found with \cs{pdfmatch} are stored in a table. This command +returns the entry for match \Something{integer}, in the format +\Something{position}\type{->}\Something{string}; \Something{position} is +the position of the match (starting at zero) or \type{-1} if no match +was found, and \Something{string} is the matched substring. + +Entry~0 contains the match as a whole; the subsequent entries contain +submatches corresponding to the subpatterns, up to \type{subcount-1}. + +If \Something{integer} is less than zero, an error is given. + +For instance: + +\begin{verbatim} +\pdfmatch subcount 3 {ab(cd)*ef(gh)(ij)}{abefghij} +\pdflastmatch0 % "0->abefghij" +\pdflastmatch1 % "-1->" +\pdflastmatch2 % "4->gh" +\pdflastmatch3 % "-1->" +\end{verbatim} + +Entry~1 is empty because no match was found for \type{cd}, and entry~3 +is empty because it exceeds the table's size as set by \type{subcount}. +\introduced{1.30.0} + +\section{Numbers} + +\subsection{\cs{ifpdfabsnum}, \cs{ifpdfabsdim}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{ifpdfabsnum} \Whatever{expandable}}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{ifpdfabsdim} \Whatever{expandable}}} + +This conditional works like the standard \cs{ifnum} (resp.\ \cs{ifdim}), +except that it compares absolute values of numbers (dimensions). +Although it seems to be a trivial shortcut for a couple of regular +\cs{if} tests, as primitives they are considerably simpler and faster to +use. \introduced{1.40.0} + +\subsection{\cs{pdfnormaldeviate}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfnormaldeviate} \Whatever{expandable}}} + +Generate a normally-distributed random integer with a mean of~0 and +standard deviation 65536. That is, about 68\% of the time, the result +will be between $-65536$ and $65536$ (one standard deviation away from +the mean). About 95\% of results will be within two standard deviations, +and 99.7\% within three. This primitive expands to a list of tokens. +\introduced{1.30.0} + +\subsection{\cs{pdfuniformdeviate}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfuniformdeviate} \Something{number} + \Whatever{expandable}}} + +Generate a uniformly-distributed random integer value between 0 +(inclusive) and \Something{number} (exclusive). This primitive expands +to a list of tokens. \introduced{1.30.0} + +\subsection{\cs{pdfrandomseed}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfrandomseed} \Whatever{read-only integer}}} + +You can use \cs{pdfrandomseed} to query the current seed value, so you +can \eg\ write the value to the log file. The initial value of the seed +is derived from the system time, and is not more than 1\,000\,999\,999 +(this ensures that the value can be used with commands like \cs{count}). +\introduced{1.30.0} + +\subsection{\cs{pdfsetrandomseed}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfsetrandomseed} \Something{number}}} + +Set the random seed (\cs{pdfrandomseed}) to a specific value, +allowing you to replay sequences of semi-randoms at a later moment. +\introduced{1.30.0} + +\section{Timekeeping} + +\subsection{\cs{pdfelapsedtime}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfelapsedtime} \Whatever{read-only integer}}} + +Return a number that represents the time elapsed from the moment of the +start of the run. The elapsed time is returned in `scaled seconds', +meaning seconds divided by 65536, \eg\ \PDFTEX\ has run for +\the\pdfelapsedtime\ `scaled seconds' when this paragraph was typeset. +The primitive will never return a value greater than the highest number +available in \TeX: if the time exceeds 32767 seconds, the constant value +$2^{31}-1$ will be returned. \introduced{1.30.0} + +\subsection{\cs{pdfresettimer}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfresettimer}}} + +Reset the internal timer so that \cs{pdfelapsedtime} +starts returning the scaled seconds from~0 again. \introduced{1.30.0} + +\section{Files} + +\subsection{\cs{pdffiledump}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdffiledump} + \Optional{\Literal{offset} \Something{integer}} + \Optional{\Literal{length} \Something{integer}} + \Something{general text} \Whatever{expandable}}} + +Expands to the dump of the first \type{length} \Something{integer} bytes +of the file specified by \Something{general text}, in uppercase +hexadecimal format (same as \cs{pdfescapehex}), starting at offset +\type{offset}~\Something{number}, or the beginning of the file if +\type{offset} is zero or not specified. If \type{length} is not given, +the default is zero, so expands to nothing. Both \Something{integer}s +must be $\ge0$. For example, the first ten bytes of the source of this +manual are {\tt\pdffiledump length 10 {./\jobname}}. +\introduced{1.30.0} + +\subsection{\cs{pdffilesize}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdffilesize} \Something{general text} + \Whatever{expandable}}} + +Expands to the size of the file specified by \Something{general text}, +\eg\ {\tt \pdffilesize{./\jobname}} for the source of this manual. +\introduced{1.30.0} + +\subsection{\cs{pdfmdfivesum\ file}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfmdfivesum} + \Optional{\Literal{file}} + \Something{general text} \Whatever{expandable}}} + +If the keyword \type{file} is given, expands to the \MDFIVE\ checksum of +the \Something{general text} in uppercase hexadecimal format (same as +\cs{pdfescapehex}). Without \type{file}, expands to the \MDFIVE\ of the +\Something{general text} taken as a string. For example, the \MDFIVE\ of +the source for this manual is {\tt \pdfmdfivesum file{./\jobname}}. +\introduced{1.30.0} + +\subsection{\cs{pdffilemoddate}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdffilemoddate} \Something{general text} + \Whatever{expandable}}} + +Expands to the modification date of file specified by \Something{general +text}, in the same format as for \cs{pdfcreationdate}, \eg\ {\tt +\pdffilemoddate {./\jobname}} for the source of this manual. As of +\PDFTEX\ 1.40.20, if the \type{SOURCE_DATE_EPOCH} and +\type{FORCE_SOURCE_DATE} environment variables are both set, +\cs{pdffilemoddate} returns a value in UTC, ending in \type{Z}. +\introduced{1.30.0} + +\subsection{\cs{input}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{input} \Something{general text} + \Whatever{expandable}}} + +As of \TEXLIVE\ 2020, the \cs{input} primitive in all \TEX\ engines, +including \PDFTEX, now also accepts a group-delimited filename argument, +as a system-dependent extension, as in +\cs{input}\Lbrace\type{foo.tex}\Rbrace. The standard usage of \cs{input} +with a space/token-delimited filename is completely unchanged. + +This group-delimited argument was previously implemented in Lua\TEX; now +it is available in all engines. \ASCII\ double quote characters +(\type{"}) are removed from the filename, but it is otherwise left +unchanged after tokenization. + +This extension is unlike most others in that it affects a primitive in +standard \TEX\ (\cs{input}), rather than being related to a new +primitive, command line option, etc. This is allowed because additional +methods of recognizing filenames are explicitly mentioned in +\type{tex.web} as acceptable system-dependent extensions. + +Incidentally, this does not directly affect \LATEX's \cs{input} +command, as that is a macro redefinition of the standard \cs{input} +primitive. + +\introduced{1.40.21} + +\section{Color stack} + +\PDFTEX\ 1.40.0 introduced color stack support; more generally, stacks +of any graphic state. + +\subsection{\cs{pdfcolorstackinit}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfcolorstackinit} \Optional{\Literal{page}} + \Optional{\Literal{direct}} \Something{general text} \Whatever{expandable}}} + +The primitive initializes a new graphic stack and returns its number. +The optional \Literal{page} keyword instructs \PDFTEX\ to restore the +graphic at the beginning of every new page. The optional +\Literal{direct} keyword has the same effect as for \cs{pdfliteral} +primitive. \introduced{1.40.0} + +\subsection{\cs{pdfcolorstack}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfcolorstack} \Something{stack number} + \Something{stack action} \Something{general text}}} +\noindent \Something{stack action} \Means + \Literal{set} \Or \Literal{push} \Or \Literal{pop} \Or \Literal{current} + +The command operates on the stack of a given \Something{stack number}. +If \Something{stack action} is: + +\begin{description} +\item[\Literal{push}:] the new value in \Something{general text} is inserted at +the top of the graphic stack and becomes the current stack value. + +\item[\Literal{pop}:] the top value is removed from the stack and the new +top value becomes the top of the stack. + +\item[\Literal{set}:] the current value is replaced with +\Something{general text}, without changing the stack size. + +\item[\Literal{current}:] the current stack value is return without +modifying the stack. +\end{description} + +\introduced{1.40.0} + +\section{Transformations} + +Since the content of \cs{pdfliteral} is not interpreted, any +transformation inserted directly into the content stream, as well as +saving and restoring the current transformation matrix, will be +unnoticed by \PDFTEX's positioning mechanism. As a consequence, links +and other annotations (that are formed in \PDF\ on a different layer +then the page content) are not affected by such user-defined +transformations. \PDFTEX\ 1.40.0 solves this problem with three new +primitives. + +\subsection{\cs{pdfsetmatrix}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfsetmatrix}}} + +Affine transformations are normally expressed with six numbers. The +first four (no unit) values defining scaling, rotating and skewing, plus +two extra dimensions for translation (shifting). Since translation is +handled by \TeX\ itself, the \cs{pdfsetmatrix} primitive expects as an +argument a string containing just the first four numbers of the +transformation separated by a space and assumes the two position +coordinates to be~0. + +For example, \verb|\pdfsetmatrix{0.87 -0.5 0.5 0.87}| rotates the +current space by 30 degrees, inserting +\verb|0.87 -0.5 0.5 0.87 0 0 cm| into the output. \introduced{1.40.0} + +\subsection{\cs{pdfsave}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfsave}}} + +The command saves the current transformation by inserting the \type{q} +operator into the content stream. \introduced{1.40.0} + +\subsection{\cs{pdfrestore}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfrestore}}} + +The command restores previously saved transformation by inserting the +\type{Q} operator into the content stream. \cs{pdfsave} and +\cs{pdfrestore} pairs should always be properly nested and should start +and end at the same group level. \introduced{1.40.0} + +\section{Macro programming} + +Expansion-related commands. + +\subsection{\cs{expanded}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{expanded} \Something{tokens} + \Whatever{expandable}}} + +Expands \Something{tokens} in exactly the same way as \cs{message}. In +contrast to \cs{edef}, macro parameter characters do not need to be +doubled. \cs{protected} macros (q.v.) are not expanded. +\introduced{1.40.20} + +\subsection{\cs{ifincsname}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{ifincsname} \Whatever{expandable}}} + +This conditional is true if evaluated inside \cs{csname} \ldots +\cs{endcsname}, and false otherwise. + +\subsection{\cs{ifpdfprimitive}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{ifpdfprimitive} \Something{control sequence} + \Whatever{expandable}}} + +This conditional checks if the following control sequence has its +primitive meaning. If so, \cs{ifpdfprimitive} is true. In any other case +(redefined, made \cs{undefined}, has never been primitive), it is false. +\introduced{1.40.0} + +\subsection{\cs{partokencontext}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{partokencontext} \Something{number}}} + +The \varname{par-token} (\ie\ the token with the name given by +\cs{partokenname}, which is \cs{par} by default; see \cs{partokenname}, +next) is inserted into the input stream in different places, according +to the \cs{partokencontext} value. This value can be: + +0 (the default): {\em par-token} is inserted at empty lines (more + exactly, when a token category~5 is seen in state~$N$, reading a + line); before \cs{end}, \cs{vskip}, \cs{hrule}, \cs{unvbox}, and + \cs{halign}, if \TeX{} is in horizontal mode when those commands are + seen; and in various error recovery situations. These are the + standard cases in \TeX. + +1: {\em par-token} is inserted as above, and also at the end of + \cs{vbox}, \cs{vtop}, and \cs{vcenter}, if \TeX{} is in + horizontal mode at the time. + +2: {\em par-token} is inserted as above, and also at the end of + \cs{insert}, \cs{vadjust}, \cs{output}, \cs{noalign}, and + items of \cs{valign}, again if \TeX{} is in horizontal mode at the + time. + +With the default \cs{partokencontext=0}, \TEX\ behaves in its normal +way: the situations in cases 1 and 2 are processed by a direct call of +{\em end-paragraph} routine, with no emitted {\em par-token}. + +If \cs{partokencontext=1} then \TeX\ inserts the {\em par-token} in +additional cases: when vertical boxes are completed but horizontal mode +is not finished. Since vboxes are not uncommonly inserted directly by +users, with horizontal mode material, this allows macro programmers to +control all such boxes being finished by a {\em par-token}. An example: + +\begin{verbatim} +\partokenname\_mypar +\partokencontext=1 +\def\_mypar{Hi there!\endgraf} +\vbox{Vbox text.} +\end{verbatim} + +This will output ``Hi there!''\ after ``Vbox text.''. + +Finally, with \cs{partokencontext=2}, all cases where classical \TeX\ +uses the direct {\em end-paragraph} routine are changed to emit the {\em +par-token} instead. In contrast to case~1, these commands are rarely +invoked directly by users with horizontal mode material. + +The setting of the register \cs{partokencontext} is local. + +\introduced{1.40.24} + +\subsection{\cs{partokenname}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{partokenname} \Something{control sequence}}} + +\TeX{} internally inserts a control sequence, named \cs{par} by +default, into the input stream at empty lines, the end of vboxes, and +various other places (see \cs{partokencontext}, above). Let's call this +control sequence the \varname{par-token}. + +Executing \cs{partokenname}\Something{control sequence} changes the +name of the \varname{par-token} from \cs{par} to the given +\Something{control sequence}. The setting performed by +\cs{partokenname} is global. + +This makes it possible to release the name \cs{par} to the ``user's name +space'', \ie\ after using \cs{partokenname}, users can define and use +\cs{par} as they wish without changing the behavior of anything internal +to \TeX{}. For example: + +\begin{verbatim} +\catcode`\_=11 +\partokenname\_mypar % use \_mypar at user level +\let\_mypar=\par % make \_mypar equivalent to built-in \par +% +\def\par{some random text} % redefine \par +% +Hello world. + +Goodbye. +\end +\end{verbatim} + +This will not output ``\verb|some random text|'' (the definition of +\cs{par}), due to the \cs{partokenname} setting. + +By default, the meaning of the \varname{par-token} is to end a paragraph +(also named as \cs{endgraf} in the plain \TEX\ format). It can be +changed as usual with, for example, \cs{def}. Naturally, it is the +control sequence name given to \cs{partokenname} that must be +redefined. Continuing the previous example (prior to the \cs{end}): + +\begin{verbatim} +\def\_mypar{Hi there!\endgraf} +Paragraph one. + +Paragraph two.\let\_mypar=\endgraf +\end{verbatim} + +This will output ``Hi there!''\ after ``Paragraph one.'', before ending +the paragraph. + +Another behavior of the \varname{par-token} built into \TEX\ is that +macros not defined as \cs{long} cause the error ``runaway argument'' if +the \varname{par-token} is scanned as a parameter. After +\cs{setpartokenname}, it will be the new control sequence name that +triggers this error, not \cs{par}. For instance (still continuing the +same example): + +\begin{verbatim} +\def\amac#1{} +\amac{long test, no error: \par} +\amac{long test, gives error: \_mypar} +\end{verbatim} + +\introduced{1.40.24} + +\subsection{\cs{pdfprimitive}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfprimitive} \Something{control sequence}}} + +This command executes the primitive meaning of the following control +sequence, regardless of whether the control sequence has been redefined +or made undefined. If the primitive was expandable, \cs{pdfprimitive} +expands also. On the other hand, if the following control sequence never +was a primitive, nothing happens and no error is raised. (In some +versions of \PDFTEX\ prior to 1.40.19, an error was wrongly given.) +\introduced{1.40.0} + +\section{Typesetting} + +\subsection{\cs{pdfinsertht}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfinsertht} \Something{integer} + \Whatever{expandable}}} + +If \Something{integer} is the number of an insertion class, this command +returns the current height of the corresponding box. For instance, the +following returns \type{12pt} in plain \TEX: + +\begin{verbatim} +Abc\footnote*{Whatever.}\par +\pdfinsertht\footins +\end{verbatim} + +\subsection{\cs{pdflastxpos}, \cs{pdflastypos}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdflastxpos} \Whatever{read-only integer}}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdflastypos} \Whatever{read-only integer}}} + +This primitive returns an integer number representing the absolute $x$ +resp.\ $y$ coordinate of the last point marked by \cs{pdfsavepos}. The +unit is scaled points (sp). + +\subsection{\cs{pdfsavepos}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfsavepos} \Modelist{h, v, m}}} + +This primitive marks the current absolute ($x,y$) position on the media, +with the reference point in the lower left corner. It is active only +during page shipout, when the final page is assembled. The position +coordinates can then be retrieved by the \cs{pdflastxpos} and +\cs{pdflastypos} primitives, and \eg\ written out to some auxiliary +file. The coordinates can be used only after the current \cs{shipout} +has been finalized, therefore normally two \PDFTEX\ runs are required to +utilize these primitives. Starting with \PDFTEX\ 1.40.0, this mechanism +can also be used while running in \DVI\ mode. + +\subsection{\cs{quitvmode}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{quitvmode}}} + +The primitive instructs \PDFTEX\ to quit vertical mode and start +typesetting a paragraph. Thus, \cs{quitvmode} has the same basic effect +as the \cs{leavevmode} macro from \type{plain.tex}. However, +\cs{leavevmode} expands the \cs{everypar} token list, which may or may +not be desired. \cs{quitvmode} does not expand \cs{everypar}. +\introduced{1.21a} + +\subsection{\cs{vadjust}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{vadjust} + \Optional{\Something{pre spec}} + \Something{filler} + \Lbrace \Something{vertical mode material} \Rbrace + \Modelist{h, m} +}} + +In \PDFTEX, the \cs{vadjust} primitive supports an additional optional +qualifier \Something{pre spec}, which is simply the string \type{pre}, +to the original \TEX. If no \type{pre} is given, \cs{vadjust} behaves +exactly as the original (see {\em The \TEX book}, p.~281): it appends an +adjustment item created from \Something{vertical mode material} to the +current list {\em after} the line in which \cs{vadjust} appears. In +contrast, with the qualifier \type{pre}, the adjustment item is put {\em +before} the line in which \cs{vadjust pre} appears. + +\section{Tracing} + +\subsection{\cs{showstream}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{showstream} \Whatever{integer}}} + +If this primitive parameter has a value corresponding to an open output +stream (which has been opened with \cs{openout}), then any \cs{show}, +\cs{showthe}, \cs{showbox} or \cs{showlists} commands do not write +output to the terminal, but instead write only to the referenced output +stream, as if they were written with \cs{immediate}\cs{write}. + +For example: +\begin{verbatim} +\newwrite\myoutstream +\immediate\openout\myoutstream="infofile" +\showstream=\myoutstream +% From now on, \show... commands are redirected to "infofile.tex". +\show\TeX +% +\showstream=-1 +% -1 is never a open file and therefore restores +% normal \show... behavior. +\immediate\closeout\myoutstream +\end{verbatim} + +This example would not generate any special output to the terminal or +log file (except for any logging done by \cs{newwrite}. It writes +this text to \type{infofile.tex}, including the initial blank line, +since that is what \cs{show} does: + +\begin{verbatim} + +> \TeX=macro: +->T\kern -.1667em\lower .5ex\hbox {E}\kern -.125emX +\end{verbatim} + +This primitive is available, with identical behavior, in all \TeX\ +engines except the original \TEX\ and \eTeX, where \cs{showstream} +remains undefined. \introduced{1.40.24} + +\subsection{\cs{tracinglostchars}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{tracinglostchars} \Whatever{integer}}} + +This primitive parameter has always been part of \TEX, and its operation +with values $\le2$ is unchanged. In addition, if its value is +$\ge3$, then ``Missing character'' reports become full errors +(ordinarily they are only logged), and the character code is reported in +hex. For example: + +\begin{verbatim} +\tracinglostchars=3 +\font\x=logo10 \x \char99 \end +\end{verbatim} + +\noindent will result in this error message: + +\begin{verbatim} +! Missing character: There is no c ("63) in font logo10. +\end{verbatim} + +\noindent (The \type{logo10} font only defines the capital letters used +in the \METAFONT\ and \METAPOST\ logos, so there is no lowercase.) + +This new behavior is essentially the same in all \TeX\ engines except +the original \TEX\ and \eTeX, where the behavior of +\cs{tracinglostchars} remains unchanged. + +\introduced{1.40.22} + +\subsection{\cs{tracingstacklevels}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{tracingstacklevels} \Whatever{integer}}} + +If this primitive parameter is $>0$, and $\cs{tracingmacros}>0$, macro +expansion logging is truncated at the specified depth. Also, and more +importantly, each relevant log line is given a prefix beginning with +\type{~}, either followed by a \type{.} character for each expansion +level or another \type{~} if the expansion was truncated. For example: + +\begin{verbatim} +\tracingmacros=1 % so macro expansion is logged at all +\tracingstacklevels=2 % cut off at level 2 +\def\a#1{\relax} % argument to show parameter logging is affected too +\def\b#1{\a{#1}} +\b1 +\end{verbatim} + +\noindent logs the following: + +\begin{verbatim} +~.\b #1->\a {#1} +#1<-1 +~~\a +\end{verbatim} + +Thus, the expansion of \cs{b} is logged normally, with the addition +of the \type{~.} prefix. The expansion of \cs{a} is truncated +(level~2), hence neither the parameters nor body expansion are shown. + +Furthermore, an \cs{input} file counts as an expansion level, and the +input filename is logged. So, if we add this to our example above: +\begin{verbatim} +\input anotherfile +\end{verbatim} + +\noindent where \type{anotherfile.tex} simply contains \cs{b2}, the log +will get: + +\begin{verbatim} +~.INPUT anotherfile.tex +~~\b +~~\a +\end{verbatim} + +Now the \cs{b} expansion is not logged either, since the expansion +depth is higher than the \cs{tracingstacklevels} value. + +The intended use of \cs{tracingstacklevels} is not so much to truncate +logging as to indicate expansion levels for detailed debugging. Thus +normally it would be set to a large number (\cs{maxdimen}), so that +everything is fully logged, with the addition of the expansion level +indication with the number of dots in the prefix. + +This primitive is available, with identical behavior, in all \TeX\ +engines except the original \TEX\ and \eTeX, where +\cs{tracingstacklevels} remains undefined. \introduced{1.40.22} + +\section{\PDFTEX\ execution environment} + +\subsection{\cs{pdfdraftmode}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfdraftmode} \Whatever{integer}}} + +When set to 1 (or set by the command-line switch \type{-draftmode}), +\PDFTEX\ doesn't write the output \PDF\ file and doesn't read any +images, but does do everything else (including writing auxiliary files), +thus speeding up compilations when you know you need an extra run but +don't care about the output, \eg\ just to get cross-references started. +If specified, the parameter must appear before any data is written to +the \PDF\ output. \introduced{1.40.0} + +\subsection{\cs{pdfshellescape}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdfshellescape} \Whatever{read-only integer}}} + +This primitive is~1 if \cs{write18} is enabled, 2 if its operation is +restricted to known-safe programs, and 0 otherwise. \introduced{1.30.0} + +\subsection{\cs{pdftexbanner}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdftexbanner} \Whatever{expandable}}} + +Returns the \PDFTEX\ banner message, \eg\ for the version used here: +{\tt \pdftexbanner}. \introduced{1.20a} + +\subsection{\cs{pdftexrevision}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdftexrevision} \Whatever{expandable}}} + +Returns the revision number of \PDFTEX, \eg\ for \PDFTEX\ version +\currentpdftex\ (used to produce this document), it returns the number +{\tt \pdftexrevision}. + +\subsection{\cs{pdftexversion}} +\pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\cs{pdftexversion} \Whatever{read-only integer}}} + +Returns the version of \PDFTEX\ multiplied by 100, excluding the tertiary +version number, \eg\ for \PDFTEX\ version \currentpdftex\ (used to +produce this document), it returns {\tt \number\pdftexversion}. + +\chapter{Graphics} + +\PDFTEX\ supports inclusion of pictures in \PNG, \JPEG, \JBIGTWO, and +\PDF\ format; a few differences between these are discussed below. The +most common technique with \TEX, the inclusion of \EPS\ figures, is not +(and cannot be) supported; \PDF\ inclusion is usually the easiest +replacement. \EPS\ files can be converted to \PDF\ by \GHOSTSCRIPT, +Adobe Distiller or other \POSTSCRIPT\hyph to\hyph \PDF\ converters. + +\PDFTEX\ allows inserting selected pages from \PDF\ files, carry their +own fonts, graphics, and pixel images, into a document. The cover page +of this manual is an example of such an insert, being a one-page +document generated by \PDFTEX. + +By default \PDFTEX\ takes the BoundingBox of a \PDF\ file from its +CropBox if available, otherwise from its MediaBox. This can be +influenced by the \Something{pdf box spec} option to the \cs{pdfximage} +primitive, or by setting the \cs{pdfpagebox} or \cs{pdfforcepagebox} +primitives to a value corresponding to the desired box type. + +To get the right BoundingBox from a \EPS\ file, before converting to +\PDF, it is necessary to transform the \EPS\ file so that the start +point is at the (0,0)~coordinate and the page size is set exactly +corresponding to the BoundingBox. A \PERL\ script (\EPSTOPDF) for this +purpose and the \PSTOPDF\ program that comes with \GHOSTSCRIPT\ can do a +similar job. (Concerning this conversion, they can handle complete +directories, remove some garbage from files, takes precautions against +duplicate conversion, etc.) + +The lossless compressing \PNG\ format is useful for embedding crisp +pixel graphics (\eg\ line scans, screenshots). As of \PDFTEX\ 1.30.0, +the alpha channel of \PNG\ images is processed if available; this allows +embedding of images with simple transparency. The \PNG\ format does not +support the CMYK color model, which is sometimes required for print +media (this often can be replaced by four component \JPEG\ in high +quality or lossless compression mode). Photos in \PNG\ format have +rather poor compression; here the \JPEG\ format is preferable. + +Embedding \PNG\ images in the general case requires \PDFTEX\ to +uncompress the pixel array and to re\hyph compress it to the \PDF\ +requirements; this may take a noticeable amount of time. Since \PDFTEX\ +1.30.0 there is now a fast \PNG\ embedding mode that goes without +uncompressing; the image data are directly copied into the \PDF\ stream, +resulting in a much higher embedding speed. This direct mode is only +activated if the image array structure of the \PNG\ file is compatible +with the \PDF\ image structure; \eg\ an interlaced \PNG\ image requires +uncompressing to re\hyph arrange the image lines. Luckily, it seems that +in practice \PNG\ files commonly allow fast copying. The use of gamma +correction disables fast copying, as it requires calculations with +individual pixels. Whether the fast copy mode is used for a \PNG\ image +can be seen from the log file, which then shows the string `(PNG copy)' +after the \PNG\ file name. + +The \JPEG\ format is normally used in lossy mode; then it's ideal for +embedding photos. It's not recommended for crisp images from synthetic +sources with a limited amount of colors. Both \JFIF\ and \EXIF\ are +supported for additional information. + +The \JBIGTWO\ format works only for bi-tonal (black and white) pixel +images like scanned line and text documents, but for these it has +typically a much higher compression ratio than the other two pixel image +formats. The \JBIGTWO\ format is part of the \PDF\ standard since +version 1.5; native \JBIGTWO\ image inclusion is available in \PDFTEX\ +since version 1.40.0. A \JBIGTWO\ file might contain many images, which +gives an even better compression ratio than with a single image per +file, as \JBIGTWO\ encoders can exploit similarities between bit +patterns over several images. Encoders for \JBIGTWO\ can operate in +lossy as well as lossless modes. A free \JBIGTWO\ encoder is available: +see \useurl{jbigenc} (perhaps there are others). + +Other options for graphics in \PDFTEX\ are: + +\begin{description} +\item[\LATEX\ picture mode] Since this is implemented simply in terms +of font characters, it works in exactly the same way as usual. + +\item[Xy-pic] If the \POSTSCRIPT\ backend is not requested, Xy-pic +uses its own Type~1 fonts, and needs no special attention. + +\item[tpic] The tpic \cs{special} commands (used in some +macro packages) can be redefined to produce literal \PDF, using some macros +written by Hans Hagen. + +\item[\METAPOST] Although the output of \METAPOST\ is +\POSTSCRIPT, it is in a highly simplified form, and a \METAPOST\ to +\PDF\ conversion (\MPTOPDF, available as \type{supp-pdf.tex} and +\type{supp-pdf.mkii}, written by Hans Hagen and Tanmoy Bhattacharya) is +implemented as a set of macros which reads \METAPOST\ output and +supports all of its features. + +\end{description} + +The inclusion of raw \POSTSCRIPT\ commands, a technique utilized by for +instance the \type{pstricks} package, cannot directly be supported. +Although \PDF\ is a direct descendant of \POSTSCRIPT, it lacks any +programming language commands, and cannot deal with arbitrary +\POSTSCRIPT. + +\chapter{Additional \PDF\ keys} +\label{sec.addpdfkeys} + +{\em This section is based on the manual on keys written by Martin Schr\"oder.} + +A \PDF\ document should contain only the structures and attributes defined +in the \PDF\ specification. However, the specification allows applications +to insert additional keys, provided they follow certain rules. + +The most important rule is that developers have to register with Adobe +prefixes for the keys they want to insert. Hans Hagen has registered the +prefix \type{PTEX} for \PDFTEX. + +\PDFTEX\ generates an XObject for every included \PDF\ image. The dictionary of +this object contains these additional keys: + +\begin{smalltable} +\begin{tabular}{lll} +\bf key & \bf type & meaning \cr +\tt PTEX.FileName & string & The name of the included file as seen by + \PDFTEX. \cr +\tt PTEX.InfoDict & dictionary & The \type{InfoDict} + of the included \PDF\ (an indirect + object). \cr +\tt PTEX.PageNumber & integer & The page number of the included file. \cr +\end{tabular} +\end{smalltable} + +The \PDFReference\ says: ``Although viewer applications can +store custom metadata in the document information dictionary, it is +inappropriate to store private content or structural information there; +such information should be stored in the document catalog instead.'' + +Although it would seem more natural to put this information in the +document information dictionary, we have to obey the rules laid down in +the \PDFReference. The following key ends up in the document catalog. + +\begin{smalltable} +\begin{tabular}{llp{.66\hsize}} +\bf key & \bf type & meaning \cr +\tt PTEX.Fullbanner & string & The full version of the \PDFTEX\ + binary that produced the file as displayed by {\tt pdftex + \type{--version}}, a.k.a.\ \cs{pdftexbanner} ({\tt\pdftexbanner}). + This is necessary because the string in the \type{Producer} key in + the info dictionary is rather short, namely {\tt + pdfTeX-\currentpdftex}. \cr +\end{tabular} +\end{smalltable} + +Any or all of these keys can be suppressed with the +\cs{pdfsuppressptexinfo} primitive, described in +section~\ref{sec.docinfocatalog}. + +\chapter{Character translation} + +Characters that are input to \PDFTEX\ are subject to optional \TEX\ +character translation (\TCX) under control of a \TCX\ file. The \TCX\ +maps the input character codes (\eg\ from \cs{input} or \cs{read}) to +the character codes as seen by \PDFTEX. This mapping takes place before +the characters enter \PDFTEX's `mouth'. If no \TCX\ file is read, the +input characters enter \PDFTEX\ directly; no mapping is done. + +\TCX\ files consist of lines each containing one or two integer numbers +in the range 0..255, either in decimal or hex notation. A comment sign +\type{%} in a \TCX\ line starts a comment until the end of line. The +first number in each line is for matching the input character code, the +second, optional number is the corresponding \TEX\ character code. If a +line contains only one number, characters with this code enter \PDFTEX\ +unchanged; no mapping is done. + +\TCX\ mapping also influences \PDFTEX\ output streams for \cs{message} +and \cs{write}. Without \TCX\ mapping, only characters that are within +the range 32..126 are flagged as `printable', meaning that these +characters are output directly by \cs{message} and \cs{write} +primitives. Characters outside the range 32..126 are instead output in +escaped form, \eg\ as \type{^^A} for a character with code \type{0x01}. +When a character code is mentioned in the 2nd column of the \TCX\ file, +or as the only value in a line, it is flagged as `printable'. During +\cs{message} and \cs{write}, output characters are mapped in reverse +direction: they are looked up in the 2nd column of the \TCX\ file and +the corresponding values from the 1st column are output. Again, if a +\PDFTEX\ character code is found as the only number in a line, no +mapping is done. Mentioning a character code as the only number on a +line has the sole purpose to flag this code `printable'. + +The characters output into the \PDF\ file, \eg\ by the \cs{pdfliteral} +or \cs{special} primitives, are not subject to \TCX\ output remapping. + +Beware: Character translation interferes with the \ENCTEX\ primitives; to +avoid surprises, don't use \ENCTEX\ and \TCX\ mapping at the same time. +Further details about \TCX\ file loading can be found in the \WEBC\ +manual, \useurl{tcxfiles}. + +Nowadays \TCX\ files are rarely used. The \type{-8bit} command line +option makes all characters printable, when that is desired. + +\appendix + +\chapter{Installation} + +This section describes the steps needed to get \PDFTEX\ running on a +system where \PDFTEX\ is not yet installed. Nowadays all known \TEX\ +distributions, such as \TEXLIVE, \MIKTEX, and \MACTEX, include \PDFTEX\ +already. For example, the \TEXLIVE\ distribution comes with \PDFTEX\ +versions for many \UNIX, \WIN, and Mac systems; more information +can be found at \hbox{\useurl{texlive}.} When you use any of these +distributions, you don't need to bother with the \PDFTEX\ installation +procedure in this chapter. + +If there is no precompiled \PDFTEX\ binary for your system, or the +version coming with a distribution is not the current one and you would +like to try out a fresh \PDFTEX\ immediately, you will need to build +\PDFTEX\ from sources; read on. You should already have a working \TEX\ +system, \eg\ \TEXLIVE, into which the freshly compiled \PDFTEX\ will be +integrated. (Numerous support files are required in order to have a +working binary.) Note that the installation description in this manual +is \WEBC\hyph specific. + +\section{Getting sources and binaries} + +The primary home page is \useurl{ptexorg}, where you also find bug +tracking information. Development sources are at \useurl{ptexdevel}. +Precompiled binaries for some platforms are available in subdirectories +below \useurl{ctansystems}, although these are unlikely to be up to +date. Your best bet is to use a current \TEX\ distribution. + +\section{Compiling} + +Given a directory where the sources have been downloaded or checked out, +some working on a \UNIX\ system the following steps are needed to +compile \PDFTEX: + +\begin{verbatim} +cd source # from branches/stable! +./build-pdftex.sh +\end{verbatim} + +The binary \filename{pdftex} will hopefully then end up in the +subdirectory \filename{build-pdftex/texk/web2c}. The additional +utilities \filename{pdftosrc} and \filename{ttf2afm} are in the \PDFTEX\ +source repository, but are not built by default. If they are needed, +edit \filename{build-pdftex.sh} to \type{--enable} them. + +For \PDFTEX\ maintainers: a sibling script to \type{build-pdftex.sh} is +in the repository, namely \type{sync-pdftex.sh}, which syncs changes +from a \TEXLIVE\ source repository to a \PDFTEX\ source repository. Read +and understand the script before using it! + +\section{Placing files} + +The next step is to put the newly-compiled \filename{pdftex} (and, if +enabled, \filename{pdftosrc} and/or \filename{ttf2afm}) binaries into +the installed distribution. \Eg\ for a typical \TEXLIVE\ system:\\ +\texttt{/usr/local/texlive/\rcsyear/bin/}\type{x86_64-linux}, replacing +\type{x86_64-linux} with the appropriate platform name. (As always, it +is sensible to rename the installed \filename{pdftex} binary first and +not just overwrite it.) + +If you're doing this into a live hierarchy, run \verb|fmtutil-sys refresh| +afterwards, so that all formats are regenerated system-wide +with the new \filename{pdftex} binary. + +If what you want is to test a new version of \filename{pdftex}, and not +replace the installed version, the best approach is to copy it into the +binary directory as, say, \filename{pdftex.new}. The different +executable name can sometimes change the files found and other behavior, +but usually this won't matter. + +\PDFTEX\ uses the Kpathsea library to search for supporting files; many +variables and configuration files can come into play. See the Kpathsea +manual: \useurl{kpathsea}. + +\section{Configuration of \PDFTEX} +\label{sec.cfg} + +As opposed to \TEX\ with its \DVI\ output, the \PDFTEX\ program does not +have a separate postprocessing stage to transform the \TEX\ input into +final \PDF. As a consequence, all data needed for building the \PDF\ +must be available during the \PDFTEX\ run, in particular information on +media dimensions and offsets, graphics files for embedding, and font +information (font files, encodings). + +When \TEX\ builds a page, it places items relative to the (1in,1in) +offset from the top left page corner (the \DVI\ reference point). +Separate \DVI\ postprocessors allow specifying the paper size (\eg\ A4 +or letter), so that this reference point is moved to the correct +position on the paper, and the text ends up at the right place. + +In \PDF, the paper dimensions are part of the page definition, and +\PDFTEX\ therefore requires that they be defined at the beginning of the +\PDFTEX\ run. As with pages described by \POSTSCRIPT, the \PDF\ +reference point is in the lower left corner. + +Formerly, these dimensions and other \PDFTEX\ parameters were read in +from a configuration file named \filename{pdftex.cfg}, which had a +special (non-\TEX) format, at the start of processing. Nowadays such a +file is ignored by \PDFTEX. Instead, the page dimensions and offsets, as +well as many other parameters, can be set by \PDFTEX\ primitives during +the \PDFTEX\ format building process, so that the settings are dumped +into the fresh format and consequently will be used when \PDFTEX\ is +later called with that format. All settings from the format can still be +overridden during a \PDFTEX\ run by using the same primitives. This +configuration concept is a more unified approach, as it avoids a +configuration file with a special format. + +A list of \PDFTEX\ primitives likely relevant to setting up the \PDFTEX\ +engine is given in the table below. All primitives are described in +detail in previous sections. + +\begin{smalltable} +\begin{tabular}{@{}llll@{}} +\bf primitive name & \bf type & \bf default & \bf comment\cr +\cs{pdfoutput} & integer & 0 & \DVI\ by default \cr +\cs{pdfadjustspacing} & integer & 0 & off \cr +\cs{pdfcompresslevel} & integer & 9 & best \cr +\cs{pdfobjcompresslevel} & integer & 0 & no object streams \cr +\cs{pdfdecimaldigits} & integer & 3 & \cr +\cs{pdfimageresolution} & integer & 72 & dpi \cr +\cs{pdfpkresolution} & integer & 0 & \cr +\cs{pdfpkmode} & tokens & empty & mode per \type{mktex.cnf}\cr +\cs{pdfuniqueresname} & integer & 0 & \cr +\cs{pdfprotrudechars} & integer & 0 & \cr +\cs{pdfgentounicode} & integer & 0 & \cr +\cs{pdfmajorversion} & integer & 1 & output \PDF\ 1.x \cr +\cs{pdfminorversion} & integer & 4 & specifically \PDF\ 1.4 \cr +\cs{pdfpagebox} & integer & 0 & \cr +\cs{pdfforcepagebox} & integer & 0 & \cr +\cs{pdfinclusionerrorlevel} & integer & 0 & \cr +%---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +\cs{pdfhorigin} & dimension & 1in & \cr +\cs{pdfvorigin} & dimension & 1in & \cr +\cs{pdfpagewidth} & dimension & 0pt & \cr +\cs{pdfpageheight} & dimension & 0pt & \cr +\cs{pdflinkmargin} & dimension & 0pt & \cr +\cs{pdfdestmargin} & dimension & 0pt & \cr +\cs{pdfthreadmargin} & dimension & 0pt & \cr +\cs{pdfmapfile} & text & \filename{pdftex.map} & not dumped\cr +\end{tabular} +\end{smalltable} + +Figure~\ref{fig.configfile} shows a recent \PDFTEX\ configuration file +(\type{pdftexconfig.tex}) from \TEXLIVE\ (part of the +\type{tex-ini-files} package), overriding some of these settings. It is +read when a format is built. It enables \PDF\ output, sets paper +dimensions and the default pixel density for \PK\ font inclusion. The +default values are chosen so that \PDFTEX\ often can be used (\eg\ in +\type{-ini} mode) without setting any additional parameters. + +\begin{figure}[t] +\myverbatiminput{incl/pdftexconfig.txt} +\caption{\PDFTEX\ configuration file for \TEXLIVE\ + (\texttt{pdftexconfig.tex}).} +\label{fig.configfile} +\end{figure} + +Independent of whether such a configuration file is read, the first +action in a \PDFTEX\ run is reading the global \WEBC\ configuration file +(\filename{texmf.cnf}), which is common to all programs in the \WEBC\ +system. This file mainly defines file search paths, the memory layout +(\eg\ string pool and hash size), and a few other general parameters. + +\section{Creating format files} + +The \PDFTEX\ engine supports building separate formats for either \DVI\ +or \PDF\ output in the same way as the classical \TEX\ engine does for +\DVI. Format generation (and other \type{initex} features) is enabled by +the \type{-ini} option. The default mode (\DVI\ or \PDF) can be chosen +either on the command line by setting the option \type{-output-format} +to \type{dvi} or \type{pdf}, or by setting the \cs{pdfoutput} parameter. +The format file inherits this setting, so that a later invocation of +\PDFTEX\ with this format starts in the preselected mode (which can +still be overridden). A format file can be read in only by the engine +that has generated it; a format incompatible with an engine leads to a +fatal error. + +It is customary to package the configuration and macro file input into a +\type{.ini} file. \Eg\ the file \type{etex.ini} in +figure~\ref{fig.etex.ini} is for generating an \ETEX\ format with \DVI\ +output. It has been traditional for many years to generate +\type{etex.fmt} with \PDFTEX\ rather than the original \ETEX, because +\PDFTEX\ contains useful additional programming and other +non-\PDF-related features. + +The \type{pdfetex.ini} file figure~\ref{fig.pdfetex.ini} shows the +corresponding format with \PDF\ output by default; this is what creates +the format file read when \type{pdftex} is normally invoked. + +The corresponding \PDFTEX\ invocations for format generation are: + +\begin{verbatim} +pdftex -ini *etex.ini +pdftex -ini *pdfetex.ini +\end{verbatim} + +These calls produce format files \filename{etex.fmt}, +\filename{pdfetex.fmt}, as the default format file name is taken from +the input file name. You can override this with the \type{-jobname} +option. The asterisk \type{*} before the file name is an unusual flag, +only used in \type{-ini} mode, which causes the \PDFTEX\ engine to +enable \ETEX's features. + +To reiterate, the distribution (\TEXLIVE, \MIKTEX) usually takes care of +format (re)generation. The above is if you need to do such things +manually for testing, debugging, development, etc. + +Incidentally, as of \PDFTEX\ 1.40.21 (\TEX\ Live 2020), \filename{.fmt} +files are compressed with \type{zlib}. This makes for a considerable +savings in space, and consequently in time. + +\begin{figure}[t] +\myverbatiminput{incl/ini-etex.txt} +\caption{The \type{etex.ini} file to dump the plain \ETEX\ format with + \DVI\ output.} +\label{fig.etex.ini} +\end{figure} + +\begin{figure}[t] +\myverbatiminput{incl/ini-pdfetex.txt} +\caption{The \type{pdfetex.ini} file to dump plain \ETEX\ with \PDF\ output.} +\label{fig.pdfetex.ini} +\end{figure} + +\section{Testing the installation} + +When everything is set up, you can test the installation. A simple test +of plain \PDFTEX\ is: + +\begin{verbatim} +pdftex story \\end +\end{verbatim} + +This should typeset the famous one-page short story by A.U. Thor, +generating a \PDF\ file. + +A more thorough and descriptive test is the plain \TEX\ test file +\filename{samplepdf.tex}, available in the distribution in the +\type{samplepdftex/} directory. Process this file by typing: + +\begin{verbatim} +pdftex samplepdf +\end{verbatim} + +If the installation is ok, this should produce a file called +\filename{samplepdf.pdf}. The file \filename {samplepdf.tex} is also a +good place to look for examples of how to use \PDFTEX's primitives. + +\section{Common problems} + +The most common problem with installations is that \PDFTEX\ complains +that some file cannot be found. In such cases, first make sure that all +\TEX-related environment variables are unset. For detailed debugging, +set the environment variable \type{KPATHSEA_DEBUG=255} before running +\PDFTEX\ or use the option \verb|-kpathsea-debug 255|. More options can +be found in the \WEBC\ documentation. + +Variables in \filename{texmf.cnf} can be overwritten by environment +variables. Here are some of the most common problems you can encounter +when getting started: + +\begin{itemize} +\item \verb|I can't find the format file `pdftex.fmt'!| \newline + \verb|I can't find the format file `pdflatex.fmt'!| + + The format file is not created (see above how to do that) or + is not properly placed. Make sure that \type{TEXFORMATS} in + \filename {texmf.cnf} contains the path to \filename {pdftex.fmt} + or \filename {pdflatex.fmt}. + +\item \verb|Fatal format file error; I'm stymied| + + This typically appears if you forgot to regenerate the \type{.fmt} + files after installing a new version of the \PDFTEX\ binary. + The first line tells by which engine the offending format was generated. + +\item \PDFTEX\ cannot find one or more map files (\type{*.map}), + encoding vectors (\type{*.enc}), virtual fonts, Type~1 fonts, + TrueType or OpenType fonts, or some image file. + + Make sure that the required file exists and the corresponding variable + in \filename{texmf.cnf} contains a path to the file. + + When you have installed new fonts, and your \PDF\ viewer complains + about missing fonts, you should take a look at the log file produced + by \PDFTEX. Missing fonts, map files, encoding vectors as well as + missing characters (glyphs) are reported there. +\end{itemize} + +For more help resources of all kinds, see \useurl{tughelp}. + +\chapter{Formal syntax specification} +\label{sec.syntax} + +This appendix formally specifies the \PDFTEX-specific extensions to the +\TEX\ macro programming language. Most primitive names are prefixed by +`\type{pdf}'. General definitions and syntax rules follow after the list +of primitives. + +Two new units of measure were introduced in \PDFTEX\ 1.30.0: the new +Didot ($\mbox{1nd}=0.375$mm) and the new Cicero ($\mbox{1nc}=12$nd). The +former was proposed by \ISO\ in 1975. + +\begingroup + \parindent=0pt + % because the summary is nothing but a long string of \Syntax + % commands, we have to allow breaks, in contrast to the main text. + \def\aftersyntax{\par\vskip 1.5pt plus1pt minus1pt\relax} + +% Generated list of primitives (see Makefile). +\input{incl/pdftex-syntax.tex} + +\section{General definitions and syntax rules} + +\Syntax{ +\Something{general text} \Means + \Lbrace \Something{balanced text} \Rbrace +} + +\Syntax{ +\Something{attr spec} \Means + \Literal{attr} \Something{general text} +} + +\Syntax{ +\Something{resources spec} \Means + \Literal{resources} \Something{general text} +} + +\Syntax{ +\Something{rule spec} \Means + (\Literal{width} \Or \Literal{height} \Or \Literal{depth}) + \Something{dimen} \Optional{\Something{rule spec}} +} + +%\Syntax{\Something{object type spec} \Means +% \Optional{\Literal{stream} +% \Optional{\Something{attr spec}}} \Something{object contents}} + +\Syntax{ +\Something{object type spec} \Means + \Literal{reserveobjnum} + \Or \Next + \Optional{\Literal{useobjnum} \Something{number}} \Next + \Optional{\Literal{stream} \Optional{\Something{attr spec}}} + \Something{object contents} +} + +\Syntax{ +\Something{annot type spec} \Means + \Literal{reserveobjnum} + \Or \Next + \Optional{\Literal{useobjnum} \Something{number}} + \Optional{\Something{rule spec}} + \Something{general text} +} + +\Syntax{ +\Something{object contents} \Means + \Something{file spec} + \Or \Something{general text} +} + +\Syntax{ +\Something{xform attr spec} \Means + \Optional{\Something{attr spec}} \Optional{\Something{resources spec}} +} + +\Syntax{ +\Something{image attr spec} \Means + \Optional{\Something{rule spec}} + \Optional{\Something{attr spec}} + \Optional{\Something{page spec}} + \Optional{\Something{colorspace spec}} + \Next \Optional{\Something{pdf box spec}} +} + +\Syntax{ +\Something{outline spec} \Means + \Optional{\Something{attr spec}} + \Something{action spec} + \Optional{\Literal{count} \Something{number}} + \Something{general text} +} + +\Syntax{ +\Something{action spec} \Means + \Literal{user} \Something{user-action spec} + \Or \Literal{goto} \Something{goto-action spec} + \Or \Next \Literal{thread} \Something{thread-action spec} +} + +\Syntax{ +\Something{user-action spec} \Means + \Something{general text} +} + +\Syntax{ +\Something{goto-action struct spec} \Means + \Literal{struct} (\Something{numid} \Or \Literal{nameid} \Or \Something{general text}) +} + +% keep in sync with redundant copy below. +\Syntax{ +\Something{goto-action spec} \Means + \Optional{\Something{goto-action struct spec}} \Something{numid} + \Or \Next \Optional{\Something{file spec}} \Optional{\Something{goto-action struct spec}} \Something{nameid} + \Or \Next \Optional{\Something{file spec}} \Optional{\Something{goto-action struct spec}} \Optional{\Something{page spec}} \Something{general text} + \Or \Next \Something{file spec} \Optional{\Something{goto-action struct spec}} \Something{nameid} \Something{newwindow spec} + \Or \Next \Something{file spec} \Optional{\Something{goto-action struct spec}} \Optional{\Something{page spec}} \Something{general text} \Something{newwindow spec} +} + +\Syntax{ +\Something{thread-action spec} \Means + \Optional{\Something{file spec}} \Something{numid} + \Or \Optional{\Something{file spec}} \Something{nameid} +} + +\Syntax{ +\Something{colorspace spec} \Means + \Literal{colorspace} \Something{number} +} + +\Syntax{ +\Something{pdf box spec} \Means + \Literal{mediabox} + \Or \Literal{cropbox} + \Or \Literal{bleedbox} + \Or \Literal{trimbox} + \Or \Literal{artbox} +} + +\Syntax{ +\Something{map spec} \Means + \Lbrace \Optional{\Something{map modifier}} + \Something{balanced text} \Rbrace +} + +\Syntax{ +\Something{map modifier} \Means + \Literal{+} \Or \Literal{=} \Or \Literal{-} +} + +\Syntax{ +\Something{numid} \Means + \Literal{num} \Something{number} +} + +\Syntax{ +\Something{nameid} \Means + \Literal{name} \Something{general text} +} + +\Syntax{ +\Something{newwindow spec} \Means + \Literal{newwindow} \Or \Literal{nonewwindow} +} + +\Syntax{ +\Something{dest spec} \Means + \Optional{\Literal{struct} \Something{number}} + (\Something{numid} \Or \Something{nameid}) + \Something{dest type} +} + +\Syntax{ +\Something{dest type} \Means + \Literal{xyz} \Optional{\Literal{zoom} \Something{number}} + \Or \Literal{fitr} \Something{rule spec} + \Or \Next \Literal{fitbh} + \Or \Literal{fitbv} + \Or \Literal{fitb} + \Or \Literal{fith} + \Or \Literal{fitv} + \Or \Literal{fit} +} + +\Syntax{ +\Something{thread spec} \Means + \Optional{\Something{rule spec}} + \Optional{\Something{attr spec}} + \Something{id spec} +} + +\Syntax{ +\Something{id spec} \Means + \Something{numid} \Or \Something{nameid} +} + +\Syntax{ +\Something{file spec} \Means + \Literal{file} \Something{general text} +} + +\Syntax{ +\Something{page spec} \Means + \Literal{page} \Something{number} +} + +\Syntax{ +\Something{expand spec} \Means + \Something{stretch} + \Something{shrink} + \Something{step} + \Optional{\Literal{autoexpand}} +} + +\Syntax{ +\Something{stretch} \Means + \Something{number} +} + +\Syntax{ +\Something{shrink} \Means + \Something{number} +} + +\Syntax{ +\Something{step} \Means + \Something{number} +} + +\Syntax{ +\Something{pre spec} \Means + \Literal{pre} +} + +\Syntax{ +\Something{stack action} \Means + \Literal{set} \Or \Literal{push} \Or \Literal{pop} \Or \Literal{current} +} + +\endgroup % of syntax definitions + +\medskip + +A \Something{general text} is expanded immediately, like \cs{special} +in traditional \TEX, unless explicitly mentioned otherwise. + +Some of the object and image-related primitives can be prefixed by +\cs{immediate}. + +\chapter{Abbreviations used in this manual} + +In this document we use numerous abbreviations. For convenience we give +their meanings here. + +\abbrevlist + +\twocolumn {\small \emergencystretch=1.5em \input{incl/fdl-1.2.tex}} + +\end{document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual/pdftexmanual.cls b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual/pdftexmanual.cls new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..bc67671234f --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual/pdftexmanual.cls @@ -0,0 +1,230 @@ +% $Id: pdftexmanual.cls 914 2024-01-07 21:48:39Z karl $ +% LaTeX class file for the pdfTeX manual. +% Originally written by Karl Berry, 2023. Public domain. + +\LoadClass[11pt]{report} % use {report} so we can have \appendix +\usepackage[T1]{fontenc} % for \textbackslash +\usepackage{fullpage} % fewer pages is better +\usepackage{rerunfilecheck} % so the Makefile can easily rerun +\usepackage{mflogo,graphicx} % basics +\usepackage{verbatim} % for \verbatiminput + +\divide\abovecaptionskip by 2 % too spacey by default +\setcounter{topnumber}{3} % .ini figures + +\pdfminorversion=3 % maximally compatible +\pdfobjcompresslevel=0 % since minor version=3, can't compress objects +\hbadness=10000 % don't care +\overfullrule=1mm % but want to see overfull + +% This is the default hsize for letter; not ideal, but works well enough +% for a4. Too irritating to rewrite to avoid overfull hboxes with two +% different widths. +\AtBeginDocument{\hsize=469.75502pt } + +% If |microtype| is loaded, deactivate it in verbatim blocks. +% It often manipulates a leading |\| in CM rather too much, +% thus messing with the visible fixed-width alignment. +% \begin{macrocode} +\AtBeginDocument{% + \@ifpackageloaded{microtype} + {\g@addto@macro\@verbatim{\microtypesetup{activate=false}}}{} +} + +% We want a verbatim command that will accept all special characters (so +% \texttt doesn't work) and work in arguments (so \verb doesn't work). +% +% - can't use obeyspaces, it generates extra space. +%\PassOptionsToPackage{obeyspaces}{url} +% +% - can't use \HyOrg@url (\url saved by hyperref), it doesn't obey spaces. +% But we have to live with it, switching all args with spaces to \verb. +\usepackage[allowmove]{url} % we only do simple stuff in \caption, let it work +\def\type{\HyOrg@url} +% / in our document is PostScript, not a url, so we want to allow a +% break before, not after. But then we get an infloop, so disallow breaks. +%\g@addto@macro\UrlSpecials{\do\/{\slash}} +\g@addto@macro\UrlNoBreaks{\do\/} +% +% - can't use \nolinkurl from hyperref, doesn't obey spaces, breaks after /, +% sometimes expands, e.g., \pdfcreationdate. +% https://github.com/latex3/hyperref/issues/291 +%\def\type{\nolinkurl} +% +% - can't use \lstinline, doesn't work in tables. +%\usepackage{listings}\def\type{\lstinline} +% +% - expl3 attempt: +% \NewDocumentCommand\type{v}{\texttt{#1}} +% but gets error, so I guess I don't understand: +% LaTeX cmd Error: Verbatim-like command '\type' illegal in arg +% \pdftexprimitive{\Syntax{\Tex{\pdfoutput} +% +% It seems the general problem remains unsolved in LaTeX. + +\usepackage[pdfa,hidelinks,linktoc=all]{hyperref} + +% Assorted convenience macros. +% +% we can use \textbackslash since we load [T1]. +\DeclareRobustCommand{\cs}[1]{\mbox{\tt \textbackslash #1}}% +\DeclareRobustCommand{\titleref}[1]{{\slshape\frenchspacing#1\/}} + +\def\eTeX{{$\varepsilon$}-\kern-.125em\TeX} +\def\filename{\type} +\def\hyph{-\penalty0 \hskip0pt \relax} % allow hyphenation after a - +\def\varname{\textit} +% +\def\ConTeXt{C\kern-.0333emon\-\kern-.0667em\TeX\kern-.0333emt} +\def\MDFIVE{MD5} % not oldstyle 5, capital MD +\def\PDFReference{PDF reference manual} +\def\THANH{H\`an Th\^e\llap{\raise 0.5ex\hbox{\'{}}} Th\`anh} +%S +\def\eg{e.g.,}\def\Eg{E.g.,} +\def\ie{i.e.,}\def\Ie{I.e.,} +% +% the default \verbatiminput evidently ends with a blank line. +% Also, it does not give an error when the input file does not exist, +% only a terminal message. Let's complain. +\def\myverbatiminput#1{\begingroup + \small + \openin0 = #1 + \ifeof0 \errmessage{No verbatiminput file #1}\else\closein0 \fi + \verbatiminput{#1}% + \vspace{-\baselineskip}% +\endgroup} +% +\newenvironment{smalltable}{\medskip\small}{\medskip} + +% Our self-identified version information. +% +\def\svnscan $#1 #2 #3 #4-#5-#6 #7${ + \def\rcsrevision{#3} + \def\rcsyear{#4} + \def\rcsmonth{#5} + \def\rcsday{{\count0=#6\relax\the\count0}} + \def\rcsmonthname{\ifcase\rcsmonth ERROR\or + January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or July\or + August\or September\or October\or November\or December\else ERROR\fi} +} +\def\versplit#1#2#3{#1.#2#3}% 140 -> 1.40 +\def\currentpdftex{\expandafter\versplit\the\pdftexversion.\pdftexrevision} + +% Syntax descriptions. +% +% used in main source text to mark a primitive. +\def\pdftexprimitive{\par\nobreak\vspace{-4pt}\noindent\strut} + +\def\aftersyntax{\nobreak\smallskip} % changed for appendix +\def\Syntax #1{{#1\strut}\par\aftersyntax} +\def\Next {\nobreak\newline\hbox to 4em{}\nobreak} % multiline syntax +\def\Sugar {} +\def\Lbrace {\Sugar{\allowbreak\texttt{\textbraceleft}}} +\def\Literal #1{\Sugar{\type{#1}}} +\def\Means {\Sugar{\ensuremath{\rightarrow}\;\;}} +\def\Modelist #1{\Sugar{\;\ensuremath{(\hbox{#1})}}} +\def\Optional #1{\Sugar{\ensuremath{\,[\,\hbox{#1}\,]\,}}} +\def\Or {\Sugar{\,\ensuremath{\vert}\,\nobreak\ }} +\def\Something#1{\Sugar{\ensuremath{\langle}{#1}\ensuremath{\rangle}}} +\def\Rbrace {\Sugar{\texttt{\textbraceright}}} +%\def\Tex #1{\Sugar{\type{#1}}} +\def\Whatever #1{\Sugar{\kern.75em\ensuremath{(\hbox{#1})}}} % parens + % more space before, more separation on syntax lines. +% introduced: +\def\introduced#1{The primitive was introduced in \PDFTEX\ #1.} +\def\introducedplural#1{The primitives were introduced in \PDFTEX\ #1.} + +% Urls. +% +% assume all defined url control sequences start with "url": +\def\useurl#1{\expandafter\csname url#1\endcsname} + +\urldef{\urlctansystems} \url{https://ctan.org/tex-archive/systems} +\urldef{\urletexctan} \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/etex} +\urldef{\urljbigenc} \url{https://github.com/agl/jbig2enc} +\urldef{\urlkpathsea} \url{https://tug.org/kpathsea} +\urldef{\urlluatex} \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/luatex} +\urldef{\urlpdfreference} \url{https://pdfa.org/resource/pdf-specification-index/} +\urldef{\urlptexctan} \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/pdftex} +\urldef{\urlptexdevel} \url{svn://tug.org/pdftex/branches/stable} +\urldef{\urlptexbugs} \url{https://lists.tug.org/pdftex} +\urldef{\urlptexorg} \url{https://www.pdftex.org} +\urldef{\urltcxfiles} \url{https://tug.org/texinfohtml/web2c.html#TCX-files} +\urldef{\urltexlive} \url{https://tug.org/texlive} +\urldef{\urlthanhtruetypetub} \url{https://tug.org/TUGboat/tb30-1/tb94thanh.pdf} +\urldef{\urltughelp} \url{https://tug.org/begin} +\urldef{\urlwebc} \url{https://tug.org/web2c} +\urldef{\urlxetex} \url{https://tug.org/xetex} +\urldef{\urlwindows} \url{http://ctan.org/tex-archive/systems/windows} + +% Abbreviations. +\newtoks\abbrevtoks +\def\abbrevlist{{% + \par\bigskip + \small + \advance\baselineskip by 2pt plus1pt minus1pt + \halign{&##\qquad\hfil\cr\the\abbrevtoks}% +}} +\def\abbrevitem#1#2{#1\cr} +\def\abbreviation[#1] #2 #3{% + \expandafter\def\csname#1\endcsname{#2}% + \abbrevtoks = \expandafter{\the\abbrevtoks \abbrevitem{#2}{#3}} +} + +\abbreviation [AFM] {AFM} {Adobe Font Metrics} +\abbreviation [ASCII] {ASCII} {American Standard Code for Information Interchange} +\abbreviation [CONTEXT] {\ConTeXt} {general purpose macro package} +\abbreviation [CTAN] {CTAN} {global \TEX\ archive server} +\abbreviation [DVI] {DVI} {native \TEX\ DeVice Independent file format} +\abbreviation [ENCTEX] {enc\TeX} {enc\TeX\ extension to \TEX} +\abbreviation [EPSTOPDF] {epstopdf} {\EPS\ to \PDF\ conversion tool} +\abbreviation [EPS] {EPS} {Encapsulated PostScript} +\abbreviation [EPLAIN] {Eplain} {Expanded plain \TEX\ format} +\abbreviation [ETEX] {\eTeX} {a stable extension to \TEX} +\abbreviation [EXIF] {EXIF} {Exchangeable Image File format (JPEG file variant)} +\abbreviation [GHOSTSCRIPT] {Ghostscript} {\POSTSCRIPT\ and \PDF\ language interpreter} +\abbreviation [GNU] {GNU} {GNU's Not Unix} +\abbreviation [HZ] {HZ} {Hermann Zapf's paragraph-breaking optimizations} +\abbreviation [ISO] {ISO} {International Organization for Standardization} +\abbreviation [JBIGTWO] {JBIG2} {Joint Bi-level Image Experts Group image format, version 2} +\abbreviation [JBIG] {JBIG} {Joint Bi-level Image Experts Group image format} +\abbreviation [JFIF] {JFIF} {JPEG File Interchange Format} +\abbreviation [JPEG] {JPEG} {Joint Photographic Experts Group} +\abbreviation [LATEX] {\LaTeX} {general-purpose macro package} +\abbreviation [LMTX] {LMTX} {the LuaMeta\TeX\ engine} +\abbreviation [LUATEX] {Lua\TeX} {the Lua\TeX\ engine} +\abbreviation [MACTEX] {Mac\-\TeX} {\TEXLIVE\ on the Mac} +\abbreviation [METAFONT] {\MF} {graphic programming environment, bitmap output} +\abbreviation [METAPOST] {MetaPost} {graphic programming environment, vector output} +\abbreviation [MIKTEX] {MiK\TeX} {\TeX\ distribution for \WIN} +\abbreviation [MLTEX] {ml\TeX} {ML\TeX\ extension to \TEX} +\abbreviation [MPTOPDF] {mptopdf} {\METAPOST\ to \PDF\ conversion tool} +\abbreviation [PDFA] {PDF/\kern-.05em A} {PDF A/* standards} +\abbreviation [PDFETEX] {pdfe\TeX} {\ETEX\ extension supporting \PDF\ output} +\abbreviation [PDFLATEX] {pdf\LaTeX} {\LATEX\ format using \PDFTEX, producing \PDF} +\abbreviation [PDFTEX] {pdf\TeX} {\TEX\ extension supporting \PDF\ output} +\abbreviation [PDF] {PDF} {Portable Document Format} +\abbreviation [PERL] {Perl} {Perl programming environment} +\abbreviation [PFA] {PFA} {Adobe PostScript Font format, ASCII} +\abbreviation [PFB] {PFB} {Adobe PostScript Font format, binary} +\abbreviation [PK] {PK} {Packed bitmap font} +\abbreviation [PNG] {PNG} {Portable Network Graphics} +\abbreviation [POSIX] {POSIX} {Portable Operating System Interface} +\abbreviation [POSTSCRIPT] {PostScript} {general graphics language} +\abbreviation [PSTOPDF] {PStoPDF} {PostScript to \PDF\ converter (on top of \GHOSTSCRIPT)} +\abbreviation [RGB] {RGB} {red--green--blue color specification} +\abbreviation [TCX] {TCX} {\TEX\ Character Translation} +\abbreviation [TDS] {TDS} {\TEX\ Directory Standard} +\abbreviation [TEXINFO] {Texinfo} {\GNU\ documentation format} +\abbreviation [TEXLIVE] {\TeX\ Live} {\TeX\ Live distribution (cross-platform)} +\abbreviation [TEX] {\TeX} {typographic language and program} +\abbreviation [TFM] {TFM} {\TEX\ Font Metrics} +\abbreviation [TIF] {TIFF} {Tagged Interchange File format} +\abbreviation [TUG] {TUG} {\TEX\ Users Group, \texttt{tug.org}} +\abbreviation [UNIX] {Unix} {Unix platform} +\abbreviation [URL] {url} {Uniform Resource Locator} +\abbreviation [UTFEIGHT] {\mbox{UTF-8}} {Uniform Resource Locator} +\abbreviation [WEBC] {Web2C} {Implementation framework for \TEX\ and friends} +\abbreviation [WEB] {WEB} {literate programming environment} +\abbreviation [WIN] {Windows} {Microsoft Windows platform} +\abbreviation [XETEX] {Xe\TeX} {the Xe\TeX\ engine} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual/syntaxform.awk b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual/syntaxform.awk deleted file mode 100644 index cdabfe77f82..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual/syntaxform.awk +++ /dev/null @@ -1,124 +0,0 @@ -# $Id: syntaxform.awk 742 2016-04-25 17:30:55Z karl $ -# Public domain. Originally written by Petr Olsak. -# pdftex-syntax.tex and pdftex-t.tex --> pdftex-syntax.txt -# requires gawk due to gensub() function - -BEGIN{ - buffer = ""; -} - -/\015*$/ { - gsub(/\015*$/, ""); -} - -/^%%S NL/ { - print ""; - next; -} - -/^%%S/ { - gsub (/^%%S/, "%%" ); - print; - next; -} - -/^\\Syntax/ { - printing = 1; - indentation = 0; - next; -} - -// { - if (buffer != "") { - gsub(/^ */, ""); - $0 = buffer $0; - } - buffer = ""; -} - -/\|\|/ { - gsub(/\|\|/, "-"); -} - -/^ */{ - gsub(/^ */, indspaces); -} - -/\\Something/ { - $0 = gensub(/\\Something *{([^}]*)}/, "<\\1>", "g"); -} - -/\\Literal/ { - $0 = gensub(/\\Literal *{([^}]*)}/, "\\1", "g"); -} - -/\\Tex/ { - $0 = gensub(/\\Tex *{([^}]*)}/, "\\1", "g"); -} - -/\\tex/ { - $0 = gensub(/\\tex *{([^}]*)}/, "\\\\\\1", "g"); -} - - -/\\Optional/ { - $0 = gensub(/\\Optional *{([^}]*)}/, "[\\1]", "g"); -} - -/\\Means/ { - gsub(/\\Means/, "-->"); - indentation = match($0, /-->/); - indspaces = " "; - for(i=0; i < indentation; i++) - indspaces = indspaces " "; -} - -/\\Lbrace/ { - gsub(/\\Lbrace/, "{"); -} - -/\\Rbrace/ { - gsub(/\\Rbrace/, "}"); -} - -/\\Or/ { - gsub(/\\Or/, "|"); -} - -/\\Next/ { - gsub(/\\Next /, ""); -} - -/\\unkern/ { - gsub(/\\unkern */, ""); -} - -/\\(Whatever|Modelist)/ { - whatind = 57; - whatpos = match($0, /\\(Whatever|Modelist)/); - b = substr($0, 0, whatpos - 1) - c = substr($0, whatpos) - c = gensub(/\\(Whatever|Modelist) *{([^}]*)}/, "(\\2)", "g", c); - $0 = b; - for(i = whatpos; i < whatind; i++) - $0 = $0 " "; - $0 = $0 c; -} - -/^}/ {printing = 0;} - -/% *$/ { - gsub(/% *$/, ""); - buffer = $0; - next; -} - -/^ *$/ { - $0 = "================= ERROR"; -} - -/ *$/ { - gsub(/ *$/, ""); -} - -{ if (printing) print; } diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual/syntaxform.pl b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual/syntaxform.pl index ad92b3ce303..2ebe41e9901 100755 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual/syntaxform.pl +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/pdftex/manual/syntaxform.pl @@ -1,70 +1,74 @@ #!/usr/bin/env perl -# $Id: syntaxform.pl 743 2016-04-25 17:34:08Z karl $ +# $Id: syntaxform.pl 914 2024-01-07 21:48:39Z karl $ # Public domain. Originally written by Karl Berry, 2016. -# Read pdftex-t.tex, generate pdftex-syntax.tex +# Read pdftex.tex and generate pdftex-syntax.tex # by looking for the primitive descriptions. -use warnings; +use strict; use warnings; + +# classes need to be shown in a specific order, +# and have specific text for the headings. +# sorry for using an array. global for simpler sorting. +my %class_info = ( + "integer" => [1, "Integer registers"], + "read-only integer" => [2, "Read-only integers"], + "dimen" => [3, "Dimen registers"], + "tokens" => [4, "Token registers"], + "expandable" => [5, "Expandable commands"], + "general" => [6, "General commands"], +); + +exit (&main ()); sub main { my %primitive = &read_manual_for_primitives (); # group primitives into classes based on their \Whatever construct. my %class; + #warn "\n\f\n sorting\n"; for my $p (sort keys %primitive) { + #print STDERR "sorting primitive $p..."; my ($class) = $primitive{$p} =~ /\\Whatever *\{(.*?)\}/; # general commands don't have a \Whatever. $class = "general" if ! $class; + #warn "class $class\n"; # append this primitive, comma-separated. $class{$class} .= "$p," } print <<END_HEADER; -%%S \$Id: syntaxform.pl 742 2016-04-25 17:30:55Z karl \$ -%%S This is the list of new or extended primitives provided by pdftex. -%%S Don't edit this file, as it is now auto-generated from the -%%S pdfTeX manual source pdftex-t.tex (and the generated -%%S pdftex-syntax.tex) by the script syntaxform.awk. -%%S Syntax rule conventions borrowed from `TeXbook naruby' by Petr Olsak. +% This is the list of new or extended primitives provided by pdftex. +% Don't edit this file, as it is auto-generated from the +% pdfTeX manual source pdftex.tex by the script syntaxform.pl. +% Syntax rule conventions borrowed from `TeXbook naruby' by Petr Olsak. END_HEADER &print_by_class (\%class, \%primitive); return 0; } { - # classes should be shown in a specific order, - # and have specific text for the headings. - # sorry for using an array. - my %class_info = ( - "integer" => [1, "Integer registers"], - "read||only integer" => [2, "Read-only integers"], - "dimen" => [3, "Dimen registers"], - "tokens" => [4, "Token registers"], - "expandable" => [5, "Expandable commands"], - "general" => [6, "General commands"], - ); sub print_by_class { my ($class_ref,$primitive_ref) = @_; my %class = %$class_ref; + #warn "\n\f\n printing by class\n"; for my $c (sort by_class keys %class) { - my $aref = $class_info{$c}; + #warn "\f printing class $c\n"; + my $aref = $class_info{$c}; my $heading_name = $class_info{$c}->[1]; - # the %%S lines are for syntaxform.awk + #warn " heading_name $heading_name\n"; print <<END_START_CLASS; -%%S NL -%%S $heading_name: -\\subsubject{$heading_name} +\\section{$heading_name} -\\startpacked END_START_CLASS # extract list of primitives for this class. my @prims = split (/,/, $class{$c}); for my $p (@prims) { my $val = $primitive_ref->{$p}; + #warn " primitive $p, val $val\n"; # get rid of the \pdftexprimitive{ and trailing } $val =~ s,^\\pdftexprimitive *\{,,; @@ -79,11 +83,14 @@ END_START_CLASS print "\n$val\n"; } - print "\n\\stoppacked\n"; } } -sub by_class { $class_info{$a}->[0] <=> $class_info{$b}->[0]; } +sub by_class { + if (! defined ($class_info{$a}->[0])) { + warn "undef $a $class_info{$a},", $class_info{$a}->[0], ".\n"; } +# if (! $class_info{$b}->[0]) { warn "no class info for $b\n"; } +$class_info{$a}->[0] <=> $class_info{$b}->[0]; } } # end block for %class_info @@ -95,6 +102,7 @@ sub by_class { $class_info{$a}->[0] <=> $class_info{$b}->[0]; } sub read_manual_for_primitives { my $printing = 0; my $primitive = ""; + my %primitive; while (<>) { # \pdftexprimitive block ends at next unindented blank or \... line. @@ -103,14 +111,10 @@ sub read_manual_for_primitives { $printing = 1; my $type; - # \tex is used for primitives specified without a leading \. - ($type,$primitive) = m/\\([Tt])ex *\{(.*?)\}/; + ($primitive) = m/\\cs *\{(.*?)\}/; + #warn "$.: found primitive $primitive\n"; warn "$ARGV:$.: no primitive found in: $_" if (! $primitive); - $primitive = "\\$primitive" if $type eq "t"; - - # \pdfmovechars is still in the manual, but doesn't do anything. - # Omit it from the output. - next if $primitive eq "\\pdfmovechars"; + $primitive = "\\$primitive"; # Just one case, \special, has multiple instances of \pdftexprimitive. # kludge by appending spaces to the name to make it unique; @@ -122,10 +126,9 @@ sub read_manual_for_primitives { # concatenate lines of definition; assume spacing is reasonable. chomp; $primitive{$primitive} .= $_; + #warn " concatenated $primitive to $primitive{$primitive}\n"; } } return %primitive; } - -exit (&main ()); |